Skip to main content

Full text of "Choice and chance"

See other formats


CHOICE  AND   CHANCE. 


BY    THE    SAME    AUTHOR. 

Lately  published,    Svo.,    542  pages,  price  16s., 

TKILINEAR    COOKDINATES, 

AND  OTHER  METHODS  OF  MODEEN  ANALYTICAL  GEOMETRY 
OF  TWO  DIMENSIONS. 


"  A  sound  work  on  a  high  form  of   algebraic   geometry Trilinear 

Coordinates  are   the   starting  points,  and  determinants  the  instruments."  — 
AtJiencBum,  Sept.  18, 1869. 
• 

"  It  contains  all  or  nearly  all  that  a  student  requires  to  enable  him  to 
become  thoroughly  acquainted  with  those  modern  methods  which  are  increas 
ing  in  importance  every  day." — Educational  Times. 


CAMBRIDGE:  DEIGHTON,  BELL  AND  CO. 
LONDON :  BELL  AND  DALDY. 


CHOICE    AND    CHANCE 


BY    THE    REV. 

WILLIAM  ALLEN  WHITWORTH,  M.  A. 

I 1 
FELLOW  OF  ST.  JOHN'S  COLLEGE,  CAMBRIDGE. 


iiicm,  (Snlargeb. 


CAMBBIDGE  : 

DEIGHTON,    BELL    AND    CO 
LONDON :  BELL  AND  DALDY. 

1870. 

[All  rights  reserved.] 


•\ 


.  >* 


rficJZ 

LIVERPOOL : 

PRINTED   EY   D.   MARPLES, 
LORD    STREET. 


PREFACE. 


IN  this  second  edition  I  have  enlarged  the  appendices 
so  as  to  meet  the  wants  of  advanced  students.  I  have 
also  added  a  collection  of  upwards  of  one  hundred 
miscellaneous  examples,  which  I  think  will  add  very 
much  to  the  utility  of  the  book. 

It  should  be  observed  that  the  two  chapters  headed 
respectively  Choice  and  Chance  are  simply  arithmetic, 
and  ought  not  to  be  beyond  the  comprehension  of  the 
ordinary  reader  who  has  never  seen  an  algebraical  sym 
bol.  But  while  expressly  written  for  unscientific  readers, 
they  have  been  found  very  helpful  to  the  young  mathe 
matician,  when  he  was  about  to  read  in  his  algebra  the 
hitherto  difficult  and  embarrassing  chapters  on  permu 
tations  and  combinations,  or  on  probability. 

The  appendices  are  addressed  entirely  to  algebraical 
students.  In  the  first  appendix  the  usual  theorems 
respecting  permutations  and  combinations  are  esta 
blished  by  new  proofs,  the  same  reasoning  which 
was  pursued  with  as  little  technicality  as  possible 
in  the  body  of  the  work,  being  here  expressed  in 
algebraical  language. 

In  the  second  and  third  appendices,  which  are  newly 
added  in  this  edition,  a  series  of  propositions  are  given 
which  are  not  usually  found  in  text  books  of  algebra. 


VI  PREFACE. 

But  I  can  see  no  reason  why  examples  of  such 
simple  propositions  as  the  xiiith  and  xxvth  should 
be  excluded  from  elementary  treatises  in  which  more 
complex  but  essentially  less  important  theorems 
generally  find  place. 

The  classification  of  a  variety  of  propositions  under 
the  titles  of  Distribution  and  Derangement  will  con 
tribute  (it  is  hoped)  to  disentangle  the  confusion  in 
which  all  questions  involving  selection  or  arrange 
ment  are  commonly  massed  together,  and  will  facilitate 
in  some  degree  that  precision  of  language  and  clear 
ness  of  expression  which  ought  always  to  be  aimed  at 
in  mathematics. 

In  the  fourth  appendix  I  have  exhibited  the  seeming 
paradox  that  a  wager  which  is  mathematically  fair  is 
mathematically  disadvantageous  to  both  contracting 
parties.  And  I  have  endeavoured  to  cast  into  a  simple 
and  intelligible  form  the  principles  upon  which  the 
difficulties  of  the  celebrated  Petersburg  problem  are 
explained. 

W.  ALLEN  WHITWOETH. 


ST.  JOHN'S  COLLEGE, 
1st  January,  1870. 


PREFACE  TO  THE   FIRST   EDITION. 


THE  following  pages  are  a  reproduction  of  lectures  on 
Arithmetic,  given  in  Queen's  College,  Liverpool,  in  the 
Michaelmas  Term,  1866.  Many  of  the  students  to 
whom  the  lectures  were  addressed  were  just  entering 
upon  the  study  of  algebra,  and  it  seemed  well,  while 
the  greater  part  of  their  time  was  devoted  to  the  some 
what  mechanical  solution  of  examples  necessary  to 
give  them  a  practical  facility  in  algebraical  work,  that 
their  logical  faculties  should  be  meanwhile  exercised  in 
the  thoughtful  applications  of  the  arithmetical  art  with 
which  they  were  already  familiar. 

I  had  already  discovered,  that  the  usual  method  of 
treating  questions  of  selection  and  arrangement  was 
capable  of  modification  and  so  great  simplification,  that 
the  subject  might  be  placed  on  a  purely  arithmetical 
basis ;  and  I  deemed  that  nothing  would  better  serve 
to  furnish  the  exercise  which  I  desired  for  my  classes, 
and  to  elicit  and  encourage  a  habit  of  exact  reasoning, 
than  to  set  before  them,  and  establish  as  an  application 
of  arithmetic,  the  principles  upon  which  such  questions 
of  "choice  and  chance"  might  be  solved. 

The  success  of  my  experiment  has  induced  me  to 
publish  the  present  work,  in  the  hope  that  the  expo 
sitions  already  accepted  by  a  limited  audience  may 


Vlll  PREFACE    TO    THE    FIRST    EDITION. 

prove  of  service  in  a  wider  sphere,  in  conducing  to  a 
more  thoughtful  study  of  arithmetic  than  is  common 
at  present ;  extending  the  perception  and  recognition 
of  the  important  truth,  that  arithmetic,  or  the  art  of 
counting,  demands  no  more  science  than  good  and 
exact  common  sense. 

In  the  first  chapter  I  have  set  down  and  established 
as  arithmetical  rules  all  the  principles  usually  required 
in  estimating  the  choice  which  is  open  to  us  in  making 
a  selection  or  arrangement  out  of  a  number  of  given 
articles  under  given  conditions.  In  the  second  chapter 
I  have  explained  how  different  degress  of  probability 
are  expressed  arithmetically,  and  how  the  principles  of 
the  preceding  chapter  are  applied  to  the  calculation  of 
chances.  These  two  chapters  will  prove  intelligible  to 
any  one  who  understands  the  first  principles  of  arith 
metic,  provided  he  will  consider  each  step  as  he  goes 
on ;  not  content  with  the  mere  statement  of  any  rule, 
but  careful  to  follow  the  explanations  given  and  to 
recognise  the  reason  of  each  successive  principle. 

For  the  sake  of  mathematical  students  I  have  added, 
as  an  appendix,  a  new  treatment  of  permutations  and 
combinations  with  algebraical  symbols.  In  my  expe 
rience  as  a  teacher  I  have  found  the  proofs  here  set 
forth  more  intelligible  to  younger  students  than  those 
given  in  the  text  books  in  common  use. 

LIVERPOOL,  1st  February,  1867. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Explanations       xi. 

CHAPTER  I.       CHOICE 1 

Examples  on  Choice    02 

CHAPTER  II.      CHANCE         00 

Examples  on  Chance ...  138 

APPENDIX  I.      Permutations     and     Combinations     treated 

Algebraically    142 

APPENDIX  II.     Distributions 163 

APPENDIX  III.  Derangements 185 

APPENDIX  IV.  On  the  Disadvantage  of  Gambling       ...  199 

Miscellaneous  Examples        231 

Answers  to  the  Examples -251 


ERRATA. 

Page  22,  line  6.    For  [24,  read  24. 

Page  89,  the  8th  and  following  lines.    Head  "there  are  ten  which  give 

a  result  greater  than  8.     Hence  the  required  chance  is  ^  or  ~-  • 

36         18 

Page  103,  line  8.     For  X  read  -+-  . 

At  the  head  of  pages  114,  118,  126.    For  CHOICE,  read  CHANCK. 


EXPLANATIONS. 

The  sign  =  is  used  to  signify  that  the  two  expressions 
between  which  it  is  placed  are  equal  to  one  another,  or  represent 
the  same  arithmetical  value. 

The  sum  of  any  given  numbers  is  that  which  is  obtained  by 
adding  the  given  numbers  together.  The  sign  +  (plus)  is  used 
to  denote  that  the  number  which  follows  it  is  added  to  that 
which  precedes.  Thus — 

5   +  3  =  8, 
or  the  sum  of  five  and  three  is  eight. 

The  difference  of  two  given  numbers  is  that  which  is  obtained 
by  subtracting  the  smaller  of  them  from  the  greater.  The  sign 
—  (minus)  is  used  to  denote  that  the  number  which  follows  it 
is  subtracted  from  that  which  precedes.  Thus — 

5-3=2, 
or  the  difference  of  five  and  three  is  two. 

The  product  of  two  given  numbers  is  that  which  is  obtained 
by  multiplying  the  given  numbers  together.  The  continued 

product  of  three  or  more  numbers  is  obtained  by  multiplying 
any  two  of  them  together,  and  then  multiplying  the  result  by  a 

third ,  and  so  on  until  all  the  given  numbers  have  been  used 


Xll  EXPLANATIONS. 

The  sign  x  is  used  to  denote  that  the  number  which  precedes 
it  is  multiplied  by  that  which  follows.     Thus — 

5x3  =  15;    5x3x2  =  30; 

or  the  product  of  five  and  three  is  fifteen:  the  continued  product 
of  five,  three,  and  two,  is  thirty. 

A  full  point  ( . )  is  often  used  instead  of  the  sign  x  of  multi 
plication.  Thus — 

5.4.3.2.1  =  120. 

The  quotient  of  two  given  numbers  is  that  which  is  obtained 
by  dividing  the  former  of  them  by  the  latter.  The  sign  --•  is 
used  to  denote  that  the  number  which  precedes  it  is  divided  by 
that  which  follows.  Thus — 

15  -f-  5  =  3, 
or  the  quotient  of  fifteen  and  five  is  three. 

Instead  of  using  the  sign  -f- ,  the  quotient  of  the  two  numbers' 
is  often  expressed  by  writing  the  former  above  the  latter  in 
the  form  of  a  fraction.  Thus — 

15 _  IK    .    K  —  Q 

=    1O    -7-    O    —   O  . 

5 

The  few  other  signs  which  are  used  in  the  body  of  the  work 
are  explained  wherever  they  are  first  introduced.  But  the 
appendices,  being  addressed  to  mathematical  readers,  involve  a 
more  technical  notation,  for  the  explanation  of  which  the  student 
must  be  referred  to  treatises  on  algebra. 


CHOICE    AND    CHANCE. 

CHAPTEE  I. 

CHOICE. 

WE  have  continually  to  make  our  choice  among 
different  courses  of  action  open  to  us,  and  upon  the 
discretion  with  which  we  make  it,  in  little  matters 
and  in  great,  depends  our  prosperity  and  our  happiness. 
Of  this  discretion  a  higher  philosophy  treats,  and  it  is 
not  to  be  supposed  that  Arithmetic  has  anything  to  do 
with  it;  but  it  is  the  province  of  Arithmetic,  under 
given  circumstances,  to  measure  the  choice  which  we 
have  to  exercise,  or  to  determine  precisely  the  number 
of  courses  open  to  us. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  that  a  member  is  to  be 
returned  to  parliament  for  a  certain  borough,  and 
that  four  candidates  present  themselves.  Arithmetic 
has  nothing  to  do  with  the  manner  in  which  we  shall 
exercise  our  privilege  as  a  voter,  which  depends  on  our 

B 


SIS  CHOTC3. 

I      ',.    -    ^ 

discretion  in  judging  the  qualifications  of  the  different 
candidates;  but  it  belongs- to  Arithmetic,  as  the  science 
of  counting  and  calculation,  to  tell  us  that  the  number 
of  ways  in  which  (if  we  vote  at  all)  we  can  exercise  our 
choice,  is  four. 

The  operation  is,  indeed,  in  this  case  so  simple 
that  we  scarcely  recognise  its  arithmetical  character  at 
all;  but  if  we  pass  on  to  a  more  complicated  case, 
we  shall  observe  that  some  thought  or  calculation  is 
required  to  determine  the  number  of  courses  open  to 
us :  and  thought  about  numbers  is  Arithmetic. 

Suppose,  then,  that  the  borough  has  to  return  two 
members  instead  of  one.  And  still  suppose  that  we 
have  the  same  four  candidates,  whom  we  will  distin 
guish  by  names,  as  A,  B,  C,  D.  If  we  try  to  note 
down  all  the  ways  in  which  it  is  possible  for  us  to 
vote,  we  shall  find  them  to  be  six  in  number  5  thus  we 
may  vote  for  any  of  the  following : — 

A  and  B,  A  and  C,  A  and  D, 

C  and  D,  B  and  D,  B  and  C. 

But  we  can  hardly  make  this  experiment  without 
perceiving  that  the  resulting  number,  six,  must  in 
some  way  depend  arithmetically  upon  the  number  of 
candidates  and  the  number  of  members  to  be  returned, 
or  without  suspecting  that  on  some  of  the  principles 
of  arithmetic  we  ought  to  be  able  to  arrive  at  that 
result  without  the  labour  of  noting  all  the  possible 
courses  open  to  us,  and  then  counting  them  up ;  a 


DIFFERENT    SELECTIONS.  3 

labour  which  we  may  observe  would  be  very  great 
if  eight  or  ten  candidates  offered  themselves,  instead 
of  four. 

In  the  present  chapter  we  shall  establish  and  explain 
the  principles  upon  which  such  calculations  are  made 
arithmetically.  It  will  be  found  that  they  are  very 
simple  in  nature  as  well  as  few  in  number.  In  the 
next  chapter  we  shall  apply  the  same  principles  to  the 
solution  of  problems  in  Probability,  a  subject  of  very 
great  interest,  and  some  practical  importance. 

We  found,  by  experiment  or  trial,  that  there  were  six 
ways  of  voting  for  two  out  of  four  candidates.  So  we 
may  say  that,  out  of  any  four  given  articles,  six  selec 
tions  of  two  articles  may  be  made.  But  we  call  special 
attention  to  the  sense  in  which  we  use  the  words  "six 
selections."  We  do  not  mean  that  a  man  can  select 
two  articles,  and  having  taken  them  can  select  two 
more,  and  then  two  more,  and  so  on  till  he  has 
made  six  selections  altogether;  for  it  is  obvious  that 
the  four  articles  would  be  exhausted  by  the  second 
selection,  but  when  we  speak  of  six  selections  being 
possible,  we  mean  that  there  are  six  different  ways 
of  making  one  selection,  just  as  among  four  candidates 
there  are  six  ways  of  selecting  two  to  vote  for. 

This  language  may  appear  at  first  to  be  arbitrary  and 
unnecessary,  but  as  we  proceed  with  the  subject  we 
shall  find  that  it  simplifies  the  expression  of  many 
of  our  results. 

In  making  the  selection  of  two  candidates  out  of 


4  CHOICE. 

four,  in  the  case  just  considered,  it  was  immaterial 
which  of  the  two  selected  ones  we  took  first;  the 
selection  of  A  first,  and  then  B,  was  to  every  intent 
and  purpose  the  same  thing  as  the  selection  of  B  first, 
and  then  A. 

But  if  we  alter  the  question  a  little,  and  ask  in  how 
many  ways  a  society  can  select  a  president  and  vice- 
president  out  of  four  candidates  for  office,  the  order 
of  selection  "becomes  of  importance.  To  elect  A  and 
B  as  president  and  vice-president  respectively,  is  not 
the  same  thing  as  to  elect  B  and  A  for  those  two 
offices  respectively.  Hence  there  are  twice  as  many 
ways  as  before  of  making  the  election,  viz, — 

A  and  B,  A  and  C,  A  andZ>, 

C  and  D,  B  and  D,  B  and  C, 

B  and  A,  C  and  A,  D  and  A, 

D  and  C,  D  and  B,  C  and  B. 

So  if  four  articles  of  any  kind  are  given  us,  there  will 
be  twelve  ways  of  choosing  two  of  them  in  a  particular 
order;  or,  as  we  may  more  briefly  express  it,  out  of 
four  given  articles,  twelve  arrangements  of  two  articles 
can  be  made.  But  it  must  be  observed  that  the 
same  remarks  apply  here,  which  we  made  on  the  use  of 
the  phrase  "  six  selections"  on  page  3.  *  We  do  not 
mean  that  twelve  arrangements  or  six  selections  can 
be  successively  made ;  but  that  if  one  arrangement 
or  one  selection  of  two  articles  have  to  be  made  out 
of  the  four  given  articles,  we  have  the  choice  of  twelve 


SELECTIONS   AND   ARRANGEMENTS.  5 

ways  of  making  the  arrangement,  and  of  six  ways  of 
making  the  selection. 

We  may  give  the  following  formal  definitions  of  the 
words  selection  and  arrangement,  in  the  sense  in  which 
we  have  used  them :  — 

DEF.  I. — A  selection  (or  combination)  of  any  number 
of  articles,  means  a  group  of  that  number  of  articles 
classed  together,  but  not  regarded  as  having  any 
particular  order  among  themselves. 

DEF.  II. — An  arrangement  (or  permutation)  of  any 
number  of  articles,  means  a  group  of  that  number 
of  articles,  not  only  classed  together,  but  regarded  as 
having  a  particular  order  among  themselves. 

Thus  the  six  groups, — 

A  B  C,  B  C  A,  CAB, 

AC  B,  BAG,  C  B  A, 

are  all  the  same  selection  (or  combination)  of  three 
letters,  but  they  are  all  different  arrangements  (or 
permutations)  of  three  letters. 

So,  out  of  the  four  letters  A,  B,  C,  D,  we  can  make 
four  selections  of  three  letters,  viz. — 

BCD, 
CD  A, 
D  A  B, 

A  B  C; 

but  out  of  the  same  four  letters  we  can  make  twenty- 
four  arrangements  of  three  letters,  viz.— 


6 


CHOICE. 


BCD,  BDC,  CDB, 

CD  A,  CAD,  DAC, 

DAB,  DBA,  ABD, 

ABC,  ACB,  BCA, 


CBD,  DBG,  DCB, 

DC  A,  A  CD,  ADC, 

ADB,  BDA,  BAD, 

BAG,  CAB,  CBA. 


Having  thus  explained  the  language  we  shall  have 
to  employ,  we  may  now  proceed  to  establish  the 
principles  on  which  all  calculations  of  choice  must  he 
founded. 

The  great  principle  upon  which  we  shall  hase  all 
our  reasoning  throughout  our  work,  may  he  stated  as 
follows : — 

If  one  thing  can  be  clone  in  a  given  number  of 
different  ways,  and  then  another  thing  in  another 
given  number  of  different  ways,  the  number  of  different 
ways  in  which  both  things  can  be  done  is  obtained  bi/ 
multiplying  together  the  two  given  numbers. 

We  shall  first  illustrate  this  principle,  and  then 
proceed  to  prove  it. 

Suppose  we  have  a  box  containing  five  capital  letters, 
A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  and  three  small  letters,  x,  y,  z. 


ABODE 

x        y        z 


The  number  of  ways  in  which  we  can  select  a  capital 
letter  out  of  the  box  is  five;  the  number  of  ways  in 


CHOICE  IN    SUCCESSIVE    OPEEATIONS.  7 

which  we  can  select  a  small  letter  is  three ;  therefore, 
by  the  principle  we  have  just  stated,  the  numher  of 
different  ways  in  which  we  can  select  a  capital  letter 
and  a  small  one  is  fifteen,  which  we  find  on  trial 
to  be  correct,  all  the  possible  selections  being  as 
follows :  — 

Ax,  Bx,  Cx,  Dx,  Ex, 

Ay,  By,  Cy,  Dij,  Ey, 

Az,  Bz,  Cz,  Dz,  Ez. 

Again,  suppose  there  are  four  paths  to  the  top  of 
a  mountain,  the  principle  asserts  that  we  have  the 
choice  of  sixteen  ways  of  ascending  and  descending. 

For  there   are 

4  ways  up, 

4  ways  down, 
and  4  x  4  =  16. 

We  can  verify  this :  for  if  P,  Q,  E,  8  be  the  names 
of  the  four  paths,  we  can  make  our  choice  among  the 
following  sixteen  plans,  the  first-mentioned  path  being 
the  way  up,  and  the  second  the  way  down :  — 

PandP,  PandQ,  Pand#,  Pand£, 

QandP,  <2and#,  QandjR,  Q  and  S, 

EandP,  EandQ,  jRandE,  #and£, 

8  and  P,  8  and  Q,  8  and  E,  8  and  S. 

Or,  if  we  had  desired  to  ascertain  what  choice  we 
had  of  going  up  and  down  by  different  paths,  we  might 
still  have  applied  the  principle,  reasoning  thus : 


8  CHOICE. 

There  are  four  ways  of  going  up,  and  when  we  are 
at  the  top  we  have  the  choice  of  three  ways  of  descend 
ing  (since  we  are  not  to  come  down  by  the  same  path 
that  brought  us  up).  Hence  the  number  of  ways  of 
ascending  and  descending  is  4  x  3,  or  twelve. 

These  twelve  ways  will  be  obtained  from  the  sixteen 
described  in  the  former  case,  by  omitting  the  four 
ineligible  ways, 

P  and  P,         Q  and  Q,         E  and  R,         S  and  8. 

The  foregoing  examples  will  suffice  to  illustrate  the 
meaning  and  application  of  our  fundamental  propo 
sition.  We  will  now  give  a  formal  proof  of  it.  We 
shall  henceforth  refer  to  it  as  Kule  I. 

RULE   I. 

If  one  thing  can  be  done  in  a  given  number  of 
different  ways,  and  ivhen  it  is  done  in  any  way  another 
thing  can  be  done  in  another  given  number  of  different 
ivays,  then  the  number  of  different  ways  in  which  the 
two  things  can  be  done  is  the  product  of  the  two  given 
numl 


For  let  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  &c.  represent  the  different 
ways  in  which  the  first  thing  can  be  done  (taking  as 
many  letters  as  may  be  necessary  to  represent  all  the 
different  ways),  and  similarly  let  a,  fc,  c,  d,  &c.  repre 
sent  the  different  ways  of  doing  the  second  thing. 
Then,  if  we  form  a  table  as  below,  having  the  letters 


PRINCIPLE    OF   MULTIPLICATION    OF    CHOICE.  9 

A,  B,  C,  D,  E  &c.  at  the  head  of  the  several  columns, 
and  the  letters  a,  b,  c,  d,  &c.  at  the  end  of  the  several 
horizontal  rows,  we  may  regard  each  square  in  the 
table  as  representing  the  case  in  which  the  first  thing 
is  done,  in  the  way  marked  at  the  head  of  the  column 
in  which  the  square  is  taken ;  and  the  second  thing  in 
the  way  marked  at  the  end  of  the  row. 


WAYS   OF   DOING   THE    FIEST   THING. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

a 

dsc. 

WAYS  OF  DOING  THE  SECOND  THING. 

a 

b 

* 

c 

t 

( 

d 

? 

dc. 

Thus  the  square  marked  with  the  asterisk  (*)  will 
denote  the  case  in  which  the  first  thing  is  done  in  the 
way  which  we  called  0,  and  the  second  thing  in  the 
way  which  we  called  b ;  and  the  square  marked  with 
the  dagger  (t)  will  denote  the  case  in  which  the  first 


10   •  CHOICE. 

thing  is  done  in  the  way  E,  and  the  second  in  the  way 
c,  and  so  on. 

Now  it  will  be  readily  seen  that  all  the  squares  repre 
sent  different  cases,  and  that  every  case  is  represented 
by  some  square  or  other.  Hence  the  number  of  possi 
ble  cases  is  the  same  as  the  number  of  squares.  But 
there  are  as  many  columns  as  there  are  ways  of  doing 
the  first  thing,  and  each  column  contains  as  many 
squares  as  there  are  ways  of  doing  the  second  thing. 
Therefore  the  number  of  squares  is  the  product  of  the 
number  of  ways  of  doing  the  two  several  things,  and 
therefore,  this  product  expresses  also  the  whole  number 
of  possible  cases,  or  the  whole  number  of  ways  in  which 
the  two  events  can  be  done. 

This  proves  the  rule. 

Question. — If  a  halfpenny  and  a  penny  be  tossed, 
in  how  many  ways  can  they  fall  ? 

Answer. — The  halfpenny  can  fall  in  two  ways,  and 
the  penny  in  two  ways,  and  2x2=4,  therefore  they  can 
fall  in  four  ways. 

The  four  ways,  of  course,  are  as  follows  : — 

(1)  both  heads. 

(2)  both  tails. 

(3)  halfpenny  head  and  penny  tail. 

(4)  halfpenny  tail  and  penny  head. 

Question.  —  If  two  dice  be  thrown  together,  in  how 
many  ways  can  they  fall  ? 

Answer. — The  first  can  fall  in  six  ways,  and  the 


EXAMPLES   OF   MULTIPLICATION    OF    CHOICE.  11 

second  in  six  ways,  and  6  x  6  =  36;  therefore  there  are 
thirty-six  ways  in  which  the  two  dice  can  fall. 

The  thirty- six  ways  may  be  represented  as  follows  : — 


1  and  1, 

1  and  2, 

1  and  3, 

1  and  4, 

1  and  5, 

1  and  6, 

2  and  1, 

2  and  2, 

2  and  3, 

2  and  4, 

2  and  5, 

2  and  6, 

3  and  1, 

3  and  2, 

3  and  3, 

3  and  4, 

3  and  5, 

3  and  6, 

4  and  1, 

4  and  2, 

4  and  3, 

4  and  4, 

4  and  5, 

4  and  6, 

5  and  1, 

5  and  2, 

5  and  3, 

5  and  4, 

5  and  5, 

5  and  6, 

6  and  1, 

6  and  2, 

6  and  3, 

6  and  4, 

6  and  5, 

6  and  6. 

i.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  two  prizes  he 
given  to  a  class  of  ten  hoys,  without  giving  both  to  the 
same  boy? 

Answer. — The  first  prize  can  be  given  in  ten  ways, 
and  when  it  is  given  the  second  can  be  given  in  nine 
ways,  and  10  x  9  =  90 ;  therefore  we  have  the  choice  of 
ninety  ways  of  giving  the  two  prizes. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  two  prizes  be 
given  to  a  class  of  ten  boys,  it  being  permitted  to  give 
both  to  the  same  boy  ? 

Answer.  —  The  first  prize  can  be  given  in  ten  ways, 
and  when  it  is  given  the  second  can  be  given  in  ten 
ways ;  therefore  both  can  be  given  in  10  x  10,  or  100 
ways. 

Question.  -  —  Two  persons  get  into  a  railway  carriage 
where  there  are  six  vacant  seats.  In  how  many  differ 
ent  ways  can  they  seat  themselves. 

Answer. —  The  first  person  can  take  any  of  the  vacant 
seats;  therefore  he  can  seat  himself  in  six  different 


12  CHOICE. 

ways.  Then  there  are  five  seats  left,  and  therefore  the 
other  person  has  the  choice  of  five  different  ways  of 
seating  himself.  Hence  there  are  6  x  5,  or  30  different 
ways  in  which  they  can  take  their  seats. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  we  make  a  two- 
lettered  word  out  of  an  alphabet  of  twenty-six  letters, 
the  two  letters  in  the  word  being  different  ? 

Answer. — We  can  choose  our  first  letter  in  twenty- 
six  ways,  and  when  it  is  chosen  we  can  choose  the 
second  in  twenty-five  ways.  Therefore  we  have  the 
choice  of  26  x  25,  or  650  ways. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  we  select  a 
consonant  and  a  vowel  out  of  an  alphabet  of  twenty 
consonants  and  six  vowels? 

Answer. — We  can  choose  the  consonant  in  twenty 
ways,  the  vowel  in  six  ways,  both  in  one  hundred  and 
twenty  ways. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  we  make  a  two- 
lettered  word,  consisting  of  one  consonant  and  one 
vowel  ? ' 

Answer.  —  By  the  last  answer,  we  can  choose  our 
two  letters  in  one  hundred  and  twenty  ways,  and 
when  we  have  chosen  them  we  can  arrange  them  in 
two  ways.  Hence  we  can  make  the  word  in  120  x  2, 
or  240  different  ways\ 

Question.— There  are  twelve  ladies  and  ten  gentle- 


CONTINUED   MULTIPLICATION.  13 

men,  of  whom  three  ladies  and  two  gentlemen  are 
sisters  and  brothers,  the  rest  being  unrelated :  in  how 
many  ways  might  a  marriage  be  effected  ? 

Answer. —  If  all  were  unrelated  we  might  make  the 
match  in  12  x  10,  or  120  ways ;  but  this  will  include 
the  3x2,  or  6  ways  in  which  the  selected  lady  and 
gentlemen  are  sister  and  brother.  Therefore  the 
number  of  eligible  ways  is  120  —  6,  or  114. 

EULE  II. 

If  a  series  of  things  can  be  done  successively  in 
given  numbers  of  ways,  the  number  of  ways  in  which 
all  the  things  can  be  done  is  the  continued  product  of 
all  the  given  numbers. 

This  rule  is  only  an  extension  of  the  former  one,  and 
needs  not  a  separate  proof.  Its  correctness  will  be 
sufficiently  evident  from  considering  an  example. 

a  "* 

Suppose  the  first  thing  can  be  done  in  four  ways,  and 
the  second  in  three,  then  the  first  and  second  together 
form  an  event  or  operation,  which  can  happen  (by  Kule 
I.)  in  4  x  3,  or  12  ways.  Now  suppose  the  third  thing 
can  be  done  in  five  ways.  Then,  since  the  first  and 
second  together  can  happen  in  twelve  ways,  and  the 
third  in  five  ways,  it  follows  from  Rule  I.  that  the  first 
and  second  and  the  third,  can  be  done  in  12  x  5,  or  60 
ways ;  that  is,  all  three  can  be  done  in  4  x  3  x  5  ways. 

So  if  a  fourth   thing  can  be  done  in  seven  ways, 


14  CHOICE. 

then,  since  the  first  three  can  be  done  in  sixty  ways, 
and  the  fourth  in  seven  ways,  the  first  three  and  the 
fourth  can  be  done  (by  Kule  I.)  in  60  x  7,  or  420  ways; 
that  is,  all  four  can  be  done  in  4x3x5x7  ways. 
And  so  on,  however  many  things  there  may  be. 

The  applications  of  this  proposition  are  very  numer 
ous  and  very  important ;  the  solution  of  almost  every 
question  concerning  permutations  or  combinations 
depending  upon  it,  as  will  presently  be  seen. 

As  an  example,  suppose  I  have  six  letters  to  be 
delivered  in  different  parts  of  the  town,  and  two  boys 
offer  their  services  to  deliver  them.  To  determine  in 
how  many  different  ways  I  have  the  choice  of  sending 
the  letters  we  may  reason  as  follows.  The  first  letter 
may  be  sent  in  either  of  two  ways ;  so  may  the  second  ; 
so  may  the  third,  and  so  on.  Hence  the  whole  number 
of  ways  is,  by  the  rule,  2  x  2  x  2  x  2  x  2  x  2  or  64. 
So,  if  there  were  three  boys,  the  choice  would  lie 
among  3x3x3x3x3x3  or  729  ways. 

The  question,  in  how  many  ways  can  six  things  be 
divided  between  two  boys,  will  be  seen  to  be  almost 
identical  with  the  question  of  the  six  notes  sent  by  the 
two  boys.  The  only  difference  is,  that  among  the  64 
ways  of  sending  the  notes  were  included  the  two  ways 
in  which  either  boy  carried  them  all.  Now  six  things 
cannot  be  said  to  be  divided  among  two  boys  if  they 
all  are  given  to  one.  Hence  these  two  ways  must  be 


METHODS   OF    DIVISION    INTO   TWO   PARCELS.  15 

rejected,  and  there  will  only  be  62  ways  of  dividing  six 
things  between  two  boys. 

But,  again,  suppose  we  are  asked  in  how  many  ways 
can  six  things  be  divided  into  two  parcels,  the  question 
seems  at  first  to  be  identical  with  the  last.  But,  on 
consideration,  we  observe  that  if  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,  f  repre 
sent  the  six  things,  one  of  the  ways  of  dividing  them 
'  between  the  two  boys  would  be  to  give 

a,  b,  to  the  first  boy, 

c,  d,  e,  /,  to  the  second ; 
and  another  different  way  would  be  to  give 

a,  b,  to  the  second  boy, 

c,  d,  e,  f,  to  the  first ; 

but  if  the  question  be  merely  of  dividing  the  six  things 
into  two  parcels,  with  no  distinction  between  them, 
corresponding  to  the  two  ways  noted  for  the  previous 
question,  we  have  now  only  the  one  way,  viz.,  to  put 

a,  b,  into  one  parcel, 

c,  d,  e,  /,  into  the  other. 

Hence  for  every  two  ways  of  dividing  the  things  between 
two  different  boys,  there  is  only  one  way  of  dividing 
them  into  two  indifferent  parcels ;  and,  therefore,  we 
have  the  choice  in  this  last  case  of  only  thirty- one  ways. 
The  correctness  of  this  result  may  be  more  clearly 
understood  by  the  following  consideration.  Suppose  we 
have  six  articles  to  divide  between  two  boys.  We  may 
resolve  the  operation  into  the  two  operations  of  (1) 
dividing  the  articles  into  two  parcels,  and  (2)  when 


16  '          CHOICE. 

these  parcels  are  made,  giving  them  to  the  two  boys. 
Now  we  can  form  our  two  parcels  in  thirty-one  ways, 
and  when  the  two  parcels  are  made,  we  can  give  them, 
one  to  each  boy,  in  two  ways;  hence  by  Rule  L,  we 
can  make  the  parcels  and  dispense  them  in  31  X  2  or 
62  ways.  , 

Question. —  Twenty  competitors  run  a  race  for  three 
prizes,  in  how  many  different  ways  is  it  possible  that 
the  prizes  may  be  given  ? 

Answer.  —  The  first  prize  can  be  given  in  twenty 
ways ;  when  it  is  given,  the  second  may  be  given  in 
nineteen ;  then  the  third  can  be  given  in  eighteen 
ways.  Hence  the  whole  number  of  ways  of  giving  the 
three  prizes  is  20  x  19  x  18,  or  6840. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  four  letters  be 
put  into  four  envelopes,  one  into  each  ? 

Answer. — For  the  first  envelope  we  have  the  choice 
of  all  the  letters,  or  there  are  four  ways  of  filling  the 
first  envelope ;  then  there  are  three  letters  left,  and 
therefore  three  ways  of  filling  the  second  envelope; 
then  there  are  two  letters  left,  or  two  ways  of  filling 
the  third  envelope ;  so  there  is  only  one  way  of  filling 
the^last.  Hence  there  are  4  x  3  x  2  x  1,  or  24  ways 
of  doing  the  whole. 

Question.  —  How  many  different  sums  may  be  formed 
with  a  sovereign,  a  half-sovereign,  a  crown,  a  half- 


EXAMPLES.  17 

crown,  a  shilling,  a  sixpence,    a   penny,   and   a   half 
penny  ? 

Answer.  —  Each  coin  may  be  either  taken  or  left, 
that  is,  it  may  be  disposed  of  in  two  ways,  and  there 
are  eight  coins.  Hence  (by  Rule  II.)  all  may  be 
disposed  of  in 

2x2x2x2x2x2x2x2,  or  256 
ways.    One  of  these  ways  would,  however,  consist  in  the 
rejection  of  all  the  coins,  which  would  not  be  a  way  of 
taking  any  sum.      Therefore  the  number  of  different 
sums  that  can  be  made  is  255. 

Question.  —  There  are  twenty  candidates  for  an  office, 
and  seven  electors.  In  how  many  ways  can  the  votes 
be  given  ? 

Answer.  —  Each  man  can  vote  in  twenty  ways,  and 
there  are  seven  men  to  vote.  Therefore  all  the  votes 
can  be  given  (by  Rule  II.)  in 

20  x  20  x  20  x  20  x  20  x  20  x  20  or  1280000000 
different  ways. 

Question.  —  In   how  many  ways   can  the   following 
letters  be  divided  between  two  persons  :  — 
a,  a,  a,  a,  b,  b,  b,  c,  c,  d  ? 

Answer.  —  Of  the  a,  a,  a,  a,  the  first  person  can  take 
either  none,  or  one,  or  two,  or  three,  or  four.  That  is, 
the  a,  a,  a,  a  can  be  divided  in  five  different  ways  ;  so 
also  the  b,  b,  b  can  be  divided  in  four  ways  ;  the 
c,  c  in  three  ways;  and  the  d  can  be  disposed  of  in 


18  CHOICE. 

two  ways.     Hence  (by  Rule  II.)  the  whole  division  can 

be  made  in 

5  x  4  x  3  x  2,  or  120 

different  ways,  including,  however,  the  ways  in  which 
either  person  gets  none  and  the  other  gets  all.  Exclud 
ing  these  two  ways,  the  number  of  eligible  ways  is  118. 

Question.  —  In  the  ordinary  system  of  notation,  how 
many  numbers  are  there  which  consist  of  five  digits  ? 

Ansiver . —  The  first  digit  may  be  any  of  the  ten 
except  0.  We  have,  therefore,  the  choice  of  nine  ways 
of  determining  this  digit.  Each  of  the  other  four  digits 
may  be  any  whatever,  and  therefore  there  are  ten  ways 
of  determining  each  of  them.  Hence,  altogether  (by 
Rule  II. )  the  number  can  be  formed  in 

9  x  10  x  10  x  10  x  10,  or  90000 
different  ways. 

Of  course  these  are  all  the  numbers  from  10000  to 
99999  inclusive. 

Question. —  The  cylinder  of  a  letter-lock  contains 
four  rings,  each  marked  with  twenty-six  different 
letters ;  how  many  different  attempts  to  open  the  lock 
may  be  made  by  a  person  ignorant  of  the  key-word  ? 

Answer. —  The  first  ring  can  be  placed  in  twenty- 
six  different  positions ;  so  may  the  second ;  so  may  the 
third;  so  may  the  fourth.  Hence  (by  Rule  II.)  there 

are 

26  x  26  x  26  x  26,  or  456976 


DIFFERENT    ORDERS    OF   ARRANGEMENT.  19 

different  positions  possible,  and  one  of  these  is  the 
right  one.  Hence  it  is  possible  to  make  456975 
unsuccessful  trials. 


RULE   III. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  a  given  number  of 
things  can  be  arranged  is  the  continued  product  of  the 
given  number,  and  all  whole  numbers  less  than  it. 

Thus,  three  things  can  be  arranged  in  3  x  2  x  1,  or 
6  ways;  four  things  in  4  x  3  x  2  x  1,  or  24  ways; 
five  things  in  5  x  4  x  3  x  2  x  1,  or  120  ways. 

It  will  be  sufficient  to  shew  the  reason  of  this  rule 
in  a  particular  case.  The  reasoning  will  be  of  a  suffi 
ciently  general  character  to  apply  to  any  other  case. 

Take  for  example  the  case  of  five  things.  We  have 
then  a  choice  of  five  ways  of  filling  the  first  place  in 
order.  When  that  place  is  filled  there  remain  four 
things,  and  therefore  we  have  a  choice  of  four  ways 
of  filling  the  second  place.  Then  there  are  three 
.  things  left,  and  we  can  fill  the  third  place  in  three 
ways.  So  we  can  fill  the  fourth  place  in  two  ways, 
and  the  last  place  in  only  one  way,  since  we  must  give 
to  it  the  one  thing  that  is  now  left.  Hence  (by  Rule 
II.)  all  the  places  can  be  filled  in  5x4x3x2x1 
ways,  or  the  whole  set  of  five  things  can  be  arranged  in 
5x4x3x2x1  ways,  which  shews  that  Rule  III. 
is  true  in  this  case. 


20  CHOICE. 

By  exactly  similar  reasoning,  we  can  shew  that  the 
rule  is  true  in  any  other  case.  Hence  we  may  accept 
it  universally. 

It  is  usual  to  put  the  mark  |  round  a  number  to 
denote  the  continued  product  of  that  number  and  all 
lesser  numbers.  Thus  — 

|2  denotes  2  x  1,  or  2  ; 
|3  denotes  3  x  2  x  1,  or  6; 
|4  denotes  4  x  3  x  2  x  1,  or  24 ; 
|5  denotes  5x4x3x2x1,  or  120 ; 
|6  denotes  6  x  5  x  4  x  3  x  2  x  1,  or  720 ; 
and  so  on. 

A  great  number  of  questions  will  be  seen,  on  a  little 
consideration,  to  be  particular  applications  of  Kule  III. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  that  we  have  to  place  six 
statues  in  six  niches,  it  seems,  at  first  sight,  that  as 
the  statues  and  the  niches  can  each  of  them  separately 
be  taken  in  any  order,  we  should  have  to  consider  the 
order  of  both  to  determine  what  choice  of  arrangement 
we  have. 

But,  on  consideration,  it  will  be  seen  that  even 
though  we  take  the  niches  in  any  stated  order,  yet  any 
possible  result  whatsoever  may  be  attained  by  varying 
the  order  of  the  statues.  We  may,  in  fact,  regard  the 
niches  as  forming  a  row  in  fixed  order,  and  we  have 
only  to  consider  in  how  many  different  orders  the  six 
statues  may  be  taken  so  as  to  fill  the  six  niches  in 
order.  Consequently,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  it 


EXAMPLES.  21 

is  possible  to  arrange  the  six  statues  in  the  six  niches 
is  the  same  as  the  number  of  orders  in  which  the 
six  statues  can  themselves  be  taken,  which  by  the 
rule  is  |6,  or  720. 

This  explanation  will  be  the  better  understood  by 
comparing  the  next  two  questions. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  twelve  ladies 
and  twelve  gentlemen  form  themselves  into  couples 
for  a  dance? 

Answer.  — 112.  For  the  first  gentleman  can  choose 
a  partner  in  twelve  ways ;  then  the  second  has  choice 
of  eleven ;  the  third  has  choice  of  ten,  and  so  on. 
Therefore  they  can  take  partners  altogether  in 

12.11.10.9.8.7.6.5.4.8.2.1,  or  |12 
ways. 

Question.  —  There  are  twelve  ladies  and  twelve 
gentlemen  in  a  ball-room ;  in  how  many  ways  can  they 
take  their  places  for  a  contre-danse? 

Answer.  —  The  couples  can  be  formed  in  |12  ways, 
(last  question)  and  when  formed,  the  couples  can  be 
arranged  in  |12  different  orders  (Kule  III.)  There 
fore  the  twelve  ladies  and  twelve  gentlemen  can  arrange 
themselves  in  |12  X  |12  different  ways. 

Or  we  may  reason  thus: 

The  ladies  can  take  their  places  in  |12  different 
ways,  ( by  Rule  III.)  and  so  the  gentlemen  can  take 
theirs  in  |12  different  ways.  Therefore  (by  Rule  I.) 


22  CHOICE. 

the  ladies  and  gentlemen  can  arrange  themselves   in 
|12    x    1 1-2  different  ways,  as  before. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  different  orders  can  the 
letters  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,  /he  arranged  so  as  to  begin  with 
ab? 

Answer    )ffi^.  —  For    our    only   choice    lies    in    the 

arrangement  of  the  remaining  four  letters,  which  can 
be  put  in  |4  or  24  different  orders  (by  Kule  III.) 

Question.  —  A  shelf  contains  five  volumes  of  Latin, 
six  of  Greek,  and  eight  of  English.  In  how  many 
ways  can  the  nineteen  books  be  arranged,  keeping  all 
the  Latin  together,  all  the  Greek  together,  and  all  the 
English  together? 

Answer.  —  The  .volumes  of  Latin  can  be  arranged 
among  themselves  (by  Kule  III.)  in  [5  ways,  the 
volumes  of  Greek  among  themselves  in  |6  ways,  and 
the  volumes  of  English  among  themselves  in  [8  ways. 
Also,  when  each  set  is  thus  prepared,  the  three  sets 
can  be  placed  on  the  shelf  in  |3  different  orders. 
Therefore,  by  Rule  II.,  the  number  of  ways  in  which 
the  whole  can  be  done  is 

|5    X    [6    x    |8    X     8,  or  20901888000. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  could  the  same  books 
be  arranged  indiscriminately  on  the  shelf  ? 

Answer.  —  |19,  or  121645100408832000  ways. 


DIFFERENT    WAYS    OF    FORMING    A    RING. 

It  often  requires  considerable  thought  to  determine 
what  is  meant  by  "different  ways"  of  forming  a  ring. 
The  next  three  questions  suggest  three  meanings 
which  the  words  in  several  circumstances  will  bear. 
It  will  be  well  to  consider  them,  and  compare  them 
carefully,  that  the  distinctions  among  them  may  be 
thoroughly  recognised. 

Question. — A  table  being  laid  for  six  persons,  in 
how  many  ways  can  they  take  their  places  ? 

Answer. — By  Eule  III.,  the  number  of  ways  is 
(6  or  720. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  six  children  form 
themselves  into  a  ring,  to  dance  round  a  may-pole. 

Answer. — In  this  case  we  have  not  to  assign  the 
six  children  to  particular  places  absolutely,  but  only 
to  arrange  them  relatively  to  one  another.  We  may, 
in  fact,  make  all  possible  arrangements,  by  placing  the 
first  child,  A,  in  any  fixed  position,  and  disposing  the 
others,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  in  different  ways  with  respect 
to  him.  Thus  there  is  no  essential  difference  between 
the  three  arrangements  — 

D  B  E 

EC  C  A  F  D 

*  *  * 

F  B  D  F  AC 

A  E  B 


24  CHOICE. 

but  two  different  arrangements  would  be  — 

D  D 

EC  C  E 

*  * 

F  B  B  F 

A  A 

And  any  other  essentially  different  arrangement  migbt 
be  obtained  without  disturbing  A?  since  absolute  posi 
tion  is  not  taken  into  account.  Now  the  five  children 
B,  C,  D,  E,  F  can  be  arranged,  by  Kule  III.,  in  |5 
or  120  ways.  This,  therefore,  is  the  whole  number  of 
ways  in  which  such  a  ring  can  be  formed. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  six  stones  be 
strung  on  an  elastic  band  to  form  a  bracelet  ? 

Answer.  —  This  question  is  not  equivalent  to  the 
preceding  one,  for  if  we  examine  the  last  two  arrange 
ments,  which  we  marked  down  as  examples  of  the 
different  ways  in  which  the  ring  could  be  made,  we 
shall  observe  that  though  they  would  count  as  different 
arrangements  of  children  round  a  may-pole,  they  would 
count  as  the  same  arrangement  of  stones  in  a  bracelet, 
presenting  only  opposite  views  of  the  same  bracelet; 
each  being,  in  fact,  the  arrangement  that  would  be 
presented  by  turning  the  other  completely  over.  So 
the  120  arrangements  which  we  could  make  according 
to  the  last  question,  might  be  disposed  into  60  pairs, 
each  pair  presenting  only  opposite  views  of  the  same 
ring,  and  not  representing  more  than  one  essentially 


SUCCESSIVE    NUMBERS.  25 

different   arrangement.     Hence   the  answer  is  in  this 
case  only  60. 

DEFINITION.  —  Numbers  are  called  successive  when 
they  proceed  in  order,  each  one  differing  from  the 
preceding  one  by  unity.  The  numbers  are  said  to  be 
descending  when  they  commence  with  the  greatest  and 
continually  decrease;  they  are  said  to  be  ascending 
when  they  commence  with  the  least  and  continually 
increase;  and  such  a  series  of  numbers  is  said  to 
ascend  or  descend  (  as  the  case  may  be )  from  the  first 
number  of  the  series. 

Thus  17,  18,  19  are  successive  numbers  ascending 
from  17. 

So,  17,  16, 15,  14  are  successive  numbers  descending 
from  17. 

Again,  if  we  speak  of  a  series  of  five  successive 
numbers  descending  from  100,  we  shall  mean  the 
numbers  100,  99,  98,  97,  96. 

So  if  we  speak  of  seven  successive  numbers  ascend 
ing  from  3,  the  numbers 

3,     4,     5,     6,     7,     8,     9. 
will  be  meant. 

Thus,  1 5  might  be  described  as  the  continued 
product  of  five  successive  numbers,  ascending  from 
unity  (or  descending  from  5) ;  |7,  as  the  continued 
product  of  seven  successive  numbers  ascending  from 

unity  (or  descending  from  7),  and  so  on. 

• 


26  CHOICE. 

KULE    IV. 

Out  of  a  given  number  of  things, 

the  number  of  ways  in  zvhich  an  arrangement  of  two 
things  can  be  made  is  the  product  of  the  given  number 
and  the  next  lesser  number  ; 

the  number  of  ways  in  which  an  arrangement  of  three 
things  can  be  made  is  the  continued  product  of  three 
successive  numbers  descending  from  the  given  number; 

the  number  of  ways  in  which  an  arrangement  of  four 
things  can  be  made  is  the  continued  product  of  four 
successive  numbers  descending  from  the  given  number  ; 

and  so  on. 

The  reason  of  this  rule  will  he  seen  at  once.  For 
suppose  we  have  seventeen  given  things ;  then,  if  we 
wish  to  make  an  arrangement  of  two  things,  we  have 
the  choice  of  seventeen  things  to  place  first,  and  then 
there  are  sixteen  things  left,  out  of  which  we  have  to 
choose  one  to  place  second,  and  complete  our  arrange 
ment.  Hence,  hy  Rule  L,  the  numher  of  ways  in  which 
we  can  make  an  arrangement  of  two  things,  is  17.16. 

So  if  we  wish  to  make  an  arrangement  of  three 
things,  we  can  place  the  first  two  in  17.16  ways, 
and  we  then  have  fifteen  things  left,  out  of  which  to 
choose  one  to  come  third,  and  complete  our  arrange 
ment;  therefore,  by  Rule  L,  the  number  of  ways  in 
which  we  can  make  an  arrangement  of  three  things  is 
the  product  of  17.16  and  15,  or  17.16.15  :  and  so  on. 


DIFFERENT   ARRANGEMENTS. 


27 


Many  questions  which  might  be  considered  under 
Kule  II.  may  be  answered  more  directly  by  this  rule. 
Thus  — 

Question. — How  many  three -lettered  words  could  be 
made  out  of  an  alphabet  of  twenty- six  letters,  not  using 
any  letter  more  than  once  ? 

Answer.—  26.25.24  =  15600. 

Question.  —  How  many  four-lettered  words  ? 
Answer.-^  26.25.24.23  =  358800. 

Question.  —  How  many  eight-lettered  words  ? 
Answer.—  26.25.24.23.22.21.20.19  =  62990928000. 

Question. — Four  flags  are  to  be  hoisted  on  one  mast, 
and  there  are  twenty  different  flags  to  choose  from : 
what  choice  have  we  ? 

Ansiver.  —  By  Kule  IV.  we  have  the  choice  of 

20.19.18.17,  or  116280 
different  ways. 

The  answer  would  evidently  be  the  same  if  the  flags 
were  to  be  hoisted  on  different  masts,  for  so  long  as 
there  are  four  different  positions  to  be  occupied,  the 
operation  consists  in  the  arrangement  in  these  posi 
tions  of  four  out  of  the  twenty  flags. 

Question. —  An  eight-oared  boat  has  to  be  manned 
out  of  a  club  consisting  of  fifty  rowing  members.  In 
how  many  ways  can  the  crew  be  arranged  ? 


ZO  CHOICE. 

Answer. — We  have  simply  to  arrange  eight  men  in 
order  out  of  fifty  men.  Therefore  Rule  IV.  applies,  and 
the  number  of  ways  is 

50.49.48.47.46.45.44.43,  or  21646947168000. 

RULE  V. 

The  number  of  ivays  in  which  twenty  things  can  be 
divided  into  two  classes  of  twelve  and  eight  respectively, 
is 

[20 

(M.-B 

and  similarly  for  any  other  numbers. 

Suppose  that  twenty  persons  have  to  take  their 
places  in  twelve  front  seats  and  eight  back  seats. 
By  Rule  III.  they  can  be  arranged  altogether  in  [20 
ways.  But  the  operation  of  arranging  them  may  be 
resolved  into  the  following  three  operations : — 

(1)  The  operation  of  dividing  the  twenty  into 
two  classes  of  twelve  and  eight. 

(2)  The   operation   of    arranging    the   class   of 
twelve  in  the  twelve  front  seats. 

(3)  The   operation   of    arranging    the   class   of 
eight  in  the  eight  back  seats. 

Hence,  by  Rule  II.,  |20  is  the  product  of  the 
number  of  ways  in  which  these  three  several  operations 
can  be  performed.  But  by  Rule  III.  the  second  can  be 
performed  in  |12  ways,  and  the  third  in  |8  ways; 


DIVISION    INTO    TWO    CLASSES.  29 

therefore  it  follows  that  the  first  can  he  performed  in 

120 

J12.J8 

ways.  This,  therefore,  expresses  the  number  of  ways 
in  which  twenty  things  can-  be  divided  into  two  classes, 
of  which  the  first  shall  contain  twelve  things,  and  the 
second  shall  contain  eight. 

And  it  will  be  observed  that  our  reasoning  through 
out  is  perfectly  general,  and  would  equally  apply  if, 
instead  of  the  number  twenty,  divided  into  the  parts 
twelve  and  eight,  we  had  any  other  number,  divided 
into  any  two  assigned  parts  whatever. 

Hence  we  can  write  down  on  the  same  plan  the 
number  of  ways  in  which  any  given  number  of  things 
can  be  divided  into  two  classes,  with  a  given  number 
in  each. 

Question. — Eight  men  are  to  take  their  places  in  an 
eight-oared  boat ;  but  two  of  them  can  only  row  on 
stroke  side,  and  one  of  them  only  on  bow  side ;  the 
others  can  row  on  either  side.  In  how  many  ways 
can  the  men  be  arranged? 

Ansiver.  —  The  operation  of  arranging  the  men  may 
be  resolved  into  the  following  three  simple  and  succes 
sive  operations,  viz., 

(1)  To  divide  the  five  men  who  can  row  on 
either  side  into  two  parties  of  two  and  three, 
to  complete  stroke  side  and  bow  side  re 
spectively. 


30  CHOICE. 

(2)  To   arrange    stroke   side   when   it    is    thus 
completed  ;    and 

(3)  To  arrange  bow  side. 

The  five  men  who  can  row  on  either  side  can  he 
divided  into  two  parties  of  two  and  three  respectively, 
in 


ways,  by  Rule  V.  And  when  this  is  done,  stroke  side, 
consisting  of  four  men,  can  be  arranged  in  _£  or 
twenty-four  different  ways  (Rule  III.)  ;  and  likewise  bow 
side  in  twenty-four  ways.  Hence  the  whole  arrange 
ment  can  be  made  in  10  x  24  x  24,  or  5760  ways. 


RULE  VI. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  twenty  things  can  be 
divided  into   three   classes  of  five,   seven,   and   eight, 

respectively,  is 

120 


and  similarly  for  any  other  numbers. 

For,  by  Rule  V.,  the  twenty  things  can  be  divided 
into  two  classes  of  twelve  and  eight  in 

20 


different  ways,    and,   when  this  is  done,  the  class  of 


DIVISION    INTO   CLASSES.  31 

twelve   can   be   divided   into   two   classes  of  five   and 


seven  in 


|5.|7 
ways.     Hence,  by  Rule  L,  both  these  can  be  done  in 

|20                   |12  |20 

x      —         or 


J12.|8  |5.|7  5.|7.|8 

different  ways. 

That  is,  twenty  things  can  be  divided  into  three 
classes  of  five,  seven  and  eight  severally,  in 

go 

|5.|7.|8 

different  ways;  and  since  our  reasoning  is  perfectly 
general,  a  similar  result  may  be  written  down  when 
the  numbers  are  any  other. 

And  it  is  easily  seen  that  the  reasoning  may  be 
extended,  in  the  same  manner,  to  the  case  of  more 
than  three  classes. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  three  boys  divide 
twelve  oranges,  each  taking  four? 

Answer. — By  Rule  VI.  the  number  of  different  ways 
in  which  twelve  things  can  be  divided  into  three  classes 
of  four  each,  is 

112 

—  ]A    or  34650. 

4 . 1 4  .  \4 


32  CHOICE. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  they  divide  them, 
so  that  the  eldest  gets  five,  the  next  four,  and  the 
youngest  three  ? 

Answer.  —  By    Kule   VI.   the   numher   of    different 

ways  is 

12 

or  27720. 


|8.J4.(6 

Question. — If  there  be  fifteen  apples  all  alike,  twenty 
pears  all  alike,  and  twenty-five  oranges  all  alike,  in 
how  many  ways  can  sixty  boys  take  one  each  ? 

Answer.  —  The  boys  have,  in  fact,  to  form  themselves 
into  a  party  of  fifteen  for  the  apples,  a  party  of  twenty 
for  the  pears,  and  a  party  of  twenty-five  for  the  oranges. 
They  can  therefore  do  it  by  Kule  VI.  in 

[60 

|15.[20.J25 
different  ways. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  two  sixes,  three 
fives,  and  an  ace  be  thrown  with  six  dice  ? 

Answer.  —  The  six  dice  have  to  be  divided  into  three 
sets,  containing  2,  3,  1  severally,  of  which  the  first  set 
are  to  be  placed  with  six  upwards ;  the  second  set  with 
Jive  upwards;  and  the  third  set '  with  ace  upwards. 
By  Kule  VI.  it  can  be  done  in 

|6 

•  "jsTjaTii     or  60 

different  ways. 


APPLICATION   OF   BULES   V.   AND   VI.  33 


Question.—  In  how  many  ways  may  fifty-two  cards 
be  divided  amongst  four  players,  so  that  each  may  have 
thirteen  ? 

Answer.  —  By  Rule  VI., 


A  possible  error  must  be  guarded  against  in  the 
application  of  Rules  V.  and  VI. 

Suppose  we  are  given  eight  things,  say  the  letters 

A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  a,  H, 

and  are  asked  in  how  many  ways  it  is  possible  to 
divide  them  into  two  parcels  of  four  each.  If  the 
parcels  are  numbered  No.  1  and  No.  2,  and  are  de 
signed  for  different  purposes,  we  may  apply  Rule  V., 
and  answer  that  the  number  of  possible  ways  is 


In  this  case,  to  put 

('A,  B,  C,  D,  into  the  first  parcel, 
E,  F,  a,  H,  into  the  second; 

and  to  put 

(A,  B,  C)  D,  into  the  second  parcel, 
E,  F,  G,  H,  into  the  first, 

will  be  counted  as  different  ways  of  disposing  of  the 
eight  things.     But  if  the  parcels  be  perfectly  indifferent 


34  CHOICE. 

— if  the  eight  things  have  simply  to  he  disposed  in  two 
equal  heaps,  with  no  distinction  between  the  heaps — 
then  the  two  ways  just  indicated  of  disposing  of  the 
eight  things  will  hecome  identical ;  each  being  merged 
into  the  one  way  of  putting 

(  A,  B,  C,  D,  into  one  parcel, 
\  E,  F,  G-,  H,  into  another. 

In  such  a  case  as  this,  therefore,  the  Rule  V.  cannot 
be  applied  without  some  modification ;  we  should,  in 
fact,  have  to  divide  by  2  the  result  given  by  this  rule. 

So  if  there  are  twelve  things  to  be  divided  into  three 
different  parcels  —  as,  for  instance,  twelve  oranges  to 
be  divided  among  three  different  boys — the  Eule  VI. 
may  be  applied.  But  if  the  parcels  are  indifferent,  and 
we  are  simply  asked  in  how  many  ways  twelve  things 
can  be  divided  into  three  equal  parts,  the  rule  would 
want  modification ;  we  should,  in  fact,  have  to  divide 
our  result  by  |3,  the  number  of  different  orders  in 
which  the  three  parcels  can  be  arranged. 

When  different  numbers  of  things  have  to  be  put 
into  the  different  parcels — as  in  the  case  when  twenty 
things  are  to  be  divided  into  parcels  of  five,  seven,  and 
eight  —  no  difficulty  or  doubt  can  arise,  for  the  differ 
ences  of  number  are  sufficient  to  distinguish  the 
different  parcels,  and  to  give  an  individuality  to  each  ; 
so  that  in  such  a  case  the  Rule  V.  or  VI.  is  always 
applicable. 


DIFFERENT    CLASSES.  35 

It  must  be  observed  that  there  is  some  ambiguity 
in  the  manner  in  which  the  words  sort  and  class  are 
sometimes  used,  especially  when  we  describe  collections 
of  articles  as  of  different  sorts  or  of  the  same  sort,  or  of 
different  classes  or  of  the  same  class. 

Thus,  if  letters  have  been  spoken  of  as  consonants 
and  vowels,  we  may  describe  the  alphabet  as  containing 
twenty  letters  of  one  sort,  and  six  letters  of  the  other 
sort ;  yet  if  we  regard  the  individual  character  of  each 
letter,  we  shall  speak  of  a  printer's  fount  as  containing 
twenty- six  different  sorts  of  letters.  Plainly,  there  are 
either  two  classes  or  twenty-six  classes,  according  to  the 
character  adopted  as  the  criterion  of  class. 

For  instance,  we  may  describe  the  letters 

a,  a,  a,  x,  x, 

as  three  of  one  sort  and  two  of  another  sort.     But  the 

letters 

a,  e,  i,  x,  z, 

regarded  as  vowels  and  consonants,  might  also  be  des 
cribed  as  three  of  one  sort  and  two  of  another  sort. 

Suppose  now  we  are  asked  in  how  many  different 
orders  we  can  write  down  five  different  letters,  of  which 
three  are  of  one  sort  and  two  of  another  sort,  the  an 
swer  will  depend  entirely  on  the  sense  in  which  "sort" 
is  understood.  If  we  suppose  the  letters  to  be  such  as 
a}  a,  a,  x9  xt 

where  those  of  the  same  sort  are  absolutely  identical 


36  CHOICE. 

with  one  another,  having  no  personal  individuality  (so  to 
speak),  the  answer  will  be 

JL. 

H-12 

(by  Rule  V.),  since  our  only  choice  lies  in  dividing  the 
five  places  into  two  sets  of  three  and  two,  for  the 
a,  a,  a,  and  x,  x.  But  if  the  given  letters  be  such  as 

a,  e,  i,  x,  z> 

where  the  three,  a,  e,  i,  are  of  one  sort  as  vowels,  but 
each  has  an  individual  character  of  its  own,  and  the 
two,  x,  z,  are  of  one  sort  as  consonants,  but  these  also 
like  the  vowels  distinct  in  their  identity,  then  the 
answer  becomes  5,  by  Eule  in.,  since  the  five  letters 
are  for  the  purposes  of  arrangement  all  different. 

We  shall  avoid  this  ambiguity  as  much  as  possible, 
by  speaking  of  things  as  of  one  sort,  when  there  is  no 
individual  distinction  amongst  them,  and  of  one  class 
when  they  are  united  by  a  common  characteristic,  but 
capable,  at  the  same  time,  of  distinction  one  from 
another. 


KULE  VII. 

The  number  of  orders  in  which  twenty  letters  can  be 
arranged,  of  which  four  are  of  one  sort  (a,  a,  a,  a, 
suppose  J,  Jive  of  another  sort  (b,  b,  b,  b}  b,  suppose  J, 


ARRANGEMENT   OF   THINGS   NOT   ALL   DIFFERENT.     37 

two  of  another  sort  (c>  c,  suppose},  and  the  remaining 
nine  all  different,  is 

|20 
|4.|6.|2 

and  similarly  for  any  other  numbers. 

For  the  operation  of  arranging  the  letters  in  order 
may  be  resolved  into  the  following  :  — 

(1)  To  divide  the  twenty  places  into  four  sets, 
of  four,  five,  two,  nine,  respectively. 

(2)  To  place  the  a,  a,  a,  a,  in  the  set  of  four 
places. 

(3)  To  place  the  b,  b,  b,  b,  b,  in  the  set  of  five 
places. 

(4)  To  place  the  c,  c  in  the  set  of  two  places. 

(5)  To  arrange  the  nine  remaining  letters  in  the 
set  of  nine  places. 

Now  by  Rule  VI.,  the  operation  (1)  can  be  done  in 

|20 
I4.J6.J2.I9 

different  ways. 

The  operation  (2)  can  be  done  in  only  one  way,  since 
the  letters  are  all  alike. 

So  the  operations  (3)  (4)  can  be  done  in  only  one 
way  each. 

And  the  operation  (5)  can  be  performed  in  |9  ways 
by  Rule  III. 


38  CHOICE. 

Therefore  by  Rule  II.  the  whole  complex  operation 
can  be  performed  in 

120  120 

-  L_  -  x  i9     or   -  L___ 

ll-IMM?.  I1-I6.-P 

different  ways. 

And  in  the  same  way  we  can  reason  about  any  other 
case.  Hence  in  any  case,  to  find  the  number  of  orders 
in  which  a  series  of  letters  can  be  arranged  which  are 
not  all  alike,  we  have  only  to  write  down  the  fraction, 
having  in  the  numerator  the  total  number  of  the  letters, 
and  in  the  denominator  the  number  of  letters  of  the 
several  sorts  ;  each  number  being  enclosed  in  the 
mark  . 


Question.  —  In  how  many  orders  can  we  arrange  the 
letters  of  the  word   indivisibility  ? 

114 
Answer.  —  —=-  =14.13.12.11.10.9.8.7  =  121080960. 


Question.  —  In  how  many  orders  can  we  arrange  the 
letters  of  the  word  parallelepiped? 

Answer.-  "  =201801600. 


Question.  —  In  how  many  orders  can  we  arrange  the 
letters  oT  the  word  Hang  oil  en  ? 
Answer.  —  75600. 


SELECTIONS    OR    COMBINATIONS.  39 


BULE   VIII. 

Out  of  twenty  things,  a  selection  of  twelve  things  can 
be  made  in  the  same  number  of  ways  as  a  selection  of 
eight  things  ( 'where  12  +  8  =  20^  ;  and  the  number  of 

ways  is 

120 


and  similarly  for  other  numbers  of  things. 

For  the  selection  of  twelve  (or  eight)  things  out  of 
twenty,  consists  of  the  operation  of  dividing  the  twenty 
things  into  two  sets  of  twelve  and  eight,  and  rejecting 
one  of  the  sets.  Therefore  (hy  the  last  rule),  which 
ever  set  be  rejected,  the  operation  can  be  performed  in 

|20 


112.18 
different  ways. 

Question. —  Out  of  one  hundred  things,  in  how  many 
ways  can  three  things  be  selected  ? 
Answer.  —  By  Rule  VIII., 

[100 

|97.|3; 


40  CHOICE. 

or  striking  out  from  the  numerator  and  the  denomi 
nator  all  the  successive  factors  from  1  to  97, 

100 . 99  . 98 


We  observe  that  the  numerator  100.99.98  expresses 
(Kule  V.)  the  number  of  ways  in  which  an  arrange 
ment  of  three  things  might  be  made  out  of  one 
hundred  things. 

This  suggests  the  following  rule  for  the  number  of 
ways  of  selecting  any  number  of  things  out  of  a  larger 
number,  which  will  often  be  found  more  convenient 
than  Kule  VIII.,  although  both  of  course  lead  to  the 
same  result. 


KULE    IX. 

Out  of  any  given  number  of  things, 

the  number  of  selections  of  two  things  may  be 
obtained  from  the  number  of  arrangements  of  two 
things,  by  dividing  by  |2 ; 

the  number  of  selections  of  three  things  may  be 
obtained  from  the  number  of  arrangements  of  three 
things,  by  dividing  by  |3 ; 

the  number  of  selections  of  four  things  may  be 
obtained  from  the  number  of  arrangements  of  four 
things,  by  dividing  by  |4; 

and  so  on. 


SELECTIONS   OB   COMBINATIONS.  41 

It  will  be  sufficient  to  shew  the  reason  of  this  rule 
in  any  particular  case. 

Suppose  we  have  to  make  a  selection  of  three  things 
out  of  a  given  number  of  things ;  what  is  our  choice  in 
this  case,  compared  with  our  choice  in  making  an 
arrangement  of  three  things. 

The  operation  of  making  an  arrangement  of  three 
things  may  be  resolved  into  the  two  operations  following, 
viz. :  — 

(1)  To  make  a  selection  of  three  things  out  of 
the  given  things. 

(2)  To   arrange    in    order    the    three    selected 
things. 

Therefore,  by  Kule  I.,  the  number  of  ways  of  making 
an  arrangement  of  three  things  is  equal  to  the  number 
of  ways  of  making  a  selection  of  three  things,  multi 
plied  by  the  number  of  ways  of  arranging  the  three 
selected  things. 

But  by  Eule  III.,  three  things  can  be  arranged 
in  |3  different  ways. 

Hence,  the  number  of  arrangements  of  three  things, 
out  of  a  greater  number,  is  equal  to  the  number  of 
selections  multiplied  by  |3. 

Or  the  number  of  selections  of  three  things  is  equal 
to  the  number  of  arrangements  divided  by  |3. 

And  the  same  reasoning  would  apply  if  the  number 
of  things  to  be  selected  were  any  other  instead  of  3. 
Therefore  the  rule  is  true  always. 


42  CHOICE. 

The  student  being  in  possession  of  the  two  rules 
(VIII.  and  IX.)  for  writing  down  the  number  of  ways 
in  which  any  number  of  things  can  be  selected  out  of 
a  larger  number,  will,  in  any  particular  case,  use  the 
rule  which  may  seem  the  more  convenient.  It  will  be 
observed  that  Rule  VIII.  gives  the  result  in  the  more 
concise  form  when  the  number  of  things  to  be  selected 
is  a  high  number  ;  but  the  fraction  thus  written  down, 
though  more  concisely  expressed,  is  not  in  such  low 
terms  as  that  which  would  be  written  down  by  Rule 
IX.  Consequently,  when  the  actual  numerical  value 
of  the  result  is  required,  Rule  IX.  leaves  the  less 
work  to  be  done,  in  cancelling  out  common  factors 
from  the  numerator  and  the  denominator.  In  many 
cases,  it  is  simplest  to  take  advantage  of  the  principle 
of  Rule  VIII.,  that  out  of  twenty  things  (suppose)  the 
number  of  ways  in  which  seventeen  things  can  be 
selected  is  the  same  as  the  number  of  ways  in  which 
20  —  17  or  three  things  can  be  selected,  and  then 
to  apply  Rule  IX.  For,  comparing  the  different  forms 
of  the  result  in  this  case,  we  observe  that  Rule  VIII. 
gives 

|20 


while  Rule  IX.  gives 

20.19.18.17.16.15.14.13.12.11.10.9.8.7.6.5.4 


1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.17 


TWO    RULES    FOE    SELECTIONS.  43 

which  might  be  simplified  by  dividing  the  numerator 
and  denominator  by  the  factors 

4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16.17 

But  if  we  recognise  the  teaching  of  Kule  VIII.  ,  that 
the  number  of  ways  of  selecting  seventeen  things  is 
the  same  as  the  number  of  ways  of  selecting  three 
things,  and  then  apply  Rule  IX.  to  find  the  number  of 
ways  of  selecting  three  things,  we  can  at  once  write 
down  the  result  in  the  simple  form 

20.19.18 


Question.  —  Out  of  a  basket  of  twenty  pears  at  three 
a  penny,  how  many  ways  are  there  of  selecting  six 
pennyworth  ? 

Answer.  —  By  Rule  VIII.,  we  can  select  eighteen 
out  of  twenty  in  as  many  ways  as  we  can  select  two  ; 
and,  by  Rule  IX.,  this  can  be  done  in 

20.19 

-  or  190 


1.2 

ways. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  the  same  choice 
be  exercised  so  as  to  include  the  largest  pear  ? 

Answer.  —  Taking  the  largest  pear  first,  our  only 
choice  now  lies  in  selecting  seventeen  out  of  the 


44  CHOICE. 

remaining  nineteeen,  which  can  be  done  (Rules  VIII. 
and  IX.)  in 


ways. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  the  same  choice 
be  exercised  without  taking  the  smallest  pear  ? 

Answer.  —  We  have  now  to  select  eighteen  pears  out 
of  nineteen.  Therefore  (Rules  VIII.  and  IX.)  our 
choice  can  be  exercised  in  nineteen  ways. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  the  same  choice 
be  exercised  so  as  to  include  the  largest,  and  not  to 
include  the  smallest  pear  ? 

Answer.  —  Taking  the  largest  pear  first,  we  have  then 
to  choose  seventeen  more  out  of  eighteen,  which  can  be 
done  (Rules  VIII.  and  IX.)  in  eighteen  ways. 

Question.  —  Out  of  forty-  two  liberals  and  fifty  con 
servatives,  what  choice  is  there  in  selecting  a  committee 
consisting  of  four  liberals  and  four  conservatives  ? 

Answer.  —  The  liberal  committee-men  can  be  chosen 
(by  Rule  VIII.)  in 

42.41.40.39 


1.2.3.4 

different  ways,  and  the  conservative  committee-men  in 
50.49.48.47 


1.2.3.4 


or  230300 


SELECTIONS  UNDER  CERTAIN  RESTRICTIONS.    45 

different  ways.     Hence  (by  Rule  I.)  the  whole  choice 
can  be  exercised  in 

111930  x  230300,  or  25777479000 
different  ways. 

Question. — A  company  of  volunteers  consists  of  a 
captain,  a  lieutenant,  an  ensign,  and  eighty  rank  and 
file.  In  how  many  ways  can  ten  men  be  selected  so  as 
to  include  the  captain. 

Answer.  —  Since  the  captain  is  to  be  one  of  the  ten, 
the  only  choice  lies  in  the  selection  of  nine  men  out  of 
the  remaining  eighty-two,  which  can  be  done  (Rule 

VIII.  or  IX.)  in 

[82 

J9.J73 
82.81.80.79.78.77.76.75.74 

T" 

different  ways. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  ten  men  be 
selected  so  as  to  include  at  least  one  officer  ? 

Answer. — By  Rule  VIII.  ten  men  can  be  selected 
out  of  the  whole  company  in 

J88 
[10.J73 

ways  altogether.    But  the  number  of  different  ways  that 
will  include  no  officer  will  be  the  number  of  ways  in 


46 


CHOICE. 


which  ten  can  be  selected  out  of  the  eighty  rank  and 
file,  that  is,  (by  Kule  VIII.) 

|80 


110.^70 

These  must  be  subtracted  from  the  whole  number  of 
ways  in  which  ten  men  might  be  selected,  and  the 
remainder 

|83  |80 


[10 . 1 78         1 10  .  [70 

will  be  the   number  of  ways  in  which  they  may  be 
selected  so  as  to  include  at  least  one  officer. 

Question.  —  In   how  many  ways   can    ten   men   be 
selected  so  as  to  include  exactly  one  officer? 

Answer.  —  The  nine  rank  and  file  can  be  selected  in 

|80 


IMZi 

ways,  and  the  one  officer  in  three  ways.     Therefore  the 
ten  can  be  selected  in 

3  x  |80 

different  ways. 

Question. — There  are  fifteen  candidates  for  admission 
into  a  society  which  has   two  vacancies.      There   are 


SELECTIONS    OUT    OF    DIFFERENT    CLASSES.  47 

seven  electors,  and  each  can  either  vote  for  two  candi 
dates,  or  plump  for  one.  In  how  many  ways  can  the 
votes  be  given  ? 

Answer.  —  Each  voter  can  plump  in  fifteen  ways, 
and  can  vote  for  two  candidates  in 

15.14 

or  105 


L. 

ways  (Eule  IX).  Therefore  each  elector  can  vote 
altogether  in  120  ways.  And  there  are  seven  electors ; 
therefore  all  the  votes  can  be  given  (by  Kule  II.)  in 

120   x   120   x   120  x   120  x  120  x  120  x   120 

or  358318080000000 
different  ways. 

It  will  be  well  to  notice  particularly  the  points 
which  distinguish  the  next  three  examples. 

In  all  of  them  we  suppose  twenty  things  of  one 
class  and  six  things  of  another  class  set  before  us,  the 
individuals  of  each  class  being  distinct ;  and  in  all  of 
them  a  selection  has  to  be  made  of  three  things  out  of 
each  class.  But  while  the  first  is  a  case  of  simple 
selection,  in  the  second  each  set  of  three  things  has 
separately  to  be  arranged  in  order,  and  in  the  third 
the  whole  six  selected  things  have  to  be  together 
arranged  in  order. 


Question. —  Out  of  twenty  men  and  six  women,  what 
choice  have  we  in  selecting  three  men  and  three  women  ? 


48  CHOICE. 

Answer. —  The  men  can  be  selected  in 
20.19.18 

T^  or  mo 

different  ways  (Kule  IX.),  and  the  women  in 
6.5.4 

is§ or20 

different  ways.     Therefore,  we  have  the  choice  of 

1140  X  20  or  22800 
different  ways  of  making  our  selection. 

Question.  —  Out  of  twenty  men  and  six  women,  what 
choice  have  we  in  filling  up  six  different  offices,  three  of 
which  must  be  filled  by  men,  and  the  other  three  by 
women  ? 

Answer. —  We  can  allot  the  first  three  offices  to  three 
men  in  20.19.18  or  6840  different  ways  (Kule  IV.)  ; 
and  we  can  allot  the  other  three  offices  to  three  women 
in  6.5.4  or  120  different  ways.  Therefore,  we  have 
the  choice  of 

6840  x  120  or  820800 
different  ways  of  making  our  arrangement. 

Question. —  Out  of  twenty  consonants  and  six  vowels, 
in  how  many  ways  can  we  make  a  word,  consisting  of 
three  different  consonants,  and  three  different  vowels  ? 


SELECTION  OUT  OF  DIFFERENT  CLASSES.      49 


Answer.  —  "We  can  select  three  consonants  in 


20.19.18       


different  ways,  and  three  vowels  in 


different  ways.  Therefore  (by  Rule  L),  the  six  letters 
can  be  selected  in 

1140  x  20,  or  22800 

different  ways,  and  when  they  are  so  selected,  they  can 
be  arranged  (by  Rule  III.),  in  [6  or  720  different 
orders.  Hence  (by  Rule  I.),  there  are  22800  x  720  or 
16416000  different  ways  of  making  the  word. 

Question.  —  Out  of  the  twenty-six  letters  of  the 
alphabet,  in  how  many  ways  can  we  make  a  word 
consisting  of  four  different  letters,  one  of  which  must 
be  always  a  ? 

Answer.  —  Since  we  are  always  to  use  a,  we  must 
choose  three  letters  out  of  the  remaining  twenty-five. 
This  can  be  done  in 

25.24.23 


ways.     Then  the    whole   set    of  four  letters    can   be 
arranged  in  [4  or  24  different  orders.     Hence  we  have 

the  choice  of 

2300  x  24,  or  55200 

different  ways  of  making  the  word, 

E 


50  CHOICE. 

The  last  answer  might  have  been  arrived  at  in 
another  way,  as  follows  : — 

Without  the  limitation,  we  could  make  a  word  of 
four  different  letters  in  26.25.24.23  or  358800  different 
ways.  The  question  is  how  many  of  these  will  contain 
a.  Now  if  all  the  358800  words  were  written  down  on 
paper,  since  each  is  made  of  four  letters,  our  paper 
would  contain  358800  x  4,  or  1435200  letters.  And 
since  no  letter  of  the  alphabet  has  been  used  with  more 
favour  than  any  other,  it  follows  that  each  would  occur 
1435200  -v-  26,  or  55200  times.  Therefore  a  must 
occur  55200  times  ;  and  since  no  word  contains  a  more 
than  once,  55200  words  must  contain  a.  That  is,  the 
number  of  words  formed  of  four  different  letters  of 
which  a  is  one  is  55200,  as  before. 

Question.  —  Out  of  the  twenty-six  letters  of  the 
alphabet,  in  how  many  ways  can  we  make  a  word 
consisting  of  four  different  letters,  two  of  which  must 
be  a  and  b  ? 

Answer. — We  can  choose  the  other  two  letters  out 
of  the  remaining  twenty-four  in 
24.23 

-TT  or  276 

ways,  and  then  we  can  arrange  the  whole  set  of  four 
letters  in  |4  or  24  different  orders.     Hence  we  have 

the  choice  of 

276  x  24,  or  6624 

different  ways  of  making  the  word. 


SELECTION    UNDER    CERTAIN   RESTRICTIONS.  51 

Question. — Out  of  twenty  consonants  and  six  vowels, 
in  how  many  ways  can  we  make  a  word  consisting  of 
three  different  vowels  and  two  different  consonants,  one 
of  the  vowels  being  always  a  ? 

Answer. — We  can  choose  the  other  two  vowels  in 


ways,  and  the  two  consonants  in 


ways  ;  hence  our  letters  can  be  selected  in  1900  ways, 
and  when  they  are  selected  the  set  of  five  can  be 
arranged  in  |5  or  120  ways.  Hence  the  whole  number 
of  ways  of  making  the  word  is 

1900  x  120,  or  228000. 

Question.  —  There  are  ten  different  situations  vacant, 
of  which  four  must  be  held  by  men,  and  three  by 
women  ;  the  remaining  three  may  be  held  by  either 
men  or  women.  If  twenty  male  and  six  female  candi 
dates  present  themselves,  in  how  many  ways  can  we 
fill  up  the  situations  ? 

Answer.  —  The  men's  situations  can  be  filled  up  in 
20.19.18.17  or  116280  different  ways,  and  the  women's 
in  6.5.4  or  120  different  ways.  When  this  is  done, 
there  are  nineteen  persons  left,  all  of  whom  are 
eligible  for  the  other  three  situations.  Hence  these 
three  can  be  filled  up  in  19.18.17  or  5814  different 


'52  CHOICE. 

ways.     Therefore,  the  whole  election  can  be  made  in 
116280  X  120  x  5814,  or  81126230400  different  ways. 

ARRANGEMENTS    OUT    OF   A   NUMBER    OF    THINGS   NQT 
ALL   DIFFERENT. 

We  considered  under  Kule  VII.  the  modifications 
of  the  case  of  Rule  III.,  when  the  things  out  of  which 
the  arrangement  is  to  be  made  are  not  all  different. 
The  corresponding  modifications  of  Rule  IV.  are  too 
intricate  to  be  treated  by  a  general  rule  in  an  ele 
mentary  treatise  on  Arithmetic;  but  each  case,  as  it 
.arises,  may  be  resolved  into  cases  to  which  the 
preceding  rules  will  apply.  The  manner  of  proceeding 
will  be  sufficiently  illustrated  by  the  following  questions. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  an  arrangement 
of  four  letters  be  made  out  of  the  letters  of  the  words 
choice  and  chance? 

Answer. — There  are  fifteen  letters  altogether,  of 
eight  different  sorts,  viz.,  c,  c,  c,  c ;  li,  h ;  a,  a;  n,  n ; 
.e,  e;  o ;  i;  d.  The  different  ways  of  selecting  the 
ifour  letters  may,  therefore,  be  classified  as  follows : 

(1)  all  four  alike, 

(2)  three  alike  and  one  different, 

(3)  two  alike  and  two  others  alike, 

(4)  two  alike  and  the  other  two  different, 

(5)  all  four  different. 

Now,  the  selection  (1)  can  be  made  in  only  one  way 


ARRANGEMENTS  OUT  OF  THINGS  NOT  ALL  DIFFERENT.    58 

(viz.  by  selecting  c,  c,  c,  c),  and  when  this  selection  of 
letters  is  made,  they  can  be  arranged  in  only  one  order  ; 

therefore  (1)  gives  rise  to  only  one  arrangement. 

The  selection  (2)  can  be  made  in  seven  ways,  for 
three  letters  alike  can  be  selected  in  only  one  way  (viz. 
c,  c,  c),  and  one  different  one  in  seven  ways  (a,  e,  i,  o, 
h,  n,  d).  And  when  this  selection  of  letters  is  made, 
they  can  be  arranged  in  four  ways  (Kule  VII.)  ; 

therefore  (2)  gives  rise  to  7  x  4,  or  28  arrangements. 

5.4 
The  selection  (3)  can  be  made  in  —  —  or  10  ways 


(Eule  IX.),  since  we  have  to  select  two  out  of  the  five 
pairs,  cc,  hh,  aa,  nn,  ee.     And  when  this  selection  of 

14 
letters  is  made,  they  can  be  arranged  in  —  -  or  6  ways 

|2.|2 

(Rule  VII.)  ; 

therefore  (3)  gives  rise  to  10  x  6,  or  60  arrangements. 

The  selection  (4)  can  be  made  in  5  x  21,  or  105 
ways,  for  we  can  select  one  of  the  five  pairs,  cc,  hh,  aa, 
nn,  ee  in  five  ways,  and  two  out  of  the  seven  different 

rj    n 

sorts  of  letters  that  will  then  be  left,  in  —  —  or  21 

1  .  2t 

ways,  (Rule  IX.)  ;  and  when  this  selection  of  letters  is 

I* 
made,  they  can  be  arranged  in  —  or  12  ways  (Rule 

|2 

VII.)  ; 

therefore  (4)  gives  rise  to  105  x  12,  or  1260  arrange 
ments* 


54  CHOICE. 

The  selection  (5)  of  four  different  letters  must  be 
made  out  of  the  eight,  c,  h,  a,  n,  e,  o,  i,  d,  therefore 
the  number  of  arrangements  which  will  come  from  such 
a  selection  must  be  8 .  7  .  6  .  5  or  1680. 

Hence,  the  whole  number  of  arrangements  of  four 
letters  out  of  the  fifteen  given  letters  is 

1  +  28  +  60  +  1260  +  1680,  or  3029. 

Question. — In  how  many  ways  can  an  arrangement 
of  three  things  be  made  out  of  fifteen  things,  of  which 
five  are  of  one  sort,  four  of  another  sort,  three  of 
another  sort,  and  the  remaining  three  of  another  sort? 

Answer. — The  three  selected  things  may  be  either — 

(1)  all  three  alike, 
or  (2)  two  alike  and  one  different, 
or  (3)  all  different. 

Now,  the  selection  of  all  three  alike  can  be  made  in 
4  ways,  since  we  can  take  one  of  the  four  different 
sorts.  And  when  this  selection  is  made,  the  selected 
things  can  be  arranged  in  only  one  order; 

therefore  (1)  gives  rise  to  only  four  arrangements. 

The  selection  of  two  alike  and  one  different  can  be 
made  in  4  x  3,  or  12  ways  (Kule  I.) ;  for  the  two 
alike  can  be  of  any  of  the  four  sorts,  and  the  one 
different  of  any  one  of  the  remaining  three  sorts.  And 
when  this  selection  is  made,  the  things  selected  can  be 

13 
arranged  in  ^-,  or  three  ways  (Kule  VII.) ; 

therefore  (2)  gives  rise  to  12  x  3,  or  36  arrangements. 


ARRANGEMENTS  OUT  OF  THINGS  NOT  ALL  DIFFERENT.    55 

And  if  all  three  selected  things  are  to  be  different 
we  shall  have  4.3.2,  or  24  arrangements  (Rule  IV.). 

Hence,  the  whole  number  of  arrangements  of  three 
things  out  of  the  fifteen  given  things  is 

4  +  36  +  24,  or  64. 


tion. — In  how  many  ways  can  an  arrangement 
of  five  things  be  made  out  of  the  fifteen  things  given  in 
the  last  question  ? 

Answer. —  The  different  ways  of  selecting  five  things 
may  be  classified  as  follows  :  — 

(1)  all  five  alike, 

(2)  four  alike  and  one  different, 

(3)  three  alike  and  two  others  alike, 

(4)  three  alike  and  two  different, 

(5)  two  alike,  two  others  alike,  and  one  different, 

(6)  two  alike  and  three  different. 

Now  by  the  application  of  Rules  II.,  VII.,  IX.,  as 
in  the  preceding  questions,  it  will  be  easily  seen  that 

the  selection  (1)  can  be  made  in  one  way,  and  leads 
to  one  arrangement : 

the  selection  (2)  can  be  made  in  six  ways,  and  leads 
to  6  x  5  or  30  arrangements  : 

the  selection  (3)  can  be  made  in  twelve  ways,  and 
leads  to  12  x  10  or  120  arrangements  : 

the  selection  (4)  can  be  made  in  twelve  ways,  and 
leads  to  12  x  20  or  240  arrangements : 

the  selection  (5)  can  be  made  in  twelve  ways,  and 
leads  to  12  x  30  or  360  arrangements  : 


56  CHOICE. 

the  selection  (6)  can  be  made  in  four  ways,  and  leads 
to  4  x  60  or  240  arrangements. 

Hence  the  whole  number  of  different  arrangements 

is 

1  +  30  +  120  +  240  +  360  +  240,  or  991. 


RULE  X. 

The  whole  number  of  ways  in  which  a  person  can 
select  some  or  all  (as  many  as  he  pleases}  of  a  given 
number  of  things,  is  one  less  than  the  continued  product 
of  2  repeated  the  given  number  of  times. 

For  since  he  is  at  liberty  to  take  none  or  all  or  as 
many  as  he  pleases  of  the  different  things,  he  can 
dispose  of  each  thing  in  two  ways,  for  he  can  either 
take  it  or  leave  it.  Now  suppose  there  are  five  things, 
then  he  can  act  altogether  in 

2x2x2x2x2 

different  ways.  But  if  he  is  not  to  reject  all  the 
things,  the  number  of  courses  open  to  him  will  be 
one  less  than  this,  or 

2x2x2x2x2-1. 

And  the  same  reasoning  would  apply  if  the  number 
of  things  were  any  other  number  instead  of  five. 
Hence,  the  rule  will  be  true  always. 


TOTAL    NUMBER   OF    SELECTIONS.  57 

Question.— One  of  the  stalls  in  a  bazaar  contains 
twenty- seven  articles  exposed  for  sale.  What  choice 
has  a  purchaser? 

Answer. — He  may  buy  either  one  thing  or  more, 
and  there  are  twenty- seven  things :  therefore  (by 
Rule  X.),  the  number  of  courses  open  to  him  is  one 
less  than  the  continued  product  of  twenty-seven  tivos, 
or  134217727. 

• 
Question. — What  is  the  greatest  number  of  different 

amounts  that  can  be   made  up  by  selection  from  five 
given  weights  ? 

Answer. — By  Eule  X.,  2  x  2  x  2  x  2  x  2  -  1  or  31. 

The  different  selections  will  not  always  produce 
different  sums.  Hence,  we  cannot  always  make 
thirty- one  different  sums.  But  under  favourable  cir 
cumstances,  as,  for  instance,  when  the  weights  are 
lib.,  21bs.,  41bs.,  81bs.,  161bs.,  all  the  different 
selections  will  produce  different  sums,  and  then  the 
number  of  different  sums  is  thirty-one.  Hence, 
thirty- one  is  the  greatest  number  of  different  weights 
that  can  be  made  by  a  selection  from  five  given 
weights. 

In  the  case  of  the  five  weights,  lib.,  21bs.,  41bs., 
81bs.,  161bs.,  the  thirty-one  different  amounts  that 
can  be  weighed  consist  of  every  integral  number  of 
pounds  from  one  to  thirty-one. 

Thus,    with     single    weights,    we    can    weigh    the 


58  CHOICE. 

following   numbers   of  pounds,   viz.,   1,  2,  4,  8,   16; 
and  then  we  have 

3-1+  2,  7  =  1  +  2+  4,  15  =  1  +  2  +  4+  8, 

5-1+  4,  11  =  1  +  2+  8,  23-1  +  2  +  4  +  16, 

6-2+  4,  13-1  +  4+  8,  27  =  1  +  2  +  8  +  16, 

9-1+  8,  14=2  +  4+  8,  29  =  1+4  +  8+16, 

10=2+   8,  19  =  1  +  2  +  16,  30  =  2  +  4  +  8  +  16, 

12-4+   8,  21-1  +  4  +  16, 

17=1  +  16,  22-2  +  4  +  16,  31  =  1  +  2  +  4  +  8  +  16. 

18  =  2  +  16,  25  =  1  +  8  +  16, 

20-4  +  16,  26=2  +  8  +  16, 

24=8  +  16,  28=4  +  8  +  16, 

It  may  be  observed  that,  if  we  had  a  321bs.  weight, 
by  adding  it  to  each  of  the  sets  already  obtained,  we 
should  get  all  the  numbers  from  33  to  63  inclusive; 
hence  all  the  weights 

lib.      21bs.      41bs.       81bs.       161bs.       321bs. 

would  enable  us  to  weigh  any  number  of  pounds  from 
1  to  63. 

Then  the  addition  of  a  641bs.  weight,  would  enable 
us  to  weigh  any  number  up  to  127,  and  so  on. 

Question. — What  is  the  greatest  number  of  different 
amounts  that  can  be  weighed  with  five  weights,  when 
each  weight  may  be  put  into  either  scale  ? 

Answer.  —  This  is  not  a  direct  example  of  our  rule, 
but  it  may  be  solved  on  a  like  principle  to  that  by 
which  the  rule  itself  was  established. 


COMBINATIONS    OF    GIVEN    WEIGHTS.  59 

Each  weight  can  be  disposed  of  in  three  ways,  that 
is,  it  can  be  placed  either  in  the  weight-pan,  or  in  the 
pan  with  the  substance  to  be  weighed,  or  it  can  be  left 
out  altogether.  Hence,  all  the  weights  can  be  disposed 
in  3  x  3  x  3  x  3  x  3,  or  243  ways  (Kule  II).  But 
one  of  these  ways  would  consist  in  rejecting  all  the 
weights ;  this  must  be  cast  out,  and  then  there  remain 
242  ways.  But  in  the  most  favourable  case,  half  of 
these  ways  would  consist  in  placing  a  less  weight  in 
the  weight-pan  than  in  the  other,  and  these  must  be 
cast  out.  Hence  there  remain  121  different  amounts 
that  can  be  weighed  under  the  most  favourable  circum 
stances  with  five  weights,  when  it  is  permitted  to  place 
weights  in  the  pan  with  the  substance  to  be  weighed. 

The  weights  lib.,  31bs.,  91bs.,  271bs.,  Sllbs.,  will 
afford  an  instance  of  the  most  favourable  case.  In  this 
instance,  the  121  amounts  that  can  be  weighed  consist  of 
every  integral  number  of  pounds  from  1  to  121.  Thus — 

2=3-1,  15  =  27  -  9  -  3, 

4=3  +  1,  16  =  27  -  9  -  3  +  1, 

5-9-3-1,  17  =  27  -  9  -  1, 

6=9-3,  18  =  27  -  9, 

7=9-3  +  1,  19  =  27  -  9  +  1, 

8=9-1,  20  =  27  -  9  +  3  -  1, 

10  =    9  +  1,  21  =  27  -  9  +  3, 

11  =    9  +  3  -  1,  22  =  27  -  9  +  3  +  1, 

12  =    9  +  3,  23  =  27  -  3  -  1, 

13  =    9  +  3  +  1,  24  =  27  -  3, 

14  =  27  -  9  -  3  -  1,  &c. 


60  CHOICE. 


RULE   XI. 

The  whole  number  of  ways  in  which  a  person  can 
select  some  or  all  fas  many  as  he  pleases  )  out  of  a  num 
ber  of  things  ivhich  are  not  all  different,  is  one  less  than 
the  continued  product  of  the  series  of  members  formed 
by  increasing  by  unity  the  several  numbers  of  things  of 
the  several  sorts. 

Thus,  suppose  we  have  the  letters  — 
a,  a,  a,  a,  a, 
b,  b,  b, 


d, 


viz.,  five  of  one  sort,  three  of  another,  four  of  a  third 
sort,  one  of  a  fourth  sort,  and  one  of  a  fifth. 

The  numbers  of  letters  in  the  several  classes  are 
5,  3,  4,  1,  1,  and  these,  severally  increased  hy  unity, 
give  the  new  series  of  numbers  6,  4,  5,  2,  2.  The  rule 
states  that  the  whole  number  of  ways  in  which  a  person 
may  take  some  or  all  (as  many  as  he  pleases)  of  the 
given  letters,  is 

6x4x5x2x2-1,  or  479. 

The  reason  of  the  rule  will  be  seen  from  the  following 
considerations.  Suppose  the  person  were  at  liberty  to 
take  none,  or  all,  or  as  many  as  he  pleased  of  the 


SELECTIONS    OF    THINGS   NOT   ALL   DIFFRENT.         61 

letters.  He  could  then  dispose  of  the  five  a,  a,  a,  a,  a 
in  six  different  ways,  for  he  might  take  5  or  4  or  3  or  2 
or  1  or  none  of  them.  So  he  could  dispose  of  the  three 

b,  by  b,  in  four  ways,  for  he  might  take  3  or  2  or  1  or 
none   of   them.     Similarly    he    could   dispose    of  the 

c,  c,  c,  c  in  five  ways,  and  of  the  d  in  two  ways,  and  of 
the  e  in  two  ways.     Hence  he  might  act  altogether,  in 

6x4x5x2x2 

different  ways  (Rule  II).  But  if  he  is  not  to  reject  all 
the  things,  the  numher  of  courses  open  to  him  will  he 
one  less  than  this,  or 

6x4x5x2x2-1. 

And  the  same  reasoning  would  apply  to  any  other 
case.  Hence  we  may  accept  the  rule  as  true  always. 

Question.  —  In  how  many  ways  can  two  booksellers 
divide  between  them  200  copies  of  one  book,  250  of 
another,  150  of  a  third,  and  100  of  a  fourth? 

Ansiver. — Either  man  can  take  any  number  of 
books,  but  not  either  none  or  all.  Therefore,  the 
number  of  ways  is  one  less  than  that  given  by  the 
rule :  i.  e.}  the  division  can  be  made  in 

201  x  251  x  151  x  101  -  2 
different  ways;  or  in 

769428201-2,  or  769428199 
different  ways. 


62  CHOICE. 


EXAMPLES    ON   CHOICE. 

1. — Having  four  seals  and  five  sorts  of  sealing  wax, 
in  how  many  ways  can  we  seal  a  letter  ? 

2. — There  are  five  first-class  carriages,  eight  second- 
class,  seven  third-class  and  three  luggage -vans.  In 
how  many  ways  can  a  train  be  made  consisting  of  one 
of  each  ? 

3. — How  many  changes  can  be  rung  upon  eight 
bells?  And  in  how  many  of  these  will  an  assigned 
bell  be  rung  last  ? 

4. — Out  of  a  class  of  twelve  boys,  in  how  many  ways 
can  three  boys  be  called  up  to  say  lessons  ? 

5. — In  how  many  ways  can  a  set  of  twelve  black 
and  twelve  white  draught-men  be  placed  on  the  black 
squares  of  a  draught-board? 

6. — In  how  many  ways  can  a  set  of  chess-men  be 
placed  on  a  chess-board? 

7. — In  how  many  ways  can  we  arrange  the  letters 
of  the  word  possessions  ? 

8. — In  how  many  ways  can  we  arrange  the  letters 
of  the  words  choice  and  chance  ? 


EXAMPLES.  63 

9. — In  how  many  ways  can  a  triangle  be  formed, 
having  its  angular  points  at  three  of  the  angular 
points  of  a  given  hexagon? 

10. —  There  are  three  teetotums,  having  respectively 
6,  8,  10  sides.  In  how  many  ways  can  they  fall?  and 
in  how  many  of  these  will  two  aces  he  turned  up  ? 

11. — A  company  of  soldiers  consists  of  three  officers, 
four  sergeants  and  sixty  privates.  In  how  many  ways 
can  a  detachment  be  made  consisting  of  an  officer,  two 
sergeants  and  twenty  privates?  In  how  many  of 
these  ways  will  the  captain  and  the  senior  sergeant 
appear? 

12. — In  how  many  ways  can  four  persons  sit  at  a 
round  table,  so  that  all  shall  not  have  the  same 
neighbours  in  any  two  arrangements? 

13.—  In  how  many  ways  can  seven  persons  sit  as  in 
the  last  question  ?  And  in  how  many  of  these  will  two 
assigned  persons  be  neighbours?  And  in  how  many 
will  an  assigned  person  have  the  same  two  neighbours? 

14. — Out  of  a  party  of  twelve  ladies  and  fifteen 
gentlemen,  in  how  many  ways  can  four  gentlemen  and 
four  ladies  be  selected  for  a  dance? 

15. — Out  of  twenty  consonants  and  six  vowels,  in 
how  many  ways  can  a  word  be  made,  consisting  of  three 


64  CHOICE. 

different  consonants  and  two  different  vowels,  without 
placing  all  the  consonants  together? 

16. — Out  of  twenty  consonants  and  ten  vowels,  in 
how  many  ways  can  a  word  he  formed  consisting  of 
three  different  vowels  and  three  different  consonants, 
the  vowels  and  consonants  being  placed  alternately  ? 

17.— In  how  many  ways  can  the  foregoing  questions 
he  arranged,  so  that  no  question  of  combination  shall 
come  before  any  question  of  permutation  ? 

18. — A  plaything  consists  of  eighteen  cubical  blocks ; 
on  each  side  of  five  of  them  a  head  is  painted,  on  each 
side  of  seven  a  body,  and  on  each  side  of  six  a  pair  of 
legs.  How  many  different  figures  can  be  made  by 
piecing  them  together  ? 

19. — Having  five  pairs  of  gloves,  in  how  many  ways 
can  a  person  select  a  right-hand  and  a  left-hand  glove 
which  are  not  pairs  ? 

20. — How  many  numbers  less  than  10,000  have  a 
five  in  their  arithmetical  expression,  and  how  many  of 
them  are  divisible  by  five  without  remainder  ? 

21. —  In  how  many  ways  can  a  school  of  ninety  boys 
divide  themselves,  so  that  twenty-four  play  football, 
twenty-two  play  cricket,  thirty  drill,  four  play  racquets, 
and  ten  take  a  walk  ? 


EXAMPLES.  65 

22. — From  five  apples,  six  pears,  and  three  oranges, 
in  how  many  ways  can  a  person  take  fruit  ? 

23. — A  man  has*  ten  shares  in  the  Great  Western 
Kailway  Company,  twelve  in  the  North  Western,  seven 
in  the  Great  Northern,  two  in  the  Great  Eastern,  five 
in  the  South  Western.  In  how  many  ways  can  he  sell 
shares  ? 

24.— How  many  different  signals  can  be  made  with 
a  set  of  ten  flags,  using  four  at  a  time,  (1)  on  a 
single  mast,  and  (2)  on  a  three-masted  ship  ? 


CHAPTEE  II. 

CHANCE. 

"There  is  very  little  chance  of  fine  weather." 
"Is  there  much  chance  of  his  recovery?" 
"There  is  no  chance  of  finding  it." 
"  There  is  a  great  probability  of  war." 
"This  is  a  more  probable  result  than  the  other." 
"That  is  more  likely  to  be  mine  than  yours." 
"There  is  less  chance  of  her  coming  than  of  his." 
—  These  are  expressions  in  common  use  amongst  us ; 
the  very  commonness  of  their   use  shows  that  people 
in    general    have    some    idea    of    chance,    and    some 
conception  of  different  degrees   of  probability  in   the 
occurrence  of  doubtful  events.     All  understand  what  is 
meant  by   much   chance  and  little  chance;    they  dis 
tinguish  events  as  very  probable,  probable,  improbable, 
or  very  improbable ;  but  no  attempt  is  made  in  common 
conversation  to  measure  with  any  accuracy  the  amount 
of  probability   attaching    to   any    given   event/|  If  a 
Doctor  is  asked  what   chance  there  is  of  a  patient's 
recovery,  he  may  answer  that  there  is  much  chance  or 
little  chance,  but  he  cannot  express  with  any  precision 
the  exact  magnitude  of  his  hope  or  of  his  fear.     Yet  his 


DEGREES   OF   CHANCE.  67 

expectation  of  the  event  has  a  certain  magnitude.  He 
has  a  greater  expectation  of  this  patient's  recovery  than 
he  has  of  the  recovery  of  another,  whose  symptoms  are 
more  aggravated,  and  less  expectation  than  in  another 
case  where  the  constitution  is  stronger.  His  expecta 
tion  has  a  definite  value,  and  if  he  were  a  sporting  man, 
he  would  be  prepared  to  offer  or  take  certain  definite 
odds  on  the  event.  But  in  common  language,  this 
definite  amount  of  expectation  or  probability  cannot  be 
precisely  expressed,  because  we  have  no  recognised 
standard  with  which  to  compare  it,  no  recognised 
amount  of  expectation  or  probability  by  which  to 
measure  it. 

In  fact,  in  describing  the  magnitude  of  any  expecta 
tion  which  we  entertain,  we  are  in  the  same  position 
as  if  we  had  to  describe  the  length  of  a  room,  or  the 
height  of  a  tower,  to  a  man  who  was  not  acquainted 
with  a  foot  or  a  yard,  or  any  of  our  standards  of 
length.  We  could  speak  of  the  room  as  very  long  or 
very  short,  we  could  speak  of  the  tower  as  very  high 
or  very  low,  but  without  some  standard  length  recog 
nised  alike  by  ourselves  and  those  whom  we  addressed, 
we  could  not  give  an  accurate  answer  to  either  of 
the  questions,  How  long  is  the  room  ?  or  How  high  is 
the  tower  ? 

So  when  we  are  asked  what  chance  we  think  there 
is  of  a  fine  afternoon,  we  may  say  that  there  is  much 
chance  or  little  chance,  or  we  may  even  go  further, 
and  establish  in  our  own  minds  a  scale  of  expressions, 


68  CHANCE. 

distinguishing  the  different  degrees  of  probability  in 
some  such  way  as  follows : — 

It  is  certain  not  to  rain. 

It  is  very  unlikely  to  rain. 

It  is  unlikely  to  rain. 

It  is  as  likely  to  rain  as  not. 

It  is  likely  to  rain. 

It  is  very  likely  to  rain. 

It  is  certain  to  rain. 

but  these  expressions  except  the  first,  fourth,  and  last, 
are  vague  and  indefinite,  nor  can  we  ever  be  sure  that 
those  with  whom  we  are  conversing  attach  exactly  the 
same  idea  to  each  expression  that  we  do. 

This  vagueness  is  of  little  consequence  in  common 
life,  because  in  most  cases  it  is  impossible  to  make  an 
accurate  estimate  of  a  chance,  and  the  expressions 
are,  perhaps,  as  accurate  as  the  estimates  themselves 
which  we  wish  to  express.  But  there  are  other  classes 
of  events  concerning  which  it  is  possible  to  form 
accurate  estimates  of  their  degree  of  probability  or 
likelihood  of  happening,  and  in  these  cases  it  is  well 
to  have  some  more  precise  method  of  expressing 
different  degrees,  than  is  afforded  by  the  common 
expressions  which  we  have  quoted. 

We  must  observe  at  the  outset,  that  we  use  the 
words  chance  and  probability  as  strictly  synonymous. 
In  common  language,  it  is  usual  to  prefer  the  former 
word  when  the  expectation  is  small,  and  the  latter 


CHANCE    IMPLIES   IGNORANCE.  69 

when  it  is  large.  Thus  we  generally  hear  of  "  little 
chance,"  or  of  "  great  probability,"  but  not  so  often  of 
"great  chance,"  or  "little  probability."  This  distinc 
tion,  however,  is  not  universal,  and  we  shall  entirely 
disregard  it,  using  the  two  words  chance  and  pro 
bability  in  the  same  sense. 


will  be  seen  that  probability  always  implies  some 
ignorance  on  the  part  of  the  person  entertaining  the 
expectation,  and  the  amount  of  probability  attaching 
to  any  event  will  depend  upon  the  degree  of  this 
ignorance.  With  omniscience,  degrees  of  probability 
are  incompatible;  for  omniscience  implies  certainty,  and 
certainty  precludes  doubt,  and  degrees  of  probability 
are  the  measures  of  doubt. 

Hence,  there  is  no  such  thing  as  the  absolute  pro 
bability  of  an  event,  all  probability  being  conditional  on 
our  ignorance,  and  varying  when  that  condition  varies. 
Thus  the  same  event  will  be  unequally  probable  td 
different  persons,  whose  knowledge  of  the  circum 
stances  relating  to  the  event  is  different.  And  to  the 
same  person,  the  expectation  of  any  event  will  be 
affected  by  any  accession  of  knowledge  concerning  the 
event. 

For  instance,  suppose  we  see  a  friend  set  out  with 
five  other  passengers  in  a  ship  whose  crew  number 
thirty  men  :  and  suppose  we  presently  hear  that  a 
man  fell  overboard  on  the  passage  and  was  lost.  So 
long  as  our  knowledge  is  confined  to  the  fact  that  one 


70  CHANCE. 

individual  only  has  been  lost  out  of  the  thirty- six  on 
board,  the  probability  that  it  is  our  friend  is  very 
small.  The  odds  against  it  would  be  said  to  be  thirty- 
five  to  one.  But  suppose  our  knowledge  is  augmented 
by  the  news  that  the  man  who  has  been  lost  is  a  pas 
senger  ;  though  we  still  feel  that  it  is  equally  likely  to 
be  any  of  the  other  five  passengers,  yet  our  appre 
hension  that  it  is  our  friend  becomes  much  greater 
than  it  was  before.  The  odds  against  it  are  now 
described  as  five  to  one.  Thus  the  probability  that 
our  friend  is  lost  is  seen  to  be  entirely  conditional  on 
the  respective  degrees  of  our  knowledge  and  ignorance ; 
and  so  soon  as  our  ignorance  vanishes  —  so  soon  as 
we  know  all  about  the  event,  and  become  as  far  as 
that  event  is  concerned  omniscient, — then  there  no 
longer  remains  a  question  of  probability ;  the  probability 
is  replaced  by  certainty. 

This  example  will  also  illustrate  the  meaning  of  the 
•ratio  of  probabilities.  Since  each  of  the  passengers 
was  equally  likely  to  have  been  lost,  it  was  evidently 
always  six  times  as  likely  that  the  man  lost  was  some 
passenger,  as  that  it  was  our  friend.  So  it  was  five 
times  as  likely  that  it  was  a  passenger,  but  not  our 
friend,  as  that  it  was  our  friend.  Therefore,  also,  the 
probability  that  it  was  a  passenger,  but  not  our  friend, 
was  to  the  probability  that  it  was  a  passenger  in  the 
ratio  of  5  to  6. 

Let  us  suppose  another  case.  A  number  of  articles 
are  placed  in  a  bag,  and  amongst  them  are  three  balls, 


RATIO    OF    PROBABILITIES.  71 

alike  in  all  respects,  except  that  two  of  them  are 
coloured  white  and  the  third  black :  all  the  other  articles 
we  will  suppose  to  be  coins,  or  anything  distinguishable 
without  difficulty  from  balls. 

We  present  this  bag  to  a  stranger,  and  we  give  him 
leave  to  put  in  his  hand  in  the  dark,  and  to  take  out 
any  one  article  he  likes.  But  before  he  does  this,  we 
may  consider  what  chance  there  is  of  his  taking  out  a 
ball,  or  what  chance  there  is  of  his  taking  out  the  black 
ball.  Obviously  we  cannot  form  any  accurate  estimate 
of  this  chance,  because  it  must  depend- upon  the  wants 
or  the  taste  of  the  stranger  influencing  his  will,  whether 
he  will  prefer  to  take  a  ball  or  a  coin,  and  being  igno 
rant  of  his  will  in  the  matter,  we  cannot  say  whether  it 
is  likely  or  unlikely  that  he  will  select  a  ball. 

But  it  is  axiomatic,  that  if  he  draws  a  ball  at  all,  it 
is  twice  as  likely  to  be  a  white  ball  as  to  be  a  black  one, 
or  the  respective  chances  of  his  drawing  white  or  black 
are  in  the  ratio  of  2  to  1,  and  these  chances  are  respec 
tively  two-thirds  and  one-third  of  the  chance  that  he 
draws  a  ball  at  all. 

We  now  proceed  to  show  how  the  magnitude  of  a 
chance  may  be  definitely  expressed.  We  have  already 
pointed  out  that  the  expressions  used  in  common 
language  are  wanting  in  definiteness  and  precision, 
and  we  compared  the  expedients  by  which  degrees  of 
probability  are  usually  indicated  to  the  attempts  which 
we  should  make  to  give  an  idea  of  the  length  of  a  room 


72  CHANCE. 

to  a  person  unacquainted  with  the  measures  of  a  foot 
and  a  yard. 

Now  we  observe,  that  the  difficulty  in  this  latter  case 
ceases,  so  soon  as  the  person  with  whom  we  are 
speaking  agrees  with  us  in  his  conception  of  any 
definite  length  whatever.  If  he  can  once  recognise 
what  we  mean  by  the  length  of  a  hand,  for  instance, 
we  can  express  to  him  with  perfect  accuracy  the  length 
of  the  room  as  so  many  hands;  or,  if  he  have  an 
idea  of  what  a  mile  is,  we  can  precisely  express  the 
length  of  the  room  as  some  certain  fraction  of  a  mile. 
So,  also,  as  soon  as  we  have  fixed  upon  any  standard 
amount  of  probability  that  can  be  recognised  and 
appreciated  by  all  with  whom  we  have  to  do,  we  shall 
be  able  to  express  any  other  amount  of  probability 
numerically  by  reference  to  that  standard.  The 
numbers  2,  3  would  express  probabilities  twice  or 
three  times  as  great  as  the  standard  probability;  and 
the  fractions  |-,  J,  §  would  express  probabilities  half, 
one-third,  or  two-thirds  of  the  standard. 

Now,  it  matters  not  how  great  or  how  small  the 
standard  be,  provided  it  be  a  probability  which  all 
can  recognise,  and  which  all  will  alike  appreciate. 
This  is,  indeed,  the  one  essential  which  it  has  to  fulfil; 
it  must  be  such  that  all  persons  will  make  the  same 
estimate  of  it.  And  that  which  best  satisfies  this 
condition,  and,  therefore,  the  most  convenient  standard 
with  which  to  compare  other  probabilities,  is  that 


CERTAINTY   A    MEASURE    OF    PROBABILITY.  73 

supreme  amount  of  probability  which  attaches  to  an 
event  which  we  know  to  be  certain  to  happen.  All 
understand  what  certainty  is :  it  is  a  standard  which 
all  estimate  alike.  Certainty,  therefore,  shall  be  our 
unit  of  probability;  and  other  degrees  of  probability 
shall  be  expressed  as  fractions  of  certainty. 

But  it  may  be  asked,  Is  certainty  a  degree  of 
probability  at  all,  or  can  smaller  degrees  of  probability 
be  said  to  have  any  ratio  to  certainty?  Yes.  For 
if  we  refer  to  the  instance  already  cited  of  the  six 
passengers  in  the  ship,  we  observe  that  the  chance 
of  the  lost  man  being  a  passenger  is  six  times  as 
great  as  the  chance  of  his  being  our  friend.  This 
is  the  case  however  great  our  ignorance  of  the  cir 
cumstances  of  the  event;  and  it  will  evidently  remain 
true  until  we  attain  to  some  knowledge  which  affects 
our  friend  differently  from  his  fellow-passengers.  But 
the  news  that  the  lost  man  was  a  passenger  does  not 
affect  one  passenger  more  than  another.  Therefore, 
after  receiving  this  news,  it  will  still  hold  good  that  the 
chance  of  the  lost  man  being  a  passenger  is  six  times 
as  great  as  the  chance  of  its  being  our 'friend.  But 
it  is  now  certain  that  the  lost  man  was  a  passenger; 
therefore  the  probability  that  it  was  our  friend  is  one- 
sixth  of  certainty.  Again  in  the  instance  of  the  balls 
and  coins  in  the  bag,  we  have  already  noticed  that  the 
chances  of  drawing  white  or  black  are  respectively  two- 
thirds  and  one-third  of  the  chance  of  drawing  a  ball 
at  all.  And  this  is  the  case  whatever  this  last  chance 


74  CHANCE. 

may  be.  But  suppose  the  man  tells  us  that  he  is 
drawing  a  ball,  not  a  coin,  then  this  last  chance 
becomes  certainty ;  and  therefore  the  chances  of  draw 
ing  white  or  black,  become  respectively  two-thirds  and 
one -third  of  certainty.  Thus  it  is  seen  that  certainty, 
while  it  is  the  supreme  degree,  is  some  degree  of 
probability,  or  is  such  that  another  degree  of  probability 
can  be  compared  to  it  and  expressed  as  a  fraction  of  it. 

Of  course,  when  we  use  unity  to  express  certainty, 
the  probability  of  the  lost  passenger  being  our  friend 
will  be  expressed  by  the  fraction  -g ,  and  the  chances  of 
the  ball  drawn  being  white  or  black,  will  be  expressed 
by  the  fractions  ^  and  -3 . 

After  the  explanations  which  we  have  already  given, 
the  reader  will  have  no  difficulty  in  accepting  the 
following  axiom. 

AXIOM. 

If  an  event  can  happen  in  a  number  of  different 
ways  (of  which  only  one  can  occur  J,  the  probability  of 
its  happening  at  all  is  the  sum  of  the  several  proba 
bilities  of  its  happening  in  the  several  ways. 

For  instance,  let  the  event  be  the  falling  of  a  coin. 
It  can  fall  either  head  or  tail,  and  only  one  of  these 
ways  can  occur.  The  probability  that  it  falls  at  all 
must  be  made  up  by  addition  of  the  probability  that  it 
falls  head  and  the  probability  that  it  falls  tail. 


ADDITION   OF   PROBABILITIES.  75 

Again,  let  the  event  be  that  either  A,  B,  or  C  should 
win  a  race  in  which  there  are  any  number  of  com 
petitors.  The  event  can  happen  in  three  ways,  viz.,  by 
A  winning,  by  B  winning,  or  by  C  winning  ;  and  only 
one  of  these  ways  can  occur.  The  probability  that  one 
of  the  three  should  win  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  pro 
babilities  that  A  should  win,  that  B  should  win,  and 
that  C  should  win. 

This  is  only  saying  that  if  a  man  would  give  £2  for 
A's  chance  of  the  prize,  £3  for  B's  chance,  and  £4  for 
C's  chance,  he  would  give  £2  +  £3  +  £4,  or  £9  for 
the  promise  that  he  should  have  the  prize  if  any  one  of 
the  three  should  win. 

.  1 

Again,  if  -^  be  the  chance  of  a  shot  aimed  at  a 
target  hitting  the  bull's  eye,  |  the  chance  of  its  hitting 
the  first  ring,  and  ^  the  chance  of  its  hitting  the 
outer  ring,  the  chance  that  it  hits  one  of  these,  i.  e,  the 
chance  of  its  hitting  the  target  at  all,  is  -JQ-  +  g  +  4, 

31 


RULE   I. 

The  probability  of  an  event  not  happening  is  obtained 
by  Subtracting  from  unity  the  probability  that  it  will 
happen. 

For  it  is  certain  that  it  will  either  happen  or  not 
happen,  or  the  probability  that  it  will  either  happen  or 


76  CHANCE. 

not  happen  is  unity;  and  only  one  of  these  two  (the 
happening  and  the  not  happening)  can  occur.  There 
fore,  by  the  axiom,  unity  is  the  sum  of  the  probabilities 
of  the  event  happening  and  not  happening ;  or  the 
probability  of  its  not  happening  is  obtained  by  sub 
tracting  from  unity  the  probability  of  its  happening. 

EXAMPLES.  —  If  the  chance  of  an  event  happening 

2  23 

is  1= ,  the  chance  of  its  not  happening  is  1  —  -g ,  or  g . 

ri 

If  the  chance  of  a  plan  succeeding  is  -^,  the  chance 
of  its  failing  is  1  —  -^-,  or  -^-. 

q-l 

If  the  chance  of  a  shot  hitting  a  target  be  ~6^-,  the 

9Q 

chance  of  its  missing  is  -^. 

If  the  chance  of  A  winning  a  race  be  g,  and  the 
chance  of  B  winning  it  -g,  the  chance  that  neither 
should  win  is  ^T.  For,  by  the  axiom,  the  chance  that 
one  of  them  should  win  is  g  +  -g ,  or  -^ ;  and  therefore, 

by  Rule  I.,,  the  chance  that  this  should  not  happen  is 

i      JL        17 

i  —  24 ,  or  24 . 

DEFINITION  I.  —  Two  probabilities  which  together 
make  up  unity,  are  called  complementary  probabilities. 

DEFINITION  II. — When  it  is  said  that  the  odds  are 
three  to  two  against  an  event,  it  is  meant  that  the 


RELATION  OF  CHANCE  AND  ODDS.          77 

chance  of  the  event  failing  is  to  the  chance  of  its  hap 
pening  as  three  to  two ;  and  when  it  is  said  that  the 
odds  are  three  to  two  in  favour  of  an  event,  it  is  meant 
that  the  chance  of  its  happening  is  to  the  chance  of  its 
failing  as  three  to  two ;  and  so  for  any  other  numbers. 


RULE  II. 

If  the  odds  be  three  to  two  against  an  event,  the 
chance  of  the  event  not  happening  is 

_8_ 

3  +  2' 
and  the  chance  of  its  happening  is 

2      . 
3  +  2' 

and  so  for  any  other  numbers ;  the  numerators  of  the 
two  fractions  being  the  two  given  numbers,  and  their 
common  denominator  the  sum  of  the  numbers. 

For  the  two  fractions  satisfy  the  condition  required 
by  Rule  I.,  viz.,  that  their  sum  should  be  unity,  and 
that  required  by  the  definition,  viz.,  that  their  ratio 
should  be  the  same  as  the  ratio  expressing  the  given 
odds.  Similarly, — 

If  the  odds  be  three  to  two  in  favour  of  an  event, 
the  chance  of  the  event  happening  is 

3 

8  +~2' 


78  CHANCE. 

and  the  chance  of  its  not  happening  is 

2 

3  +  2' 

and  so  for  any  other  numbers ;  the  numerators  of  the 
two  fractions  being  the  two  given  numbers,  and  their 
common  denominator  the  sum  of  the  numbers. 

EXAMPLES. — If  the  odds  be  ten  to  one  against  an 
event,  the  chance  of  its  happening  is  -jj,  and  the 
chance  of  its  failing  is  ^-. 

If  the  odds  be  five  to  two  in  favour  of  the  success 

5 

7> 


of   an   experiment,  the   probability  of    success   is   -= 


and  the  probability  of  failure  is  |. 


RULE  III. 

If  an  event  can  happen  in  jive  ways,  and  fail  in  seven 
ways,  and  if  these  twelve  ways  are  all  equally  probable, 
and  only  one  of  them  can  occur,  the  odds  against  the 
event  are  seven  to  five,  and  the  chances  of  its  happening 
and  failing  are  respectively 

5  7 


and  similarly  for  any  other  numbers. 

For  since  the  event  must  either  happen  or  fail,  one 
of  the  twelve  ways  must  occur  ;  therefore  the  sum  of 


FUNDAMENTAL   KULE.  79 

their  several  probabilities  is  unity.  But  all  the  twelve 
ways  are  equally  probable.  Therefore  the  chance  of  the 
occurrence  of  any  particular  one  is  -j^-,  and  the  chance 
of  the  occurrence  of  one  of  the  five  which  cause  the 
event  to  happen  is  five  times  this,  or  -^.  So  the 
chance  of  the  occurrence  of  one  of  the  seven  which 

17 

cause  the  event  to  fail  is  -^  • 

Suppose,  for  example,  that  a  die  has  twelve  faces,  of 
which  five  are  coloured  white  and  seven  black.  A 
person  throws  the  die,  and  is  to  receive  a  prize  if  it 
fall  white. 

The  odds  are  seven  to  five  against  his  winning  the 
prize.  The  chance  that  he  wins  is  -^ ,  and  the  chance 

17 

that  he  loses  is  jg. 

For  all  the  twelve  faces  are  equally  likely  to  turn  up, 
and  one  must  turn  up.  Therefore  the  chance  of  any 
particular  face  turning  up  is  -jg,  and  the  chance  of  a 
white  face  turning  up  is  five  times  this,  or  -^ . 

Or  we  might  put  it  thus :  —  Since  there  are  five  white 
and  seven  black  faces,  it  is  axiomatic  that  the  chance  of 
a  white  face  is  to  the  chance  of  a  black  face  as  five  to 
seven.  Now  as  soon  as  it  is  certain  that  the  die  is  to 
be  thrown,  it  is  certain  that  either  a  white  or  a  black 
face  must  turn  up.  The  two  chances  must  therefore 


80  CHANCE. 

now  make  up  unity.     But  they  still  retain  the  ratio  of 
five  to  seven,  therefore  they  become  respectively 
5  7 

777  and  IT?' 

And  in  the  same  way  we  might  reason  if  the  numbers 
were  any  other. 

Question.  —  A  party  of  twenty-three  persons  take 
their  seats  at  a  round  table ;  shew  that  the  odds  are  ten 
to  one  against  two  specified  persons  sitting  together. 

Answer.  —  Call  the  two  specified  persons  A  and  B. 
Then  besides  A's  place  (wherever  it  may  be)  there 
are  twenty- two  places,  of  which  two  are  adjacent  to 
J.'s  place  and  the  other  twenty  not  adjacent.  And  B 
is  equally  likely  to  be  in  any  of  these  twenty-two 
places.  Therefore  (Kule  III.),  the  odds  are  twenty  to 
two,  or  ten  to  one,  against  his  taking  a  place  next  to  A. 

The  last  rule  may  be  expressed  in  a  somewhat 
different  form  as  follows  : — 


RULE  IV. 

If  there  be  a  number  of  events  of  which  one  must 
happen  and  all  are  equally  likely,  and  if  any  one  of 
a  ( 'smaller )  number  of  these  events  will  produce  a 
certain  result  which  cannot  otherwise  happen,  the 
probability  of  this  result  is  expressed  by  the  ratio  of 
of  this  smaller  number  to  the  whole  number  of  events. 


FUNDAMENTAL   RULE.  81 

For  instance ;  if  a  man  has  purchased  five  tickets  in 
a  lottery,  in  which  there  are  twelve  tickets  altogether 
and  only  one  prize,  his  chance  of  the  prize  would  he 
expressed  by  the  ratio  5  :  12,  or  by  the  fraction >T62-. 

For  convenience  of  reference  we  have  given  distinct 
numbers  to  the  two  Rules  III.  and  IV.,  although  they 
are  only  different  statements  of  one  and  the  same 
principle.  This  will  be  immediately  seen,  by  con 
sidering  the  case  of  the  lottery  just  instanced.  We 
might  at  once  have  said  that  there  were  twelve  ways 
of  drawing  a  ticket,  and  five  of  these  would  cause  the 
man  to  win,  while  the  other  seven  would  cause  him  to 
lose.  Rule  III.  is  therefore  immediately  applicable. 

Question. — The  four  letters  a,  e,  m,  n  are  placed  in  a 
row  at  random  :  what  is  the  chance  of  their  standing  in 
such  order  as  to  form  an  English  word  ? 

Answer.  —  The  four  letters  can  stand  in  |4  or 
twenty-four  different  orders  (Choice,  Rule  III.) :  all  are 
equally  likely  and  one  must  occur.  And  four  of  these 
will  produce  an  English  word  — 

mane,  mean,  name,  amen. 
Hence  by  the  rule,  the  required  chance  is  -^  or  -6  . 

Question. — What  is  the  chance  of  a  year,  which  is 
not  leap  year,  having  fifty-three  Sundays  ? 

Answer. —  Such  a  year  consists  of  fifty-two  complete 
weeks,  and  one  day  over.  This  odd  day  may  be  any  of 

G 


82  CHANCE. 

the  seven  days  of  the  week,  and  there  is  nothing  to 
render  one  more  likely  than  another.  Only  one  of 
them  will  produce  the  result  that  the  year  should 
have  fifty -three  Sundays.  Hence  (Kule  IV.),  the 
chance  of  the  year  having  fifty-three  Sundays  is  ^ . 

Question.  —  What  is  the  chance  that  a  leap  year, 
selected  at  random,  will  contain  fifty-three  Sundays? 
Ausiver. —  Such  a  year  consists  of  fifty-two  complete 
weeks,  and  two  days  over.  These  two  days  may  be 

Sunday  and  Monday, 

Monday  and  Tuesday, 

Tuesday  and  Wednesday, 

Wednesday  and  Thursday, 

Thursday  and  Friday, 

Friday  and  Saturday, 

Saturday  and  Sunday, 

and  all  these  seven  are  equally  likely.  Two  of  them 
(the  first  and  last)  will  produce  the  required  result. 
Hence  (Rule  IV.)  the  chance  is  7. 

Question.  —  What  is  the  chance  that  a  year  which  is 
known  not  to  be  the  last  year  in  a  century  should  be 
leap  year? 

Answer.  —  The  year  may  be  any  of  the  remaining 
ninety-nine  of  any  century,  and  all  these  are  equally 
likely ;  but  twenty-four  of  them  are  leap  years.  There 
fore  (Rule  III.)  the  chance  that  the  year  in  question  is 

,  .       24  8 

a  leap  year  is         or  ^3-  . 


EXAMPLES    OF    RULE    IV.  83 

Question.  —  Three  balls  are  to  be  drawn  from  an  urn 
which  contains  five  black,  three  red,  and  two  white 
balls.  What  is  the  chance  of  drawing  two  black  balls 
and  one  red? 

Ansiver. —  Since  there  are  ten  balls  altogether,  three 

balls  can  be  drawn  in   T~Z~,  or  120  different  ways, 
1.2.3 

all  equally  likely.     Now,  two  black  balls  can  be  selected 

in  -— ,  or  ten  ways,  and  one  red  in  three  ways,    Hence, 
1.2 

two  black  balls  and  one  red  can  be  drawn  in  10  x  3, 
or  30  different  ways.  Thus  we  have  120  different 
ways  of  drawing  three  balls,  whereof  30  ways  will 
give  two  black  and  one  red.  Hence,  when  three  balls 
are  drawn  the  chance  that  they  should  be  two  black  and 
one  red  is  (by  Kule  IV.) 

30         1 
120  °r  ? 

Question. — If  from  a  lottery  of  thirty  tickets,  marked 
1,  2,  3,  &c.,  four  tickets  be  drawn,  what  is  the  chance 
that  those  marked  1  and  2  are  among  them  ? 

Ansiver. —  Four  tickets  can  be  drawn  out  of  thirty 

30.29.28.27 

m —  ways.      Four  tickets  can  be  drawn,  so 

1.2.3.4 

28  27 
as  to  include  those  marked  1  and  2,  in  — '- —  ways. 


84  CHANCE. 

Hence,  when  four  are  drawn,  the  chance  that  these  two 
are  included  is 

28.27         30.29.28.27          3.4         _2_ 
1.2  1.2.3.4        ~  29.30  ~  145* 

The  odds  are,  therefore,  143  to  2  against  the  event. 

Question. — A  has  three  shares  in  a  lottery  where 
there  are  three  prizes  and  six  blanks.  B  has  one 
share  in  another,  where  there  is  but  one  prize  and  two 
blanks.  Shew  that  A  has  a  better  chance  of  winning 
a  prize  than  B,  in  the  ratio  of  16  to  7. 

Answer. — A  will  get  a  prize  unless  his  three  tickets 
all  prove  blank.  Now,  three  tickets  can  be  selected 

9.8.7 
in  ,  or  84  ways;  and  they  can  be  selected  so  as 

A..ZI.O 

£%.    K    A 

to   be   all   blank  in    r1-^,   or   20  ways.     Hence  the 
1.2.3 

20         5 

chance  that  they  should  be  all  blank  is  —  or  — ;  and, 

84        21 

therefore,  the  chance  that  this  should  not  be  so,  or 

5          16 

that  A  gets  at  least  one  prize,  is  1  -  —  ,  or  — .    But 

21          21 

it  is  evident  that  the  chance  that  B  gets  a  prize  is 

1        7 
(Rule  IV.)  ~-  or  — .     Therefore,  A  has  a  better  chance 

O  21 

than  B  in  the  ratio  of  16  to  7. 

Question.  —  If  four  cards  be  drawn  from  a  pack, 
what  is  the  chance  that  there  will  be  one  of  each  suit  ? 


EXAMPLES.  85 

-   Answer.  —  Four  cards  can  be  selected  from  the  pack 

52  51  50  49 

in  —  •'  -  or  270725  ways  (Choice,  Rule  IX.);  but 

1.2.3.4 

four  cards  can  be  selected  so  as  to  be  one  of  each  suit 
in  only  13  x  13  x  13  x  13  or  28561  ways  (Choice, 
Rule  II.).  Hence  the  chance  is 

28561  1 


270726 

Question.  —  If  four  cards  be  drawn  from  a  pack, 
what  is  the  chance  that  they  will  be  marked  one,  two, 
three,  four? 

Answer.  —  There  are  4x4x4x4,  or  256  ways 
of  drawing  four  cards  thus  marked,  and  270725  ways 
of  drawing  four  cards  altogether.  Hence,  the  chance  is 

256 
270725' 

or  the  odds  are  more  than  1000  to  1  against  it. 

Question.  —  In  a  bag  there  are  five  white  and  four 
black  balls.  If  they  are  drawn  out  one  by  one,  what 
is  the  chance  that  the  first  will  be  white,  the  second 
black,  and  so  on  alternately? 

Answer.  —  There  are  nine  balls,  five  of  one  sort,  four 
of  another  :  they  can,  therefore,  be  arranged  in 


iff " "" 


different   orders   (Choice,   Rule  VII.).     The  balls  are 


86  CHANCE. 

equally  likely  to  be  drawn  in  any  of  these  orders  ;> 
therefore,  the  chance  that  they  should  be  drawn  in 
the  particular  order,  white  —  black —  white  —  c£c.,  is  r~~m 
That  this  order  of  colour  corresponds  to  only  one  of 
the  126  arrangements  is  a  direct  consequence  of  our 
having  disregarded  all  individuality  among  balls  of  the 
same  colour  when  we  calculated  that  number.  (See 
Choice,  page  33.). 

Question. — In  a  bag  are  five  red  balls,  seven  white 
balls,  four  green  balls,  and  three  black  balls.  If  they 
be  drawn  one  by  one,  what  is  the  chance  that  all  the 
red  balls  should  be  drawn  first,  then  all  the  white  ones, 
then  all  the  green  ones,  and  then  all  the  black  ones  ? 

Answer, — The  nineteen  balls  can  be  arranged  in 
119 


different  orders  (Choice,  Rule  VII.)  •  All  these  are 
equally  likely,  and  therefore  the  chance  of  any  par 
ticular  order  is 


This  will  be  the  chance  required,  for  all  individuality 
among  balls  of  the  same  colour  has  been  disregarded  ; 
only  one  of  the  different  arrangements  will  give  the 
order  of  colours  prescribed  in  the  question. 

Question.  —  Out  of  a  bag  containing  12  balls,  5  are 
drawn  and  replaced,  and  afterwards  6  are  drawn.    Find 


THROWS    WITH    TWO    COMMON    DICE.  87 

the  chance  that  exactly  3  balls  were  common  to  the 
two  drawings. 

Answer.  —  The  second  drawing  could  be  made  alto 
gether  in 

112 

!6>OT924 

ways.     But  it  could  be  made  so  as  to  include  exactly 
3  of  the  balls  contained  in  the  first  drawing,  in 

|5  J7 


or  350 


|3.|2 

ways ;  for  it  must  consist  of  a  selection  of  3  balls  out 
of  the  first  5,  and  a  selection  of  3  balls  out  of  the 
remaining  7  (Choice,  Rules  VIII.  and  II.).  Hence,  the 
chance  that  the  second  drawing  should  contain  exactly 

350  25 

3  balls  common  to  the  first,  is  -^  or  -^. 

As  the  respective  probabilities  of  various  throws, 
with  two  common  dice,  are  of  practical  interest,  in  their 
bearing  upon  such  games  as  Backgammon,  it  may  be 
well  to  discuss  this  case  with  some  completeness. 

It  will  be  observed  that  as  each  die  can  fall  in  six 
ways,  the  whole  number  of  ways  in  which  the  two  dice 
can  fall  is  6  x  6  or  36.  But  these  36  different  ways 
are  not  practically  different  throws,  since,  for  example, 
it  makes  no  difference  in  practice  whether  the  first  die 
falls  six  and  the  second  five,  or  the  first  five  and  the 
second  BIX.  The  number  of  practically  different  throws 


88  CHANCE. 

is,  in  fact,  only  21,  the  36  different  ways  of  the  dice 
falling  being  made  up  of  six  unique  ways  — 

landl,     2  and  2,     3  and  3,     4  and  4,     5  and  5,     6  and  6, 

and  30  other  ways,  consisting  of  15  essentially  different 
throws,  each  repeated  twice  :  thus — 

1  and  2,       1  and  3,       1  and  4,       1  and  5,       1  and  6, 

2  and  1,       3  and  1,       4  and  1,       5  and  1,       6  and  1, 

2  and  3,       2  and  4,       2  and  5,       2  and  6, 

3  and  2,      4  and  2,       5  and  2,       6  and  2, 

3  and  4,       3  and  5,       3  and  6, 

4  and  3,       5  and  3,       6  and  3, 

4  and  5,       4  and  6, 

5  and  4,       6  and  4, 

5  and  6. 

6  and  5. 

Since  each  die  is  equally  likely  to  fall  in  all  different 
ways,  the  36  different  ways  of  the  two  dice  falling  are 
all  equally  likely;  and,  therefore,  when  the  dice  are 
thrown  the  probability  of  any  particular  way  is  -^> 
But  it  cannot  be  said  that  all  throws  are  equally  pro 
bable,  because  six-Jive  results  practically  in  two  ways 
out  of  the  36  ways  of  the  dice  falling,  whereas 
six-six  results  in  only  one  way.  The  correct  state 
ment  is,  that  the  probability  of  any  assigned  throw 


TWO    COMMON    DICE.  89 

is  g6  if  that  assigned  throw  be  doublets;  but  it  is  twice 
as  much  or  -^  if  the  assigned  throw  be  not  doublets. 
Thus  the  chance  of  throwing  six-three  is  ^,  but  the 
chance  of  throwing  three-three  is  -^r. 

Question.  —  When  two  dice  are  thrown,  what  is  the 
chance  that  the  throw  will  be  greater  than  8  ? 

Ansiver. —  Out  of  the  36  ways  in  which  the  dice  can 
fall,  there  are  six  which  give  a  result  greater  than  8, 

viz. :  — 

5  and  4,         5  and  6,         5  and  5,      A 

4  and  5,         6  and  5,         6  and  6. 
Hence  the  required  chance  is-g^~or  ~6. 

Question. — What  is  the  chance  of  throwing  at  least 
one  ace  ? 

Answer.  —  Of  the  thirty-six  ways  in  which  the  dice 
can  fall,  eleven  give  an  ace.  Hence,  the  chance  is  ^Q. 

Question. — What  is  the  chance  of  making  a  throw 
which  shall  contain  neither  an  ace  nor  a  six? 

Answer.  —  Of  the  thirty- six  ways,  there  are  sixteen 
which  involve  neither  one  nor  six.  Hence,  the  chance 

.      16  4 

IS       -gg          01'  g. 

This  question,  as  well  as  the  preceding  one,  may  be 
more  conveniently  solved  by  Rule  VI. 

Question.  —  What  are  the  odds  against  throwing 
doublets  ? 


90  CHANCE. 

Answer. —  Of  the  thirty-six  ways  in  which  the  dice 
can  fall,  six  give  doublets.  Therefore,  the  chance  for 
doublets  is  -^  or  g,  and  the  chance  against  doublets 
Q  (Kule  III.).  Therefore,  the  odds  are  five  to  one 
against  doublets. 

Or  we  might  reason  thus: — However  the  first  die 
fall,  the  second  die  can  fall  in  six  ways,  of  which  only 
one  way  will  give  the  same  number  as  on  the  first  die. 
Hence,  the  odds  are  five  to  one  against  the  second  die 
falling  the  same  way  as  the  first,  or  the  odds  are  five  to 
one  against  doublets. 

Question. — In  one  throw  with  a  pair  of  dice,  what 
is  the  chance  that  there  is  neither  an  ace  nor  doublets  ? 
Answer. — The  dice  can  fall  in  thirty-six  ways,  but  in 
order  that  there  may  be  neither  an  ace  nor  doublets,  the 
first  die  must  fall  in  one  of  five  ways  (viz.  2,  3,  4,  5,  6), 
and  the  second,  since  it  may  be  neither  an  ace  nor  the 
same  as  the  first,  may  fall  in  four  ways.  Hence,  the 
number  of  ways  which  will  produce  the  required  result, 

is  5  x  4  or  20.     And,    therefore,  the  chance   of  this 

,,  .     20        5 
result  is  ijg-  or  ^. 

Question. — What  is  the  chance  of  throwing  exactly 
eleven  ? 

Answer.  —  Out  of  the  thirty-six  ways,  there  are  two 

ways    which    produce    eleven ;    therefore,    the    chance 
.     2         i 

18         0r' 


TWO    COMMON   DICE.  91 

On  the  principle  of  the  last  answer,  the  reader  will 
have  no  difficulty  in  verifying  the  following  statements  : 

In  a  single  throw  with  two  dice,  the  odds  are  — 

35  to  1  against   throwing    2, 

17  to  1  „  „  3, 

11  to  1  „  „  4, 

8  to  1  „'  „  5, 

6i-  to  1  „  „  6, 

5  to  1  „  „  7, 

6i  to  1  „  „  8, 

8  to  1  „  „  9, 

11  to  1  „  „  10, 

17  to  1  „  „  11, 

35  to  1  „  „  12. 

Thus  the  most  frequent  throw  will  be  seven. 

In  some  cases  the  purpose  of  a  throw  is  equally 
answered,  whether  an  assigned  number  appear  on  one 
of  the  dice,  or  whether  it  be  the  numbers  of  the  two 
dice  together  make  it.  Let  us  consider,  for  example, 
the  chance  of  throwing  five  in  this  way. 

The  chance  of  making  a  throw  so  that  one  die  shall 
turn  up  Jive  is  -^,  and  the  chance  of  making  a  throw 
which  shall  amount  to  Jive  is  -^r.  Therefore  the  chance 
of  throwing  five  in  one  of  these  ways  is  -^  +  -gg-  or  -gg. 

On  this  principle  the  following  statements  may  be 
easily  verified. 


92  CHANCE. 

In  a  single  throw  with  two  dice,  ivhen  the  player 
is  at  liberty  to  count  either  the  sum  of  the  numbers 
on  the  tivo  dice,  or  the  number  on  either  die  alone, 
the  odds  are — 

25  to  11,                        against  throwing  1, 

24  to  12,  or     2  to  1  „  „  2, 

23  to  13,  „  „  3, 

22  to  14,  or  11  to  7  „  „  4, 

21  to  15,  or     7  to  5  „  „  5, 

20  to  16,  or     5  to  4  „  „  6, 

5  to  1  „  „  7, 

61  to  1  „  „  8, 

8  to  1  „  „  9, 

11  to  1  „  „  10, 

17  to  1  „  „  11, 

35  to  1  „  „  12. 

Thus  the  number  which  there  is  the  greatest  chance 
of  making  is  six. 

DEFINITION. — If  a  person  is  to  receive  a  prize  on 
condition  of  some  event  happening,  the  sum  of  money 
for  which  his  chance  might  equitably  be  sold  before 
hand  is  called  his  expectation  from  the  event. 

RULE  V. 

The  expectation  from  any  event  is  obtained  by 
multiplying  the  sum  to  be  realised  on  the  event  hap 
pening,  by  the  chance  that  the  event  ivill  happen. 


EXPECTATION.  93 

This  rule  may  be  illustrated  as  follows:  Suppose  a 
person  holds  five  tickets  in  a  lottery,  where  the  whole 
numher  of  tickets  is  twelve ;  and  suppose  there  be  only 
one  prize,  and  let  its  value  be  one  shilling. 

The  person  in  question  gains  the  prize,  if  it  happen 
that  one  of  his  tickets  be  drawn.  The  chance  of  this 
event  is  -^ ;  therefore,  according  to  the  rule,  the  per 
son's  expectation  is  -^  of  a  shilling,  or  five-pence.  And 
the  correctness  of  this  result  may  be  immediately  seen ; 
for  we  observe,  that  if  the  person  had  bought  all  the 
twelve  tickets  he  would  have  been  certain  of  winning 
a  shilling,  and,  therefore,  he  might,  equitably,  have 
given  a  shilling  for  the  twelve  tickets ;  but  all  the 
tickets  are  of  equal  value,  and  are  equally  valuable 
whether  the  same  man  hold  one  or  more.  Hence,  each 
of  them  is  worth  a  penny,  and,  therefore,  the  five  in 
question  are  worth  five-pence  (as  long  as  it  is  unknown 
which  is  drawn).  Five-pence,  therefore,  is  the  sum 
that  might  equitably  have  been  given  for  the  assigned 
person's  chance,  and,  therefore,  by  the  definition  this 
is  his  expectation. 

Question. — A  bag  contains  a  £5  note,  a  ^610  note, 
and  six  pieces  of  blank  paper.  What  is  the  expectation 
of  a  man  who  is  allowed  to  draw  out  one  piece  of 
paper  ? 


94  CHANCE. 

Answer.  —  Since  there  are  eight  pieces  of  paper  the 
probability  of  his  drawing  the  £5  note  is  g ;  therefore, 
his  expectation  from  the  chance  of  drawing  this  note 
is  g-  of  £5}  or  ^  of  a  pound.  Similarly,  his  ex 
pectation  from  the  chance  of  drawing  the  ^610  note 
is  g  of  <£10,  or  ^  of  a  pound.  Therefore,  his  whole 
expectation  is  g-  of  a  pound,  or  £1  17s.  6d. 

Question. — What  is  the  expectation  of  drawing  a 
coin  from  a  bag  which  contains  one  sovereign  and  seven 
shillings  ? 

Anstver.  —  The  expectation  from  the  chance  of 
drawing  the  sovereign  is  g  of  a  sovereign,  and  the 
expectation  from  the  chance  of  drawing  a  shilling  is  g 
of  a  shilling.  Hence,  the  whole  expectation  is  3s.  4Jd. 

Question. — A  person  is  allowed  to  draw  two  coins 
from  a  purse  containing  four  sovereigns  and  four 
shillings.  What  is  the  value  of  his  expectation  ? 

n  rj 

Ansiver.  —  Two   coins   can  be   drawn   in  ~-  or  28 

1.2 

ways :  of  these  ---  or  6  ways  will  give  two  sovereigns, 
1.2 

4  x  4  or  16  ways  will  give  a  sovereign  and  a  shilling, 
and  the  other  6  ways  will  give  two  shillings. 


CONCURRENT    EVENTS,  95 

Therefore— 

f\ 

Chance  of  drawing  40  shillings  =  gg-, 
Chance  of  drawing  21  shillings  =  ||-, 

Chance  of  drawing  2  shillings  =  -^. 

Therefore  the  expectation   is — 

6  60 

from    the    first    chance,    —  x  40,  or  —  shillings ; 

28  i 

"i  £? 

from  the  second  chance,  —  x  21,  or  12  shillings ; 

28 

fi  o 

from   the   third   chance,    —  x  2,  or  -  shillings. 

2o  i 

nr\  o 

Hence  the  whole   expectation  is  —  +  12  +  -,  or  21 
shillings ;  or  one-fourth  of  the  whole  sum  in  the  hag. 

This  result  might  have  been  inferred  at  once  from 
the  consideration  that,  if  all  the  eight  coins  had  heen 
drawn  two  and  two,  no  drawing  could  be  more  likely  to 
exceed  in  sovereigns  than  in  shillings  :  (the  number  of 
sovereigns  and  shillings  being  the  same).  Hence  the 
expectation  from  each  of  the  four  drawings  must  be  the 
same ;  and  therefore  each  must  be  one  fourth  of  the 
whole  sum  to  be  drawn. 


EULE    VI. 

The  chance  of  two  independent  events  both  hap 
pening,  is  the  product  of  the  chances  of  their  happening 
severally. 


90  CHANCE. 

That  is,  if  the  chance  of  one  event  happening  be  6> 
and  the  chance  of  another  independent  event  happening 
be  g-,  the  chance  that  both  events  should  happen  is 

5  7  35 

6^    •<    8    Or   48"- 

This  may  be  proved  as  follows  : — 

The  chance  of  the  first  event  is  the  same  as  the 
chance  of  drawing  white  from  a  bag  containing  six 
balls,  of  which  five  are  white  (Kule  IV.) 

The  chance  of  the  second  event  is  the  same  as  the 
chance  of  drawing  white  from  a  bag  containing  eight 
balls,  of  which  seven  are  white. 

Therefore  the  chance  that  both  events  should  happen 
is  the  same  as  the  chance  that  both  balls  drawn  should 
be  white. 

But  the  first  ball  can  be  drawn  in  six  ways,  and  the 
second  in  eight  ways.  Therefore  (Choice,  Kule  I.), 
both  can  be  drawn  in  6  x  8,  or  48  ways. 

So  the  first  can  be  white  in  five  ways,  and  the  second 
can  be  white  in  seven  ways.  Therefore  both  can  be 
white  in  5  x  7,  or  35  ways. 

That  is,  the  two  balls  can  be  drawn  in  forty- eight 
ways  (all  equally  likely),  and  thirty-five  of  these  ways 
will  give  double-white.  Hence  (Eule  IT.)  the  chance  of 
double-white  is  -^r,  and  therefore  the  chance  of  the  two 

or 

given  events  both  happening  is  -^. 

And  the  same  reasoning  would  apply  if  the  numbers 
were  any  others.  Hence  the  rule  is  true  always. 


CONCURRENT    EVENTS.  97 

EXAMPLE.  —  Suppose  it  is  estimated  that  the  chance 
that  A  can  solve  a  certain  problem  is  g ,  and  the  chance 
that  B  can  solve  it  is  -^ ;  let  us  consider  what  is  the 
chance  of  the  problem  being  solved  when  they  both  try. 

The  problem  will  be  solved,  unless  they  both  fail. 

Now  the  chance  that  A  fails  is  3  :  and  the  chance 
that  B  fails  is  -^  . 

Therefore  the  chance  that  both  fail  is 
177 

v  f\v 

3       12'       36* 

The  chance  that  this  should  not  be  so,  is 

1       7       >r  29 
86'   a86- 

This  is,  therefore,  the  chance  that  the  problem  gets 
solved. 


In  the  case  just  considered,  four  results  were  possible, 

viz.  : — 

(1)  That  A  and  B  should  both  succeed  : 

(2)  ,,     A  should  succeed  and  B  fail : 

(3)  ,,     A  should  fail  and  B  succeed  : 

(4)  „     A  and  B  should  botfh  fail. 

We  may  calculate  the  chance  of  these  four  events 
separately.     Thus  we  have 

2  1 

Chance  of  A's  success  =  ~  ,     of  A'&  failure  =  5  ; 

o  o 

5  7 

,,         I>'s  success  =  r^,     of  Z>'s  failure  =  ^  • 


98 


CHANCE. 


Therefore,  by  the  rule 

(1)  Chance  that  A  and  B  both  succeed 

=  2  x    5   ._  10. 
3       12       36 ' 

(2)  Chance  that  A  succeeds  and  B  fails 

=  2  x    7    ._  14. 
3       12       36 ' 

(3)  Chance  that  A  fails  and  B  succeeds 

= l  >  A  -   A . 

3       12       36  * 

(4)  Chance  that  A  and  B  both  fail 


1   x    7    =  -7 
3       12       36* 


We  observe  that 


10  +  14  +    *    +    7    =  36  = 
36       36       36       36       36  " 

or  the  sum  of  the  four  probabilities  is  unity,  as  it  ought 
to  be,  since  it  is  certain  that  one  of  the  four  results 
must  happen. 

Further,  we  notice  that  the  problem  will  be  solved  if 
any  of  the  first  thr^e  events  out  of  (1),  (2),  (3)  and  (4) 
occur.  Hence  the  chance  of  the  problem  being  solved, 
might  have  been  obtained  by  adding  together  the  sep 
arate  probabilities  of  these  three  events.  Thus — 

10       14        5  =  29 
86       86       36      36' 

or  the  probability  is  -^r  ,  as  before. 


EXPECTATION    OF    I^IFE,  99 

It  may  be  said  that  on  an  average 

Ten  persons  will  die  in  the  next  ten  years : 
out  of  every  62  whose  present  age  is  30, 
„  »      45        „  „  40, 

„       35        „  „  50, 

„       25        „  „  60. 

We  may  apply  such  results  as  these  to  the  solution 
of  questions  affecting  Insurances  and  Life  Annuities. 

Question. — What  are  the  odds  against  a  person  aged 
thirty  living  till  he  is  sixty  ? 

Answer.  —  The  chance  that  he  dies  between  thirty 
and  forty  is  -^ ;  that  he  lives  to  forty  and  dies  between 
forty  and  fifty  is  -^  x  — ;  that  he  lives  to  fifty  and  dies 
between  fifty  and  sixty  is  ||  x  ||  x  ™ .  Therefore  the 
chance  that  he  dies  between  thirty  and  sixty  is 

10       52    10      52    35    10          149 
62  +  62  *  45  +  62  '  45  '  35'  C  L'  279 ' 

Hence  the  odds  are  149  to  130,  or  about  8  to  7 
against  his  living  to  be  sixty. 

Question. — What  are  the  odds  against  a  person  at 
the  age  of  forty  living  for  thirty  years? 

Answer. —  Proceeding  as  in  the  last  question,  we  find 
the  chance  of  his  dying  within  thirty  years  to  be 

10       35     10       35     25     10     Qr   _2_ 
45       45  '  35       45*  35  '  25'          3  * 


100  CHANCE. 

Therefore  the  odds  are  two  to  one  against  his  living 
for  thirty  years. 

Question. — What  is  the  probability  that  two  persons, 
A  and  B,  aged  respectively  thirty  and  forty,  will  be 
alive  ten  years  hence  ? 

Answer. —  The  chance  of  A  dying  in  the  next  ten 
years  is  -^  ,  and  the  chance  of  his  living  -— .  So  the 
chance  of  B  dying  within  ten  years  is  ^  ,  and  the 
chance  of  his  living  is  -jg  . 

Therefore  the  chance  that  A  and  B  will  be  both 
alive  is 

52         85          182 
62         45  '     r  279  ' 

Question. — If  it  be  eight  to  seven  against  a  person 
who  is  now  thirty  years  old  living  till  he  is  sixty,  and 
two  to  one  against  a  person  who  is  now  forty  living  till 
he  is  seventy  ;  find  the  probability  that  one  at  least  of 
these  persons  will  be  alive  thirty  years  hence. 

Answer. —  One  at  least  will  be  living  unless  both  be 
dead.  The  chance  that  the  first  be  dead  is  y6,  and  the 
chance  that  the  second  be  dead  is  3  :  therefore  the 
chance  that  both  be  dead  is  ^  x  -_  ,  or  .,-  ,  and  the 


chance  that  this  should  not  be  so,  or  that  one  at  least 

16 

4y 


,         ,.        .     -,          16  29 

be  alive  is  1  -        ,  or 


TWO  CONCURRENT  EVENTS  NOT  INDEPENDENT.   101 


RULE    VII. 

If  there  be  two  events  which  are  not  independent,  the 
chance  that  they  should  both  happen  is  the  product  of 
the  chance  that  the  first  should  happen,  and  the  chance 
that  when  the  first  has  happened  the  second  should 
happen  also. 

For  instance,  suppose  we  are  asked  what  is  the 
probability  of  drawing  first  a  consonant  and  then  a 
vowel,  when  two  letters  are  drawn  at  random  out  of 
an  alphabet  of  twenty  consonants  and  six  vowels. 

The  second  event  is  dependent  on  the  first ;  for  if  a 
consonant  be  drawn  the  first  time,  there  are  twenty-five 
letters  left,  of  which  six  are  vowels,  and  the  chance  that 
the  second  letter  should  be  a  vowel  is  -^;  but  if  a 
vowel  be  drawn  the  first  time,  there  are  twenty-five 
letters  left,  of  which  five  are  vowels,  and  the  chance 
that  the  second  letter  should  be  a  vowel  is  -^ . 

According  to  the  rule,  however,  we  have  to  multiply 
the  chance  of  the  first  event,  which  is  -g,  by  the 
chance  of  the  second  event  happening  when  the  first 
has  already  happened,  which  is  therefore  -~ ,  and  thus 
we  obtain  the  result — 

20          6  12 

26        25'  Cl>  65* 

The  truth  of  this  result  may  be  seen  in  another  way. 
It  is  possible  to  select  two  letters  in  order,  out  of  the 
alphabet,  in  26  x  25  ways  (Choice,  Rule  IV.),  and  all ' 


102  CHANCE. 

these  are  equally  likely.  But  we  can  select  two  letters 
so  that  the  first  is  a  consonant  and  the  second  a  vowel 
in  only  20  x  6  ways  (Choice,  Kule  I).  Hence  when 
two  letters  are  drawn  in  order,  the  chance  that  the  first 
is  a  consonant  and  the  second  a  vowel  is  (as  before) 

20  x    6  12 

/yw     

26  x  25'        65* 

Indeed  it  will  appear  that  this  rule  follows  directly 
from  the  preceding  one  ;  for,  since  we  have  only  to  find 
the  chance  that  both  events  should  happen,  we  have  not 
to  do  with  the  second  event  at  all,  except  in  the  case 
when  the  first  has  happened.  The  probability  of  the 
double  event  must  therefore  be  the  same  as  if  the 
chance  of  the  second  were  always  what  it  is  when  the 
first  has  happened  (since  we  are  not  concerned  with  the 
case  when  the  first  has  not  happened).  But  if  the 
chance  of  the  second  event  can  be  treated  as  if  it  were 
always  the  same,  without  reference  to  the  first  event,  it 
is  to  all  intents  and  purposes  independent  of  the  first, 
and  Eule  VI.  is  therefore  applicable. 

Question. — One  purse  contains  five  sovereigns  and 
four  shillings ;  another  contains  five  sovereigns  and 
three  shillings.  One  purse  is  taken  at  random  and  a 
coin  drawn  out.  What  is  the  chance  that  it  be  a 
sovereign  ? 

Answer. —  The  chance  that  the  first  purse  be  selected 

is     )  and  if  it  be  selected,  the  chance  that  the  coin  be 


EXAMPLES   OF    CONCURRENT    EVENTS.  103 

a  sovereign  is  9  :  hence  the  chance  that  the  coin  drawn 
out  be  one  of  the  sovereigns  out  of  the  first  purse  is 


Similarly  the  chance  that  it  be  one  of  the  sovereigns 
out  of  the  second  purse  is 

1  5  5_ 

2  '     8  '         16 ' 

Hence  the  whole  chance  of  drawing  a  sovereign  is 

5     £  5      or    85 
18    '     16 '        144 ' 

Question. —  What  is  the  expectation  from  the  drawing 
of  the  coin  in  the  last  question  ? 

Qt 

Answer.  —  The  chance  that  it  is  a  sovereign  is  :TTT, 
and  therefore  the  expectation  from  the  chance  of  draw- 

.         .      85      f  n  1700     ,.,,. 

ing  a  sovereign  is  ^  of  a  pound,  or  -^  shillings. 

If  the  coin  drawn  be  not  a  sovereign,  it  must  be  a 
shilling,  therefore  the  chance  of  drawing  a  shilling 
must  be  1  -  ^ ,  or  ^  (Kule  .  I.)  Hence  the  expecta 
tion  from  the  chance  of  drawing  a  shilling  is  ^  of  a 
shilling.  Therefore  the  whole  expectation  from  the 

drawing  is 

1700    ,   j>9  1759 

144     r  144'  C      144 

shillings,  or  12s.  2T\d. 


104  CHANCE. 

Question.  —  What  would  have  been  the  chance  of 
drawing  a  sovereign  if  all  the  coins  in  the  last  case 
had  been  in  one  bag,  and  what  would  have  been  the 
expectation  ? 

Ansiver.  —  There  would  have  been  ten  sovereigns 
and  seven  shillings  in  the  bag;  therefore,  the  chance 
of  drawing  a  sovereign  would  have  been  ^-,  and  the 
chance  of  drawing  a  shilling  -~  (Rule  I.)  The  expec- 
pectation  would  therefore  have  been 
200  7  207 

TT  +  17  or-ir 

shillings,  or  12s.  2T2Td. 

The  chance  of  drawing  a  sovereign  is  therefore  in 
this  case  a  little  less,  and  the  whole  expectation  very 
slightly  less  than  in  the  former  case. 

Question.  —  There  are  three  parcels  of  books  in 
another  room,  and  a  particular  book  is  in  one  of  them. 
The  odds  that  it  is  in  one  particular  parcel  are  three  to 
two  ;  but  if  not  in  that  parcel,  it  is  equally  likely  to  be 
in  either  of  the  others.  If  I  send  for  this  parcel,  giving 
a  description  of  it,  and  the  odds  that  I  get  the  one  I 
describe  are  two  to  one,  what  is  my  chance  of  getting 
the  book  ? 

Answer. —  The  chance  of  getting  the  parcel  described 
is  |,  and  the  chance  that  the  book  is  in  it  is  5  ; 


EXAMPLES  Otf  CONCUKRENT  EVENTS.       105 

therefore,  the  chance  of  getting  the  book  in  the 
described  parcel  is  g  x  ^  or  -^  . 

The  chance  of  getting  a  parcel  not  described  is 
£-,  and  the  chance  that  the  book  is  in  it  is  ^ ; 
therefore,  the  chance  of  getting  the  book  in  a  parcel 
not  described  is  ^  x  - ,  or  -^  ... 

Therefore,  the,  whole  chance  of  getting  the  book  at 
all  is  -jg-  +  -jg  ,  or  -^ ;  or  the  odds  are  eight  to  seven 
against  getting  it. 

Question. — In  a  purse  are  ten  coins,  of  which  nine 
are  shillings  and  one  is  a  sovereign;  in  another  are 
ten  coins,  all  of  which  are  shillings.  Nine  coins  are 
taken  out  of  the  former  purse  and  put  into  the  latter, 
and  then  nine  coins  are  taken  from  the  latter  and 
put  into  the  former.  A  person  may  now  take  which 
ever  purse  he  pleases ;  which  should  he  select  ? 

Answer. —  Since  each  purse  contains  the  same  num 
ber  of  coins,  he  ought  to  choose  that  which  is  the  more 
likely  to  contain  the  sovereign.  Now  the  sovereign  can 
only  be  in  the  second  bag,  provided  both  the  following 
events  have  taken  place,  viz.  — 

(1)  That  the  sovereign  was  among  the  nine  coins 

taken  out  of  the  first  bag  and  put  into  the 
second. 

(2)  That  it  was  not  among  the  nine  coins  taken 

out  of  the  second  bag  and  put  into  the  first. 


106  CHANCE. 

Now  the  chance  of  (1)  is  j^,  and  when  (1)  has  hap 
pened  the  chance  of  (2)  is  ||j-;  therefore,  the  chance  of 
both  happening  is  -^  x  -^ ,  or  -^ .  This,  therefore 
is  the  chance  that  the  sovereign  is  in  the  second  bag, 
and  therefore  (Eule  I.)  the  chance  that  it  is  in  the 
first  is  1  -  —  or  -J-.  Hence,  the  first  bag  ought  to 
be  chosen  in  preference  to  the  other. 


EULE   VIII. 

The  chance  that  a  series  of  events  should  all  happen 
is  the  continued  product  of  the  chance  that  the  first 
should  happen,  the  chance  that  (when  it  has  happened} 
then  the  second  should  happen,  the  chance  that  then  the 
third  should  happen,  and  so  on. 

This  is  a  simple  extension  of  the  last  rule.  For 
suppose  there  be  four  events,  and  let  ^  be  the  chance 
that  the  first  should  happen,  and  when  the  first  has 

o 

happened,  let  -g  be  the  chance  that  the  second  should 
happen,  and  when  these  have  happened,  let  g  be  the 
chance  that  the  third  should  happen,  and  when  these 
have  happened,  let  -g  be  the  chance  that  the  fourth 
should  happen  ;  by  Rule  VII.,  the  chance  that  the  first 

-JO  o 

and  second  should  both  happen  is  2   x   4  ,  or  g  .     We 


SERIES    OF   CONCURRENT    EVENTS.  107 

iay  now  treat  this  as  a  single  event,  and  then,  again 
applying  the  same  rule,  we  get  |  x  |,  or  ||-  as  the 
chance  that  the  first,  second,  and  third  should  all 
happen.  Treating  this  compound  event  as  one  event, 

15 
64 


we  can  again  apply  the  same  rule,  and  obtain  -«j   x  -g. 


or  25(3  as  the   chance  that  all  the  four   events  should 
happen.     Thus  the  chance  of  all  the  events  is 

1351 

2    X    4    X    8    X    V 

the  continued  product  of  all  the  given  chances. 

Question.  —  There  are  three  independent  events  whose 

231 

several  chances  are  3  ,   g  ,  ^  .      What  is  the  chance 
that  one  of  them  at  least  will  happen  ? 

Answer.  —  One  at  least  will  happen,  unless  all  fail. 

121         1 

The  chance  of  all  failing  is  ^  X  ^  x  ~,  or  -^  . 

d          O          A          J.O 

1  14 

Hence  the  required  chance  is  1  -   —  ,  or  -—  . 

15  15 

Question.  —  There  are  three  independent  events 
whose  several  chances  are  3,  ^,  ^.  What  is  the 
chance  that  exactly  one  of  them  should  happen  ? 

Answer.  —  The  chance  that  the  first  should  happen 
and  the  others  fail  is 


__         __         __          __ 

"3"  x  y  x  y  or  so 


108  CHANCE. 

So  the  chance  that  the  second  should  happen  and  the 
others  fail  is 

A   x    1    x    1,   or   A. 
5  3  2  30 

And  the  chance  that  the  third  should  happen  and  the 
others  fail  is 

1  x    1   x    1,   or    A. 
2  3  5  30 

Hence,  the  chance  that  one  of  these  should  occur  — 
that  is,  that  exactly  one  of  the  three  events  should 
happen  —  is 

432  9  3 

-   +       -   +    — ,    or    — ,    or    — . 

30         30         30  30  10 

Question.  —  When  six  coins  are  tossed,  what  is  the 
chance  that  one,  and  only  one,  will  turn  up  head  ? 

Answer. — The  chance  that  the  first  should  turn  up 
head  is  g,  and  the  chance  that  the  others  should  turn 
up  tail  is  2  for  each  of  them.  Therefore,  the  chance 
that  the  first  should  turn  up  head  and  the  rest  tail  is 

JLX  !x  !x  Ixlxl,  orX 

2        2         2        2         2         2         64 

And  there  will  be  a  similar  chance  that  the  second 
should  alone  turn  up  head,  or  that  the  third  should 
alone  turn  up  head,  and  so  on. 


EXAMPLES.  109 

Hence,  the  whole  chance  of  some  one,  and  only  one, 
turning  up  head  is 

1_   +   JL         JL         JL    +    JL    +    JL     or~ 

64        64        64        64        64        64*       64* 

Question. — When  six  coins  are  tossed,  what  is  the 
chance  that  at  least  one  will  turn  up  head  ? 

Answer. — The  chance  that  all  should  turn  up  tail  is 

—    x    —    x    —    x    —    x    —    x    JL  ,  or  — . 

2          2          2          2          2          2          64 

The  chance  that  this  should  not  he  so,  or  that  at  least 
one  head  should  turn  up,  is  (Kule  II.) 

1  63 


Question. — A  person  throws  three  dice,  what  are  the 
respective  chances  that  they  should  fall  all  alike,  only 
two  alike,  or  all  different  ? 

Ansiver.  —  The  chance  that  the  second  should  fall 
the  same  as  the  first  is  g,  and  the  chance  that  the 

third  should   also   fall   the   same   is    g.      Hence,   the 
chance  that  all  three  fall  alike  is 

1    x    A,  or   1. 
6:          6  36 

The  chance  that  the  second  should  fall  as  the  first, 
and  that  the  third  should  fall  different,  is 

155 

x  or   —  ; 

6  6  36 


110  CHANCE. 

and  there  is  the  same  chance  that  the  second  and  third 
should  be  alike,  and  the  first  different  ;  or  that  the  first 
and  third  should  he  alike,  and  the  second  different. 
Hence,  the  chance  that  some  two  should  he  alike,  and 
the  others  different,  is 

A    +    A    +    A,  or   I5. 
36        36        36          36 

The  chance  that  the  second  should  be  different  from 
the  first  is  g,  and  the  chance  that  the  third  should  be 
different  from  either  is  g.  Hence,  the  chance  that  all 
three  are  different  is 


,  . 

6          6  86 

Therefore,  the  three  chances  required  are  -^,  -^r,  -^ 
respectively,  their  sum  being  unity,  since  the  dice  must 
certainly  fall  in  some  one  of  the  three  ways. 

Question.  —  A  person  throws  three  dice,  and  is  to 
receive  six  shillings  if  they  all  turn  up  alike,  four 
shillings  if  two  only  turn  up  alike,  and  three  shillings 
if  all  turn  up  different,  what  is  his  expectation  ? 

Answer.  —  Referring  to  the  last  question,  the  chance 
of  all  turning  upjjjgffgsnt  is  -^  ;  his  expectation  from 
this  event  is  therefore  -^  of  six  shillings,  or  two  pence. 
The  chance  of  two  only  turning  up  alike  is  gg-  or  -^ 
and  his  expectation  from  this   event  is  therefore  -jg- 


NOTATION.  Ill 

of  four  shillings,  or  twenty  pence.  The  chance  of  all 
turning  up  different  is  -^  or  <,,  and  his  expectation 
from  this  event  is  therefore  9  of  three  shillings,  or 
twenty  pence.  Therefore  his  whole  expectation  is 
2  +  20  +  20,  or  42  pence,  or  three  shillings  and 
sixpence. 

We   shall    find    the   following    notation    very    con 
venient  :  — 

The  symbol  32  means  3  x  3,  or  9  : 

52  means  5  x   5,  or  25  : 

53  means  5  x  5  x  5,  or  125  : 

24  means  2  x  2  x  2  x  2,  or  16  : 

25  means  2  x  2  x  2  x  2  x  2,  or  32  : 
and  so  on,  whatever  he  the  numbers  ;  the  small  figure 
above  the  line  denoting  the  number  of  times  the  other 
number  is  to  be  repeated,  and  the  sign  of  multiplication 
being  understood  before  every  repetition. 

2228 
' 


a 
So 


and  so  on. 


|4_8X888_81. 

-  4   X   4   X   4        4  "  256' 


Question.  —  A  person  goes  on  throwing  a  single  die 
until  it  turns  up  ace.  What  is  the  chance  (1)  that  he 
will  have  to  make  at  least  ten  throws ;  (2)  that  he  will 
have  to  make  exactly  ten  throws  ? 


112  CHANCE. 

Answer.  —  (1)    The    chance    that    he    fails   at  any 

5 
particular  trial  to  throw  an  ace  is  -~-  .       The   chance 

that  he  should  fail  the  first  nine  times  (by  Rule  VIII.) 

/5\e 
18  (        .     This,    therefore,  is  the  probability  that  he 


will  have  to  throw  at  least  ten  times. 

/5\9 
(2)    Since      ~      is    the    chance    that  he  fails    the 


first  nine  times,  and  -^  the  chance  that  he  succeeds 

D 

/5V         1 
the   next  time,   therefore  by  Rule  VII.,   Igj     x    ^g" 

is  the  chance  that  he  will  have  to  throw  exactly  ten 
times. 

Question. — A  die  is  to  be  thrown  once  by  each  of 
four  persons,  A,  B,  C,  D,  in  order,  and  the  first  of 
them  who  throws  an  ace  is  to  receive  a  prize.  Find 
their  respective  chances,  and  the  chance  that  the  prize 
will  not  be  won  at  all. 

Answer.  —  Since  A  has  the  first  throw,  he  wins  if  he 
throws  an  ace ;  his  chance  is  therefore  g. 

So  B  wins  provided  A  fails  and  he  succeeds.  The 
chance  of  A  failing  is  ^,  and  of  B  succeeding  is  6. 
Therefore  J5's  chance  of  winning  is 

5     l      A 

6  X  6'  °r  36  ' 


EXAMPLES.  113 

So  C  wins  provided  A  and  B  both  fail,  and  he 
succeeds.  The  chance  of  A  and  B  both  failing  is 
6  x  g  ,  or  -gg- ;  and  then  the  chance  of  C  succeeding 
is  g .  Therefore  O's  chance  of  winning  is 

25       1          j^ 

36  X  6 '  CT  216 ' 

So  D  wins  provided  A,  B,  and  C  all  fail,  and  he 
succeeds.  The  chance  of  A,  B,  and  C  all  failing  is 
g  x  x  ^  ,  or  -g^g-  j  a*id  then  the  chance  of  D 
succeeding  is  6.  Therefore  Z)'s  chance  of  winning  is 

125        1          125 
216   X   6'   >r  1296* 

The  prize  is  not  won  at  all,  provided  all  four  fail  to 
throw  an  ace.  The  chance  that  this  should  be  the 

case  is 

5555  625 


6666'     '   1296' 

Question. — Two  persons,  A  and  B,  throw  alternately 
with  a  single  die,  and  he  who  first  throws  an  ace  is  to 
receive  a  prize  of  £1.  What  are  their  respective 
expectations  ? 

Answer.  —  The  chance  that  the  prize  should  be  won 

at   the   first  throw,    is  g : 

at  the  second  throw,  is        x       : 


114  CHOICE. 


at  the  third  throw,  is      «       x 


/5V        1 

at  the  fourth  throw,  is  I  «  1     x    »  : 
\6/          6 

/5V        1 

at   the   fifth   throw,  is     -5       x    ~  : 
\6/          6 

/5V         1 

at  the  sixth  throw,  is  [  5  I     x    5  : 
\o/  b 

and  so  on. 

But  the  first,  third,  and  fifth,  &c.,  throws  belong  to 
A,  and  the  second,  fourth,  sixth,  &c.,  belong  to  B. 
Hence  A1  a  chance  of  winning  is 

1        /5V  1         /5V  1        &c  . 
6         \6j  •  6         \6)  '  6 

and  jB's  chance  is 

5      1         /5V     1         /5V     1         o 
6-6   +    VBJ  '6   +    lej  '6   +    &C'; 

that  is,  B's  chance  is  equal  to  ^.'s  multiplied  by  |. 
Hence  -B's  expectation  is  g  of  A'&,  or  B's  is  to  A'  a 
in  the  ratio  of  five  to  six.  But  their  expectations  must 

f* 

together  amount  to  £1.  Hence  A's  expectation  is  ^y 
of  a  pound,  and  JB's  -^-  of  a  pound. 

Question.  —  What  is  the  chance  that  a  person  with 
two  dice  will  throw  aces  exactly  four  times  in  six  trials  ? 


EXAMPLES.  115 

Answer. —  The  chance  of  throwing  aces  at  any  par 
ticular  trial  is  -^ ,  and  the  chance  of  failing  is  ^-' 

Hence  the  chance  of  succeeding  at  four  assigned  trials, 

/  1  Y       /35\2 

and  failing  at  the  other' two  is     ^      X     ^    .    But 

\db/         \ow 

aces  will  be  thrown  exactly  four  times  if  they  be  thrown 
at  any  set  of  four  trials  which  might  be  asssigned  out 
of  the  six  trials,  and  if  they  fail  at  the  remaining  two. 
And  (Choice,  Kule  IX.)  it  is  possible  to  assign  four  out 

of  six  in     '  '       ,  or  fifteen  ways.     Hence  the  chance 
1.2.3.4 

required  is  fifteen  times  the  chance  of  succeeding  in 
four  assigned  trials,  and  failing  at  the  other  two. 
Therefore  it  is 

1    V    x    (  35  V   x    15    or        6125 
x  x    Lb    or 


36  J          V  36  J  725594112 

therefore  the  odds  are  more  than  100,000  to  1  against 
the  event. 


Question. — If  on  an  average  nine  ships  out  of  ten 
return  safe  to  port,  what  is  the  chance  that  out  of  five 
ships  expected,  at  least  three  will  arrive  ? 

Answer.  —  The    chance    that    any    particular    ship 

Q 

returns  is  ^.     The  chance   that   any  particular   set 

/  9  \3 
of  three   ships   should   all   arrive   is    1 .57? )  "j  and  the 


116  CHANCE. 


(1  ^  2 
— 

Therefore  the  chance  that  a   particular   set   of  three 

/  9  \3         /  1  \2  729 

should    alone    arrive   is  ,  or    ---. 


And  out  of  five  ships  a  set  of  three  can  be  selected  in 
1~2~S  or  ^  ways.      Hence  the  chance  that  some  one 
of  these  sets  of  three  should  alone  arrive  is 
79,Q  79Q 

I   -^J  *  *  1,1  I   -*-J »  ' 

___ y*       TO  f)1*  B 

100000        10000' 

This  is  therefore  the  chance  that  exactly  three  ships 
should  arrive. 

Similarly    the   chance    that    any    particular   set    of 

/9V         1  6561 

four   should  alone  arrive   is  1  ^      x   ^ ,  or  - 


and  the  chance  that  some  one  of  the  five  possible  sets 

,      ,,    .  6561      ,  K         32805 

of  four  should  alone  arrive  is  ^^^  x  5 ,  or  -- 


100000  100000 ' 

This  is  therefore  the  chance  that  exactly  four  ships 

should  arrive. 

And  the  chance  that  all  the  five  should  -  arrive  is 
9_\*          59049 

16; '  r  100000 ' 

But  the  chance  that  at  least  three  should  arrive  is 
the  chance  that  either  three  exactly,  or  four  exactly, 
or  five  exactly  should  arrive :  and  is  therefore  the 


SKILL    IN   GAMES.  117 

sum  of  the  several  chances  of  these   exact   numbers 
arriving :    that  is,  the  required  chance  is 

7290          32805         59049  99144  12393 

100000       100000       100000  '  °r  100000 '  °"  "12500  * 


Question. — A  and  B  play  at  a  game  which  cannot  be 
drawn,  and  on  an  average  A  wins  three  games  out  of 
five.  What  is  the  chance  that  A  should  win  at  least 
three  games  out  of  the  first  five  ? 

Answer. — The  chance  that  A  wins  three  assigned 

/3\3  /2\2         108 
games,  and  B  the  other  two,  is  I  -= }  •  {-„}    or  ^77?. 

\O/        w/  dl^O 

But  the  three  may  be  assigned  in  j^g  >  or  1°  wavs 
(Choice  Rule  IX.).  Hence  the  chance  that  A  should 
win  some  three  games  and  B  the  other  two  is 

108        ,0          1080 
3125  3125' 

Similarly  the  chance  that  A  should  win  some  four 
games  and  B  the  other  one  is 

162    x  5     or    81° 
3125  3125 ' 

And  the  chance  that  A  should  win  all  five  games  is 

243 


5J  '  °r  3125 


118  CHOICE. 

Therefore  the  chance  that  A  wins  either  three,  or  four, 
or  all  out  of  the  first  five  games  is 

1080         810          243    ._  2133 
3125     "   3125         3125  "  3l25 ' 

or  the  odds  are  rather  more  than  two  to  one  in  J.'s 
favour. 


EULE    IX. 

If  a  doubtful  event  can  happen  in  a  number  of  differ 
ent  ways,  any  accession  of  knowledge  concerning  the 
event  which  changes  the  probability  of  its  happening 
will  change,  in  the  same  ratio,  the  probability  of  any 
particular  way  of  its  happening. 

It  follows  from  the  axiom  that  the  probability  of  the 
event  happening  at  all  must  be  equal  to  the  sum  of  the 
probabilities  of  its  happening  in  the  several  ways. 

First,  suppose  for  simplicity  that  all  the  ways  are 
equally  likely.  Let  there  be  seven  ways,  and  let  the 
chance  of  each  one  severally  occurring  be  ^ :  then  the 
chance  of  the  event  happening  at  all  is  seven  times 
this,  or  ~. 

But  suppose  that  our  knowledge  is  increased  by  the 
information  that  the  event  happens  nine  times  out  of 
ten,  or  by  such  other  information  as  brings  our  estimate 
of  its  probability  up  to  ^  instead  of  -^,  thus  increasing 
the  probability  in  the  ratio  of  seven  to  nine. 


ACCESSION   OF   KNOWLEDGE.  119 


It  is  still  true  that  there  are  only  seven  ways  of  the 
event  happening,  all  of  which  are  equally  likely  :  hence 
the  probability  of  the  event  happening  in  any  particular 
one  of  these  ways  is  ^  of  -^,  or  -^ ,  with  our  new  in 
formation.  Hence  our  information  concerning  the 
event,  has  increased  the  chance  of  its  happening  in  an 

179 

assigned  way  from  -^  or  -^  to  -^-,  that  is,  it  has  in 
creased  it  in  the  ratio  of  seven  to  nine,  the  same  ratio 
in  which  the  probability  of  the  event  itself  was  increased. 
And  the  same  argument  would  hold  if  the  numbers 
were  any  others,  and  therefore  the  rule  is  true,  provided 
all  the  ways  of  the  event  happening  are  equally  probable. 

Secondly,  suppose  the  ways  are  not  equally  probable. 
We  may  in  this  case  regard  them  as  groups  of  subsidiary 
ways,  which  would  be  equally  probable.  Then,  as  we 
have  shewn,  the  chance  of  each  one  of  these  subsidiary 
ways  would  be  increased  (or  decreased)  in  the  same 
ratio  as  the  chance  of  the  event  itself,  and  therefore  the 
sum  of  the  chances  of  any  group  of  these  subsidiary 
ways  would  be  changed  in  the  same  ratio. 

For  instance,  if  the  event  could  happen  in  any  one 
of  three  ways,  whose  respective  chances  were  g-,  g,  ^» 

or  -jj,  -jg-,  -jg ,  we  might  divide  the  first  of  these  ways 
into  four  subsidiary  ways,  the  next  into  two  ways,  and 
the  other  into  three  ways,  and  the  chance  of  each  of 
these  subsidiary  ways  would  be  ^ .  If»  therefore,  by 
an  accession  of  knowledge,  the  chance  of  the  whole 
event  were  diminished  in  the  ratio  of  three  to  two,  each 


120  CHANCE. 

subsidiary  way  of  the  event's  happening  would  have  a 
diminished  probability  of  g  of  ^,  or  -yg-,  and  the  prob 
abilities  of  the  three  given  ways  would  become  respec- 

423  211 

tively,  -jj,  -jg,  -jg- ,  or  ^,  g,  g  :  that  is,  they  would  be 
diminished  in  the  same  ratio  as  the  chance  of  the  event 
itself. 

Thus  we  see  that  the  rule  is  true  always. 

Question.  —  A  bag  contains  five  balls,  which  are 
known  to  be  either  all  black  or  all  white  —  and  both 
these  are  equally  probable.  A  white  ball  is  dropped 
into  the  bag,  and  then  a  ball  is  drawn  out  at  random 
and  found  to  be  white.  What  is  now  the  chance  that 
the  original  balls  were  all  white  ? 

Answer.  —  The  probabilities  are  here  affected  by  the 
observed  event  that  a  ball  drawn  out  at  random  proved 
to  be  white. 

We  will  first  calculate  the  probabilities  before  this 
event  was  observed  (which  we  will  call  a  priori  proba 
bilities),  and  then  consider  how  they  are  affected  by 
the  accession  of  knowledge  produced  by  the  observation 
of  the  event.  (Probabilities  modified  by  this  knowledge 
may  be  distinguished  as  a  posteriori  probabilities.) 

The  event  might  happen  in  two  ways ;  either  by  the 
balls  having  been  all  white,  and  any  one  of  them  being 
drawn,  or  by  the  five  original  balls  having  been  black, 
the  new  one  alone  white,  and  this  one  drawn. 

The  a  priori  probability  that  all  are  white  is  | ,  and 
then  the  chance  of  drawing  a  white  ball  is  1  (or 


EXAMPLE.  121 

certainty).     Hence  the  chance  of  the  event  happening 
in  this  way  is  2   x  1 ,  or  ^  • 

So  the  a  priori  probability  that  the  first  five  were 
black  is  ^  >  and  then  the  chance  of  drawing  a  white 
ball  is  | .  Hence  the  chance  of  the  event  happening 
in  this  way  is  ^  x  g  >  or  "^  • 

Therefore  the  whole  a  priori  chance  of  the  event 
happening  is  \  +  ^-,  or  ^-. 

But  when  the  ball  is  drawn  and  observed  to  be  white, 
this  knowledge  immediately  increases  the  chance  from 
^  to  1  (or  certainty) :  that  is,  it  increases  the  chance 
in  the  ratio  of  7  to  12.  Therefore,  by  Rule  IX.,  the 
chances  of  the  event  happening  in  the  several  ways 
are  increased  in  the  same  ratio. 

Hence  the  a  posteriori  chance  of  the  event  having 
happened  in  the  first  way  is  ^  x  ~Y  >  or  7  »  an<^  ^e 
a  posteriori  chance  of  its  having  happened  in  the 
second  way  is  -^  x  -y- ,  or  ^  .  Or  the  chance  of  the 
original  balls  having  been  all  white  is  now  -^ ,  and  the 
chance  of  their  having  been  all  black  is  y. 

Question.  —  A  penny  is  tossed  ten  times  in  suc 
cession,  and  always  falls  head.  Supposing  that  one 
penny  in  every  million  that  are  coined  has  two 
heads,  what  is  the  chance  that  the  penny  in  question 
has  two  heads? 


122  CHANCE. 

Answer.  —  The  penny  has  either  two  heads  or  a  head 
and  a  tail :    and  the  respective  chances  of  these  two 

.      .  I  -,     999999  T        ,,         n 

cases  a  priori  are  ^^  and  1000000  .      In   the  first 


case  the  chance  that  head  should  fall  ten  times  in 
succession  is  unity;  in  the  second  case  it  is  (--)  ,  or 
•jo^-.  Therefore  we  have  a  priori, — 

(1)  the  chance  that  there  should  be  two  heads, 
and  head    should   fall  ten   times  is  -100QOOO  : 

(2)  the  chance  that  there  should  be  head  and 
tail,    and    head    should    fall    ten    times    is 

and  the  chance  that  from  one  or 


1024000000  * 

other  the  same  result  should  happen  is 
1  999999  1001023 


1000000       1024000000'        1024000000 

But  after  our  knowledge  is  augmented  by  the  obser 
vation  of  the  fact  that  the  penny  falls  head  ten  times 
in  succession,  this  latter  chance  becomes  unity,  that 

.,    T  ii-    T    j    i        1024000000  TT  /-n    , 

is,  it  becomes  multiplied  by  1001093 -  •  Hence  (Rule 
IX.)  the  chances  (1)  and  (2)  become  multiplied  in  the 
same  ratio.  Therefore  we  have  a  posteriori,  — 

(1)  the  chance  that  there  should  be  two  heads, 
and  head  should  fall  ten  times  is 

1024000000     1024 


lAniAOO         9 


1000000          1001023  1001023' 


EXAMPLES  OF  AUGMENTED  KNOWLEDGE.     123 

(2)  The  chance  that  there  should  be  head  and 
tail,  and  head  should  fall  ten  times  is 

999999  1024000000          999999 


1024000000          1001023  1001023* 

The  required  chance  (after  the  observed  event)  is 
consequently 

1024  1 

,  or  rather  more  than  --7^ . 


1001023'  "  1000 

Question.  —  A  purse  contains  ten  coins,  each  of 
which  is  either  a  sovereign  or  a  shilling  :  a  coin  is 
drawn  and  found  to  be  a  sovereign,  what  is  the  chance 
that  this  is  the  only  sovereign  ? 

Answer.  —  A  priori,  the  coin  drawn  was  equally 
likely  to  be  a  sovereign  or  a  shilling,  therefore  the 
chance  of  its  being  a  sovereign  was  -^  . 

A  posteriori,  the  chance  of  its  being  a  sovereign  is 
unity:  or  the  chance  is  doubled  by  the  observation  of 
the  event.  Therefore  (Rule  IX.)  the  chance  of  any 
particular  way  in  which  a  sovereign  might  be  drawn 
is  also  doubled. 

Now  the  chance  that  there  was  only  one  sovereign 
was  a  priori 


10 


or 


1024  ' 


and  in  this  case  the  chance  of  drawing  a  sovereign 
would  be  -     . 


124  CHANCE. 

Hence  the  chance   that   there   should  be  only  one 
sovereign,  and  that  it  should  be  drawn  was  a  priori 

jo_  x  A         J_ 

1024         10'  1024* 

And  the  a  posteriori  chance  that  a  sovereign  should 
be   drawn  in   this  way  is   the   double  of  this  :   i.  e., 
or  5l2  »  w^cn  is  therefore  the  required  chance. 


Question.  —  A  purse  contains  ten  coins,  which  are 
either  sovereigns  or  shillings,  and  all  possible  numbers 
of  each  are  equally  likely  :  a  coin  is  drawn  and  found  to 
be  a  sovereign,  what  is  the  chance  that  this  is  the  only 
sovereign  ? 

Answer.  —  A  priori,  the  coin  drawn  was  equally 
likely  to  be  a  sovereign  or  a  shilling,  therefore  the 
chance  of  its  being  a  sovereign  was  ^  • 

A  posteriorly  the  chance  of  its  being  a  sovereign  is 
unity  :  or  the  chance  is  doubled  by  the  observation  of 
the  event. 

Therefore  (Rule  IX.)  the  chance  of  any  particular 
way  in  which  a  sovereign  might  be  drawn  is  also 
doubled. 

Now,  a  priori,  eleven  cases  were  equally  probable, 
viz.,  that  there  should  be 

0,  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10  sovereigns. 
10,  9,  8,  7/6,  5,  4,  3,  2,  1,     0  shillings. 

Therefore    the    chance    of    there    being    exactly    one 


EXAMPLES.  125 


sovereign  was  ^-,  and  in  this  case  the  chance  of  drawing 

i 
a  sovereign  was  -^  . 

Hence  the  chance  that  there  should  be  only  one 
sovereign,  and  that  it  should  be  drawn  was,  a  priori, 

ii  x  16'  or  no  * 

And  the  a  posteriori  chance  that  a  sovereign  should 
be  drawn  in  this  way  is  the  double  of  this,  that  is, 
^  or  -gg-,  which  is,  therefore,  the  chance  required. 

Question. — Keference  is  made  to  a  year  which  con 
tained  fifty- three  Sundays,  and  was  not  the  last  year  of 
a  century.  What  are  the  odds  against  its  being  a  leap- 
year? 

Answer. — Of  the  ninety-nine  years,  excluding  the 
last  in  any  century,  twenty-four  are  leap-years.  Hence, 
before  we  consider  the  fact  that  the  year  in  question 
contained  fifty-three  Sundays,  the  a  priori  chance  that 

o 

it  was  a  leap-year  is  -^ ,  and  that  it  was  not  a  leap- 

25 

year  -^ . 

The  chance  that  a  leap-year  has  fifty-three  Sundays 
is  7,  and  the  chance  that  another  year  has  fifty-three 
Sundays  is  ~ . 


126  CHOICE. 

Hence  the  chance  that  the  year  in  question  should  he 
a  leap-year,  and  have  fifty-three  Sundays,  is 

8         2  16 

33  X   7  '     r  231  ' 

And  -the  chance  that  it  should  not  he  a  leap-year,  and 
yet  have  fifty-three  Sundays,  is 

25  x   *     or   25 
33        7  '        231  ' 

Hence  the  whole  a  priori  probability  that  the  year 
should  have  fifty-three  Sundays,  is 

!§.     2£          41_ 

231        231  '        231 

But  a  posteriori  this  chance  becomes  certainty,  or  the 

231 

probability  gets  multiplied  by  -^  .  Hence  also  the 
probability  that  the  fifty-three  Sundays  resulted  from  a 
leap-year  is  multiplied  in  the  same  ratio,  and  becomes 

JL6^        231  16 

231         41  41  ' 

and  the  chance  that  it  is  not  a  leap-year  becomes 


25    x   ?31     or  25 

231         41  '        41  ' 

Thus  the  odds  are  now  25  to  16  against  the  year 
in  question  being  a  leap-year. 

Question.  —  A,  B,  C  were  entered  for  a  race,  and 
their  respective  chances  of  winning  were  estimated  at 
IT'  IT'  Tf  *  ^u^  circumstances  come  to  our  knowledge 


EXAMPLES.  127 

in  favour  of  A,  which  raise  his  chance  to  ^;  what  are 
now  the  chances  in  favour  of  B  and  C  respectively  ? 

Answer.  —  A  could  lose  in  two  ways,  viz.,  either  by 
B  winning  or  by  C  winning,  and  the  respective  chances 
of  his  losing  in  these  ways  were  a  priori  -^j  and  -yj-i 
and  the  chance  of  his  losing  at  all  was  -yp  But  after 
our  accession  of  knowledge  the  chance  of  his  losing 
at  all  becomes  ^  *na^  ig>  it  becomes  diminished  in 
the  ratio  of  18  :  11.  Hence  the  chance  of  either  way 
in  which  he  might  lose  is  diminished  in  the  same 
ratio.  Therefore  the  chance  of  B  winning  is  now 


11 

18 


and  of  C  winning 


5          11  5 

n  x  is'  or  is- 

These  are  therefore  the  required  chances. 

Question. —  One  of  a  pack  of  fifty-two  cards  has 
been  removed;  from  the  remainder  of  the  pack  two 
cards  are  drawn  and  are  found  to  be  spades ;  find 
the  chance  that  the  missing  card  is  a  spade. 

Answer.  —  A  priori,  the  chance  of  the  missing  card 

being  a  spade  is  ^,  and  the  chance  that  then  two  cards 
drawn  at  random  should  be  both  spades  is  rr^,  or 


128  CHANCE. 

Hence  the  chance  that  the  missing  card  should  be  a 
spade,  and  two  spades  be  drawn  is 

!    x    _132_  1! 

4        2550'  850* 

The  chance  of  the  missing  card  being  not  a  spade  is 

o 

£,  and  the  chance  that  then  two  spades  should  be 
drawn  is     or  <.  Hence  the  chance  that  the 


missing  card  should  be  not  a  spade,  and  two  spades 
be  drawn,  is 

3  x     156       or    -??- 

4  2550'  850' 

Therefore  the  chance  that  in  one  way  or  the  other 
two  spades  should  be  drawn  is 

11  39  50  1 

850   "   850'  850'  17* 

But  after  the  observation  of  the  event  this  chance 
becomes  certainty,  or  becomes  multiplied  by  17. 
Therefore  the  chance  of  either  way  from  which  the 
result  might  occur  is  increased  in  the  same  ratio. 

So  the  chance  that  the  given  card  was  a  spade 
becomes  a  posteriori, 

*  »•  -   - 


Questions  as  to  the  credibility  of  the  testimony  of 
witnesses  will  depend  for  their  solution  upon  the  last 
rule,  and  may  be  answered  in  a  manner  similar  to  that 


CBEDIBILITY    OF    TESTIMONY.  129 

of  the  questions  just  considered.  In  most  questions  of 
this  class,  the  testimony  given,  or  the  assertions  made, 
constitute  a  phenomenon  which  might  have  occurred 
whether  the  event  reported  occurred  or  not,  or  in  what 
soever  manner  it  occurred.  We  may  first  investigate 
the  a  priori  probabilities  of  such  testimony  being  given, 
on  the  several  hypotheses  possible  with  respect  to  the 
occurrence  of  the  event,  and  by  summing  them  we  may 
deduce  the  a  priori  probability  of  the  testimony  being 
given  at  all.  If  we  then  take  into  consideration  the 
fact  that  the  testimony  has  been  given,  this  accession 
of  knowledge  raises  the  last  probability  into  certainty, 
and  therefore  increases  it  in  a  definite  ratio,  which  can 
be  calculated.  In  the  same  ratio  (by  Rule  IX.)  must 
the  probabilities  be  increased  of  the  several  ways  in 
which  the  testimony  may  have  been  generated,  or  in 
which  the  event  in  question  may  have  happened.  Thus 
we  obtain  the  a  posteriori  and  final  probability  of  any 
assigned  manner  in  which  the  event  could  possibly  have 
occurred.  A  few  examples  will  fully  illustrate  this. 

Question. — A  speaks  truth  three  times  out  of  four, 
B  four  times  out  of  five ;  they  agree  in  asserting  that 
from  a  bag  containing  nine  balls,  all  of  different  colours, 
a  white  ball  has  been  drawn ;  shew  that  the  probability 

96 

that  this  is  true  is  -^  . 

Answer. — We  will  consider  those  chances  as  a  priori, 
which  are  independent  of  the  knowledge  that  A  and  B 


130  CHANCE. 

make  the  report  in  question,  and  those  as  a  posteriori 
which  are  subsequent  to  this  knowledge. 

The  a  priori  chance  that  a  white  ball  should  be 
drawn  is  ^ ,  and  in  this  case  the  chance  .that  A  and  B 
should  both  assert  it,  is  ^  x  - ;  hence  the  chance  that 
A  and  B  should  both  truly  assert  a  white  ball  to  be 
drawn,  is  a  priori, 

134  1 

9    :     4     :    5'°rl5' 

The  a  priori  chance  that  a  white  ball  should  not  be 

Q 

drawn  is  g,  the  chance  that  A  should  make  a  false 
report  is  ^ ,  and  that  he  should  select  the  white  ball 
out  of  the  eight  which  might  be  falsely  asserted  to  have 
come  up  is  g ;  hence  in  this  case  the  chance  that  he 
asserts  that  the  white  is  drawn  is  ~8  x  ^  ,  and  the 
chance  that  B  should  make  the  same  assertion  is  g  x  g  I 
therefore  the  chance  that  A  and  B  should  both  falselj 
assert  a  white  ball  to  be  drawn  is 

Ixixixlxi,          ! 


98485'        1440' 

Consequently  the  a  priori  chance  that  they  both  assen 
either  truly  or  falsely  that  a  white  ball  should  b< 
drawn  is 

JL    +       1          .     97 

15         1440 '  C  "  1440  ' 


EXAMPLES    OF    TESTIMONY.  131 

But  a  posteriori  this  chance  becomes  certainty,  or  it 
becomes  multiplied  by  -^  .  Hence  the  chance  of  each 
way  in  which  they  may  make  the  assertion,  is  multi 
plied  in  the  same  ratio.  Therefore,  a  posteriori,  the 
chance  that  they  make  the  assertion  truly  is 

_!_       1440          96 . 
15          97  97 ' 

and  the  chance  that  they  make  it  falsely  is 

1      x    144?     or  1 

1440   '       97  97' 

Question. — A  gives  a  true  report  four  times  out  of 
five,  B  three  times  out  of  five,  and  C  five  times  out  of 
seven.  If  B  and  C  agree  in  reporting  that  an  experi 
ment  failed  which  A  reports  to  have  succeeded,  what  is 
the  chance  that  the  experiment  succeeded  ? 

Ansiver. — The  chance  that  the  given  reports  should 
be  made  upon  the  experiment  having  succeeded  is 

tl  4  2  2  16 
v  —  v  v  or  
2  "  5  "  5  '*  1'  350' 

The  chance  that  the  given  reports  should  be  made  on 
the  experiment  having  failed  is 

1  1         8        5       .    16_ 

2  5         5        7'     *  350* 

The  a  priori  chance  that  in  one  way  or  other  the 
given  reports  should  be  made  is 

I6  11     or    *1 

350        350 '        350 ' 


132  CHANCE. 

But,  a  posteriori,  this  is  certain,  or  the  chance  is 

QCA 

multiplied  by  -^  .     Hence,  also,  the  chance  of  each 
way  in  which  the  reports  could  be  made  is  multiplied 

,       350 

bv  si- 

Therefore,  a  posteriori,  the  chance  that  the  experi 
ment  succeeded  is 

16^       350          16 
350   X    31  '  °r  31 ' 


We  will  conclude  this  chapter  with  some  illustrations 
of  the  principles  of  probability,  drawn  from  the  game 
of  whist. 

This  game  is  played  with  a  pack  of  fifty-two  cards, 
consisting  of  four  suits  of  thirteen  cards,  marked  differ 
ently.  The  cards  are  all  dealt  out  to  four  players, 
of  whom  two  and  two  are  partners,  so  that  each  has 
thirteen  cards.  One  of  the  dealer's  cards  is  turned 
up,  and  the  suit  to  which  this  card  belongs  is  called 
trumps.  Four  particular  cards  in  this  suit — the  ace, 
king,  queen,  and  knave— are  called  honours. 

It  follows,  from  Rule  IV.,  that  the  chance  that  the 
turned  up  card  is  an  honour  is  -j^r,  and  that  it  is  not 
an  honour  is  ^-. 

Io 

Question. — What  is  the  chance  that  each  party  in 
the  game  should  have  two  honours? 

Answer. — Besides  the  turned  up  card,  there  are 
fifty-one  cards,  of  which  twenty-five  belong  to  the 


GAME    OF    WHIST.  133 


dealer  and  his  partner,  and  twenty-six  to  their  ad 
versaries. 

First,  —  Suppose  the  turned  up  card  is  an  honour. 
The  chance  of  this  is  -^.  Then  the  chance  that  one 
other  honour  should  be  among  the  twenty-five,  and  the 
remaining  two  among  the  twenty-six,  is 

3    25     26    25. 

'  51  *  50  '  49 ' 

therefore  the  chance  that  the  turned  up  card  should  be 
an  honour,  and  the  honours  equally  divided,  is 

o    25     26    25     4_          100 

'51  "50  '  49  '  13'    r  833* 

Secondly,  —  Suppose  the  turned  up  card  is  not  an 

Q 

honour.  The  chance  of  this  is  -^  •  Then  the  chance 
that  two  of  the  honours  should  be  among  the  twenty- 
five,  and  the  remaining  two  among  the  twenty- six,  is 

4.3     25     24     26     25  . 

1 .  2  '  51  '  50  '  49  '  48  ' 

therefore  the  chance  that  the  turned  up  card  should  not 
be  an  honour,  and  the  honours  be  equally  divided,  is 

6    25     24     26     25     _9^          225 

' '  51  '  50  '  49  '  48  '  13  '     r  833  ' 

Hence  the  whole  chance  that  the  honours  should  be 
equally  divided  is 

100         225          325 
833     "   833'        833  ' 


184  CHANCE. 

In  the  same  manner  we  may  write  down  almost  at 
sight  the  chances  of  the  occurrence  of  other  arrange 
ments  of  the  cards.  We  give  a  few  examples  : — 

1. — If  an  honour  turns  up,  the  respective  chances 
that  the  dealer  and  his  partner  have  between  them 
exactly  one,  two,  three,  or  four  honours,  are  respectively 

26.25.24         3  25.26.25         3  25.24.26       25.24.23 . 
.  51.50.49  '         '  51.50.49  '         '  51.50.49  '     51.50.49  ' 

312       975       936       276 


or 


2499'   2499'   2499'   2499' 


the  sum  of  these  fractions  being  unity,  for  one  of  the 
four  cases  must  certainly  occur. 

2. —  If  an  honour  does  not  turn  up,  the  respective 
chances  that  the  dealer  and  his  partner  have  none,  or 
exactly  one,  tivo,  three,  or  four  honours,  are 

26.25.24.23         ,    25.26.25.24         6   25.24.26.25 
51.50.49.48  '        : "  51.50.49.48'         ' '  51.50.49.48' 

25.24.23.26       25.24.23.22 


4. 


51.50.49.48'      51.50.49.48' 


299      1300     1950     1196      253  . 
4998 '  4998  '  4998 '  4998  '  4998  ' 

the  sum  of  these  fractions  being  unity,  for  one  of  the 
five  cases  must  certainly  occur. 


GAME    OF    WHIST.  135 

3. — Before  it  is  known  whether  an  honour  will  turn 
up,  the  respective  chances  that  the  dealer  and  his 
partner  have  between  them  none,  or  exactly  one,  two, 
three,  or  four  honours,  are 

207      1092     1950     1404     _845_  . 
4998'  4998'  4998'  4998'  4998' 

the  sum  of  the  fractions  being  unity. 

Hence,  speaking  approximately,  we  may  expect  that 
on  the  average,  for  every  one  hundred  times  the  cards 
are  dealt,  the  dealer  and  his  partner  will  have  four 
honours  seven  times,  and  the  other  players  four  times. 
The  dealer  and  his  partner  will  have  three  honours 
twenty-eight  times,  and  the  other  players  twenty-two 
times.  And  each  party  will  have  two  honours  the 
remaining  thirty-nine  times. 

4.  —  The  chance  that  each  of  the  four  players  should 
have  one  honour  is 

..,          4.12.133              |3.133 
either  _!= or  L.   , 

51.50.49.48        51.50.49 

(which  happen  to  be  equal)  according  as  the  turned  up 
card  is  not,  or  is,  an  honour.  Before  the  turned  up 
card  be  seen,  the  chance  is 

—       M2.1B3     +  A       L8-138        or      9633 
13  '  51.50.49.48       13  "  51.50.49'  249900* 


136  CHANCE. 

5. — If  an  honour  turns  up,  the  respective  chances 
that  the  dealer  should  hold  exactly  one,  two,  three,  or 
four  honours  are 

39.38.37      3     12.39.38      3     12.11.39       12.11.10. 
51.50.49'    1X  51.50.49  '     1  X  51.50.49'     51.50.49' 

54834   53352   15444   1320 


or 


124950'  124950'  124950'  124950* 


The  sum  of  these  fractions  is  unity,  it  being  certain 
that  the  dealer  has  at  least  one  honour. 


6.  —  If  an  honour  does  not  turn  up,  the  respective 
chances  that  the  dealer  should  hold  none,  or  exactly 
one,  two,  three,  or  four  honours,  are 

39.38.37.36        ,    12.39.38.37        6    12.11.39.38 
"  '' 


51.50.49.48  '       "  51.50.49.48'        '51.50.49.48' 

4 
' 


12.11.10.39        12.11.10.9* 


or 


51.50.49.48'  51.50.49.48' 
82251   109668  48906   8580    465 


249900'  249900'  249900'  249900'  249900* 


The  sum  of  these  fractions  is  unity,  since  one  of  the 
five  cases  must  certainly  occur. 

7. — Before  it  is  known  whether  an  honour  will  turn 
up,  the  respective  chances  that  the  dealer  should  hold 


GAME    OF    WHIST.  137 

none,  or  exactly  one,  or  two,  or  three,  or  four  honours 

are 

56943      109668     66690      15444       1155 
249900'  249900'  249900'  249900'  249900' 

the  sum  of  these  fractions  being  unity. 

8. — If  an  honour  turns  up,  the  respective  chances 
that  a  player,  who  is  not  the  dealer,  should  hold  no 
honour,  or  exactly  one,  or  two,  or  three  honours  are 

38.37.36        3   13.38.37        8   13.12.28      13.12.11. 
51.50.49'         '5L5O49'         '5L5O49'    51.50.49' 

50616   54834   17784   1716 


or 


124950'  124950'  124950'  124950' 


the  sum  of  these  fractions  being  unity ;  since  the  player 
must  certainly  hold  none,  or  one,  or  two,  or  three 
honours. 

9. —  If  an  honour  does  not  turn  up,  the  respective 
chances  that  the  player,  who  is  not  the  dealer,  should 
hold  none,  or  one,  or  two,  or  three,  or  four  honours  are 

38.37.36.35        ,    13.38.37.36       g    13.12.38.37 
51.50.49.48 '         *  51.50.49.48 '      '  '  5T.50.49.48 ' 

4    13.12.11.38       13.12.11.10. 
'51.50.49.48'     51.50.49.48' 

73815   109668  54834   10868    715 


or 


249900'  249900'  249900'  249900'  249900 


138  CHANCE. 

10. — Before  it  is  known  whether  an  honour  will 
turn  up,  the  respective  chances  that  a  player,  who  is 
not  the  dealer,  should  hold  none,  or  one,  or  two,  or 
three,  or  four  honours  are 

82251      109668     48906       _8_580_       _495_ 
249900'  249900'  249900'  249<TOO'  249900' 

the  sum  of  these  fractions  being  unity. 


EXAMPLES    ON     CHANCE. 

1. — If  ten  persons  form  a  ring,  what  is  the  chance 
that  two  assigned  persons  will  be  together  ? 

2. —  If  ten  persons  stand  in  a  line,  what  is  the  chance 
that  two  assigned  persons  will  stand  together  ? 

3 — If  two  letters  are  selected  at  random  out  of  the 
alphabet,  what  is  the  chance  that  both  are  vowels  ? 

4. — Compare  the  chances  of  throwing  four  with  one 
die,  eight  with  two  dice,  and  twelve  with  three  dice, 
having  two  trials  in  each  case. 

5.  —  A  bag  contains  four  red  balls  and  two  white. 
Three  times  in  succession  a  ball  is  drawn  and  replaced. 
Find  the  chance  that  a  red  ball  is  drawn  each  time. 

6. — What  is  the  probability  of  throwing  not  more 
than  eight  in  a  single  throw,  with  three  dice  ? 


EXAMPLES.  139 

7. — A  bag  contains  six  black  balls  and  one  red.  A 
person  is  to  draw  them  out  in  succession,  and  is  to 
receive  a  shilling  for  every  ball  he  draws  until  he  draws 
the  red  one.  What  is  his  expectation  ? 

8.  —  There  are  ten  tickets,  five  of  which  are  num 
bered  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  and  the  other  five  are  blank.  What 
is  the  probability  of  drawing  a  total  of  ten  in  three 
trials,  one  ticket  being  drawn  out  and  replaced  at  each 
trial  ? 

9. — What  is  the  probability  in  the  preceding  question 
if  the  tickets  are  not  replaced  ? 

10. — A  person  has  ten  coins,  which  he  throws  down 
in  succession.  He  is  to  receive  one  shilling  if  the  first 
falls  head,  two  shillings  more  if  the  second  also  falls 
head,  four  shillings  more  if  the  third  also  falls  head, 
and  so  on,  the  amount  doubling  each  time ;  but  as  soon 
as  a  coin  falls  tail,  he  ceases  to  receive  anything.  What 
is  the  value  of  his  expectation  ? 

11. — A  and  B  play  at  chess,  and  A  wins  on  an 
average  two  games  out  of  three.  Find  the  chance  of  A 
winning  four  games  out  of  the  first  six  that  are  not 
drawn. 

12. — A  and  B  play  at  chess,  and  A  wins  on  an 
average  five  games  out  of  nine.  Find  ^4's  chance  of 


140  CHANCE. 

winning  a  majority  (1)  out  of  three  games,  (2)  out  of 
nine  games,  (3)  out  of  four  games,  drawn  games  not 
being  counted. 

13. — If  the  odds  on  every  game  between  two  players 
are  two  to  one  in  favour  of  the  winner  of  the  preceding 
game,  what  is  the  chance  that  he  who  wins  the  first 
game,  shall  win  at  least  two  out  of  the  next  three  ? 

14. — A)  B,  C  play  at  a  game  in  which  each  has  a 
separate  score,  and  the  game  is  won  by  the  player  who 
first  scores  two  points.  If  the  chances  are  respectively 
2,  3,  g,  that  any  point  is  scored  by  A,  B,  C,  find  the 
respective  chances  of  the  three  players  winning  the 
game. 

15. — Assuming  the  results  stated  on  page  99,  what 
are  the  odds  against  a  person  aged  thirty  living  to  be 
seventy  ? 

16. — What  is  the  chance  that  three  persons,  aged 
respectively  30,  40,  and  50,  will  be  all  alive  twenty 
years  hence,  and  what  is  the  chance  that  at  least  two 
of  them  will  be  alive  ? 

17. — Four  flies  come  into  a  room  in  which  there  are 
four  lumps  of  sugar,  of  different  degrees  of  attractive 
ness,  proportional  to  the  numbers  8,  9,  10,  12 ;  what  is 
the  chance  that  the  flies  will  all  select  different  lumps  ? 


EXAMPLES.  141 

18.  —  Shew  that  the  odds  are  eleven  to  three  against 
a  month  selected  at  random,  containing  portions  of  six 
different  weeks. 

19. — Reference  is  made  to  a  month  which  contains 
portions  of  six  different  weeks ;  what  is  the  chance  that 
it  contains  thirty-one  days  ? 

20. — A  living  man  is  known  to  be  between  thirty  and 
fifty  years  old,  and  the  odds  are  estimated  at  three  to 
two  that  he  is  over  forty.  If  he  now  die,  what  do  these 
odds  become  ?  (See  page  99.) 


APPENDIX. 

PERMUTATIONS   AND    COMBINATIONS   TREATED 
ALGEBRAICALLY. 

DEFINITION  I.  A  collection  of  r  things  in  a  par 
ticular  order  is  called  a  permutation  or  arrangement  of 
r  things. 

DEFINITION  II.  A  collection  of  r  things  without 
regard  to  order  is  called  a  combination  or  selection 
of  r  things. 

PEOPOSITION   I. 

If  one  operation  can  be  performed  in  m  ways,  and 
('when  it  lias  been  performed  in  any  way)  a  second 
operation  can  then  be  performed  in  n  ways,  there  will 
be  mn  ways  of  performing  the  two  operations. 

For  if  we  confine  our  attention  to  the  case  in  which 
the  former  operation  is  performed  in  its  first  way,  we 
can  associate  with  this  way  any  of  the  n  ways  of  per 
forming  the  latter  operation :  and  thus  we  shall  have 
n  ways  of  performing  the  two  operations,  without  re- 


PERMUTATIONS    AND    COMBINATIONS.  143 

cognising  more  than  the  first  way  of  performing  the 
former  one. 

Then,  if  we  consider  the  second  way  of  performing 
the  former  operation,  we  can  associate  with  this  way 
any  of  the  n  ways  of  performing  the  latter  operation : 
and  thus  we  shall  have  n  ways  of  performing  the  two 
operations,  using  only  the  second  way  of  performing  the 
former  one. 

And  so,  corresponding  to  each  of  the  m  ways  of 
performing  the  former  operation,  we  shall  have  n  ways 
of  performing  the  two  operations. 

Hence,  altogether  we  shall  have  m  times  n,  or  mn 
ways  of  performing  the  two  operations.  Q.  E.  D. 

PROPOSITION    II. 

If  one  operation  can  be  performed  in  m  ways,  and 
then  a  second  can  be  performed  in  n  ways,  and  then  a 
third  in  r  ways,  and  then  a  fourth  in  s  ways  (and  so 
on),  the,  number  of  ways  of  performing  all  the  opera 
tions  will  be  m  x  n  x  r  x  s  x  &c. 

For  by  Prop.  L,  the  first  and  second  can  be  per 
formed  in  mn  ways. 

Then  if  we  treat  these  two  as  forming  one  complete 
operation,  and  associate  with  it  the  third  operation 
(which  can  be  performed  in  r  ways),  it  follows  again 
from  Prop.  I.,  that  both  these  can  be  performed  in 
mn  x  r  different  ways.  That  is,  the  first,  second,  and 


144  APPENDIX. 

third  of  the   original  operations  can  be  performed  in 
mnr  ways. 

Again  if  we  treat  these  three  as  forming  one  complete 
operation,  and  associate  with  it  the  fourth  operation 
(which  can  he  performed  in  s  ways),  it  follows  again 
from  Prop.  I.  that  both  these  can  be  performed  in 
mnr  x  s  different  ways.  That  is,  the  first,  second, 
third,  and  fourth  operations  can  be  performed  in  mnrs 
ways,  and  so  on.  Q.  E.  D. 

COROLLARY. — If  there  be  x  operations  which  can  be 
performed  successively  in  m  ways  each,  then  all  can  be 
performed  in  mx  ways. 

This  follows  from  the  proposition,  by  considering  the 
particular  case  in  which  m,  n,  r,  s,  &c.,  are  all  equal. 

EXAMPLES.  —  If  there  are  p  candidates  for  the  office 
of  president,  s  candidates  for  that  of  secretary,  and  t 
candidates  for  that  of  treasurer,  the  election  of  the 
three  officers  can  be  made  in  pst  different  ways. 

If  a  telegraph  has  m  arms,  and  each  arm  is  capable 
of  n  different  positions,  including  the  position  of  rest, 
the  number  of  signals  that  can  be  made  is  nm-l. 

If  there  be  x  things  to  be  given  to  n  persons,  nx  will 
represent  the  whole  number  of  different  ways  in  which 
they  may  be  given. 


PERMUTATIONS   AND   COMBINATIONS.  145 


PKOPOSITION  III. 

The  number  of  different  orders  in  which  n  different 
things  can  be  arranged  is 

n  (n-l)  (w-2) 3.2.1. 

For  having  to  arrange  the  n  things,  we  may  arrive 
at  any  possible  arrangement,  by  taking  them  one  by 
one,  and  placing  them  in  the  n  places  in  order. 

The  first  place  may  be  filled  up  by  any  of  the  n 
things  :  that  is,  it  may  be  filled  up  in  n  different  ways. 

Then  the  second  place  may  be  filled  up  by  any  of 
the  n-l  things  that  are  left:  that  is,  it  may  be  filled 
up  in  n-l  different  ways. 

Then  the  third  place  may  be  filled  up  by  any  of  the 
w-2  things  that  are  now  left :  that  is,  it  may  be  filled 
up  in  n- 2  different  ways. 

Similarly  the  fourth  place  may  be  filled  up  in  n-  3 
ways,  the  fifth  in  n—4  ways,  and  so  on ;  and  ultimately 
the  last  place  may  be  filled  up  in  only  one  way. 

Hence  (Prop.  II.)  the  whole  number  of  ways  of 
filling  up  all  the  places,  or  making  the  whole  arrange 
ment,  is  the  continued  product  of  all  these  numbers,  or 

n  (n-l)  (n-2) 3.2.1. 

NOTE.  —  The  continued  product  of  all  integers  from 
1  to  n  is  generally  denoted  by  the  symbol  \n. 


146  APPENDIX. 

COROLLARY. — If  n  given  things  have  to  be  devoted  to 
n  given  objects,  one  to  each,  the  distribution  can  be 
made  in  n  ways. 

EXAMPLES. — The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  persons 
can  stand  in  a  row  is  |w.  The  number  of  ways  in 
which  they  can  form  a  ring  is  \n  ~  1.  (See  page  23.) 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  m  ladies  and  m  gentle 
men  can  form  a  ring,  no  two  ladies  being  together, 
is  m,  \m  -  1. 


PKOPOSITION  IV. 

Out  of  n  different  things,  the  number  of  ways  in 
which  an  arrangement  of  r  things  can  be  made  is 

n  (n-l)  (w-2)  .  .  .  to  r  factors, 
or  n  (n-l)  (n-%)  .  .  .  (n-r  +  1). 

For  we  have  to  fill  up  r  different  places  in  order  with 
some  of  the  n  given  things.  As  in  the  last  proposition, 
the  first  place  can  be  filled  up  in  n  ways,  the  second 
in  n-l  ways,  the  third  in  ft -2  ways ;  and  so  on  for  all 
the  r  places. 

Hence  the  whole  number  of  ways  of  filling  up  all 
the  r  places,  or  making  the  required  arrangement,  is 

n  (n-l)  (?i-2)    ...    to  r  factors. 


PEKMUTATIONS   AND    COMBINATIONS.  147 

Or,  observing  that  the 

1st  factor  is  n, 

2nd       „        n-1, 

3rd        „        n-2, 

&c.  &c. 

rth         ,,        n-(r-l)  or  n-r  +  1, 

we  may  write  the  result, — 

n  (w-1)  (w-2)    .    .    .    (n-r  +  1). 

EXAMPLE. —  The  number  of  times  a  company  of  mn 
men  can  form  a  rectangular  column,  having  m  men  in 
front,  so  as  to  present  a  different  front  each  time,  is 
mn  (nut— 1)  (mn  —  2)  ....  (mn  —  m -\-  1). 

PROPOSITION  V. 

Out  of  n  different  things,  when  each  may  be  repeated 
as  often  as  ive  please,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  an 
arrangement  of  r  things  can  be  made  is  nr. 

For  the  first  place  can  be  filled  up  (as  before)  in  n 
ways,  and  when  it  is  filled  up  the  second  place  can  also 
be  filled  up  in  n  ways  (since  we  are  not  now  precluded 
from  repeating  the  selection  already  made) ;  and  so  the 
third  can  be  filled  up  in  n  ways,  and  so  on,  for  all  the 
r  places. 

Hence  (Prop.  II.,  Cor.)  all  the  r  places  can  be 
filled  up,  or  the  whole  arrangement  can  be  made,  in 
nr  different  ways. 


148  APPENDIX. 

EXAMPLE. — In  the  ordinary  scale  of  notation  10r-  1 
different  numbers  can  be  made,  each  consisting  of  not 
more  than  r  figures. 


PKOPOSITION    VI. 

The  number  of  ways  in  ivhich  x  +  y  things  can  be 
divided  into  two  classes,  so  that  one  may  contain  x  and 
the  other  y  thing  s9  is 

\x  +  y 


x  \y 

For  suppose  N  represents  the  number  of  ways  in 
which  the  division  could  be  made ;  then  the  things  in 
the  first  class  can  be  arranged  in  x  different  orders 
(Prop.  III.),  and  the  things  in  the  second  class  in  \y_ 
different  orders,  and  therefore  the  whole  set  of  x  +  y 
things  can  be  arranged  in  x  places  of  one  class,  and  y 
places  of  another  class,  in  N  .  x .  \y  different  ways 
(Prop.  II.).  But  this  must  be  the  same  as  the  number 
of  ways  in  which  the  whole  set  of  x  +  y  things  can  be 
arranged  into  any  x  +  y  different  places,  which,  by 
Prop.  III.,  is  \x  +  y.  Hence  we  have  the  equation 


or  N 


=  \z_+_y, 

\x  +  y 


PERMUTATIONS   AND   COMBINATIONS.  149 

That  is,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  the  required 
division  can  be  made  is 


y 


which  was  to  be  proved. 


PKOPOSITION    VII. 

The  number  of  ivays  in  which  x  +  y  +  z  things  can 
be  divided  into  three  classes,  so  that  they  may  contain 
x,  y,  and  z  things  severally,  is 

\x  +  y  +  z 

\x_  \y  I* 

For,  by  Prop.  VI.,  the  x  +  y  +  z  things  can  be 
divided  into  two  classes,  containing  x  and  y  +  z 
things  in 


ways  ;  and  then  the  class  of  y  +  z  things  can  be  sub 
divided  into  two  classes,  containing  y  and  z  things  in 

\y  +  * 

Tif" 

Therefore  the  three  classes  of  x,  y,  z  things  can  be 
made  in 

\x  +  y  +  z          \y_±_^  \x  +  y  +  z 


or 


x   y  +  z  \y   z    '  \x  \y  \z_ 

ways  (Prop.  I.),  which  was  to  be  proved. 


150  APPENDIX. 

COROLLARY.  — We  might  similarly  extend  the  reason 
ing  if  there  were  any  more  classes.  Thus,  the  number 
of  ways  in  ivliich  v  +  w  +  x  +  y  +  z  things  can  be  divided 
into  jive  classes,  containing  respectively  v,  w,  x,  y,  z 

things,  is 

\v  +  w  +  x  +  y  +  z 


\v   w   x  \y  \z 

EXAMPLES.—  The  number  of  different  ways  in  which 
2w  boys  can  divide  themselves  into  two  equal  parties,  to 
play  a  game,  is 


The  number  of  ways  in  which  mn  things  can  be 
divided  into  m  parcels,  of  n  things  each,  is 


mn 


PEOPOSITION  VIII. 

The  number  of  different  orders  in  which  n  things  can 
be  arranged,  whereof  p  are  all  alike  (of  one  sort},  q 
all  alike  (of  another  sort),  r  all  alike  (of  another 
sortj,  and  the  rest  all  different  is 


IP  \q 


PERMUTATIONS   AND   COMBINATIONS.  151 

For  the  operation  of  making  this  arrangement  may 
be  resolved  into  the  several  operations  following  :  — 

(1)  to   divide   the   n  places  which  have  to  be 
filled  up  into  sets  of  p  places,  q  places,  r  places,  and 
n-p-q-r  places  respectively: 

(2)  to  place  the  p  things  all  alike  in  the  set  of 
p  places,  the  q  things  all  alike  in  the  set  of  q  places, 
the  r  things  all  alike  in  the  set  of  r  places  : 

(3)  to  arrange  the  remaining  n-p-q-r  things 
which  are  all  different  in  the  remaining  set  of  n-p-q-r 
places. 

Now  the  operation  (1)  can  be  performed,  by  Prop. 

VII.,  in 

\n 


\P  \q   r  \n-p-q-r 

different  ways  :  the  operation  (2)  can  be  performed  in 
only  one  way:  the  operation  (3),  by  Prop.  III.,  in 
\n-p-q-r  ways. 

Hence,  (Prop.  II.)  the  whole  operation  can  be  per 
formed  in 


n -p-q- r ,  or 7    [.. 

\p  \q  \r  \n—p—q—r  \p  \q  \r 

different  ways.     Q.  E.  D. 

COROLLARY.  —  The  same  argument  would  apply  if 
the  number  of  sets  of  things  alike  were  any  other  than 


152  APPENDIX. 

three.  Thus,  for  instance,  the  number  of  orders  in 
which  n  things  can  be  arranged)  whereof  p  are  alike, 
q  others  alike,  r  others  alike,  s  others  alike,  and  t  others 
alike,  is 


\P  |«  \r  |s  |* 

EXAMPLE.  —  If  there  be  m  copies  of  each  of  n 
different  volumes,  the  number  of  different  orders  in 
which  they  can  be  arranged  on  one  shelf  is 


PKOPOSITION    IX. 

Out  of  n  different  things,  the  number  of  different 
ivays  in  which  a  selection  of  r  tilings  can  be  made,  is 
the  same  as  the  number  of  different  ways  in  which  a 
selection  of  n-r  things  can  be  made,  and  is 


r  n-r 


For  either  operation  simply  requires  the  n  things  to  be 
divided  into  two  sets  of  r  and  n—r  things  respectively, 
whereof  one  set  is  to  be  taken  and  the  other  left. 

Therefore  (by  the  last  proposition),  whichever  set  be 
rejected,  the  operation  can  be  performed  in 

n 


r  n-r 


different  ways. 


PERMUTATIONS   AND   COMBINATIONS.  153 

The  expression 


\r  n-r 
may  be  written 

n  (n-1)  (n-2)  . ^  3.2.1 

r.  (n-r)  (n-r-1)    .  .  .  3.2.1 

or,  dividing   the   numerator   and   denominator  of  the 
fraction  by  all  the  successive  integers  from  1  to  n-r, 

n  (n-1)  (n-2) (n-r  +  1) 


This  result  might  have  been  obtained  quite  inde 
pendently,  as  follows  :  — 

Let  x  represent  the  number  of  ways  of  making  a 
selection  of  r  things  out  of  n  things.  The  r  things 
thus  selected  might  be  arranged  (Prop.  III.)  in  \r 
different  orders.  Therefore  (Prop.  I.)  x  x  r  is  the 
number  of  ways  in  which  r  things  can  be  selected  out 
of  n  things,  and  arranged  in  order.  But  by  Prop.  IV. 

this  can  be  done  in  n  (n-1)  (n-2) (n-r  +  1) 

different  ways.     Therefore  we  have  the  equation 

x  x  |r  =  n(n-l)  (n-2) (n-r+1), 

which  gives  us 

n  (n-1)  (n-2) (n-r+1) 

x  =  -  —— 

\r 

the  required  expression. 


154  APPENDIX. 

EXAMPLES.  —  The  number  of  ways  in  which  a  com 
mittee  of  p  liberals  and  q  conservatives  can  be  selected 
out  of  m  liberals  and  n  conservatives,  is 


m 


\P  \m-p        \q  \n-q  ' 

If  there  be  n-l  sets  containing  2&,  3&,  4a,  .  .  (n-l)a 
things  respectively,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  a 
selection  can  be  made,  consisting  of  a  things  out  of 
each  set,  is 


|8a  \4a 

x  ---=—  x    _~"     x    &c.   .   .   .    x 


la  la 


a 


\na 
or 


PROPOSITION    X. 

The  ivhole  number  of  ways  in  which  a  selection  can 
be  made  out  of  n  different  things  is  2n  —  1. 

For  each  thing  can  be  either  taken  or  left ;  that  is,  it 
can  disposed  of  in  two  ways.  Therefore  (Prop.  II., 
Cor.)  all  the  things  can  be  disposed  of  in  2n  ways. 
This,  however,  includes  the  case  in  which  all  the 
things  are  rejected,  which  is  inadmissible ;  therefore 
the  whole  number  of  admissible  ways  is  2W- 1.  Q.  E.  p. 


PERMUTATIONS    AND    COMBINATIONS.  155 

PROPOSITION    XI. 

The  whole  number  of  ways  in  which  a  selection 
can  be  made  out  of  p  +  q  +  r  +  &c.,  things,  whereof 
p  are  all  alike  (of  one  sortj,  q  all  alike  (of  another 
sortj,  r  all  alike  (of  another  sort),  dc.,  is 

(p  +  l)(q  +  1)  (r  +  1) dc.   -  1. 

For,  of  the  set  of  p  things  all  alike,  we  may  take 
either  0  or  1  or  2  or  3  or  &c.  or  p,  and  reject  all 
the  rest;  that  is,  the  p  things  can  be  disposed  of  in 
p  +  1  ways.  Similarly,  the  q  things  can  be  disposed  of 
in  q  +  1  ways,  the  r  things  in  r  -f-  1  ways,  and  so  on. 
Hence  (Kule  II.)  all  the  things  can  be  disposed  of  in 
(p  +  I)  (q  +  1)  (r  +  1) ways.  This,  how 
ever,  includes  the  case  in  which  all  the  things  are 
rejected,  which  is  inadmissible ;  therefore  the  whole 
number  of  admissible  ways  is 

(P  +  1)  (q  +  1)  (r  +  1)  .   .  .  .  dc.  -  1. 

Q.    E.    D. 

EXAMPLE. — If  there  be  m  sorts  of  things  and  n 
things  of  each  sort,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  a 
selection  can  be  made  from  them  is  (n  +  l)m  —  1. 

If  there  be  m  sorts  of  things,  and  one  thing  of  the 
first  sort,  two  of  the  second,  three  of  the  third,  and  so 
on,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  a  selection  can  be 
made  from  them  is  w  +  1  -  1. 


156  APPENDIX. 

PEOPOSITION    XII. 
A  NEW  PROOF  OF  THE  BINOMIAL  THEOREM. 

The  Binomial  Theorem  was  first  published  by  Sir 
Isaac  Newton,  who  was  Lucasian  Professor  of  Mathe 
matics  at  Cambridge  from  1669  to  1702.  It  furnishes 
a  ready  method  of  raising  any  given  binomial  ex 
pression  to  any  required  power. 

We  proceed  to  consider  a  question  of  combinations, 
and,  from  our  results,  to  deduce  a  proof  of  the  binomial 
theorem,  applicable  to  all  cases  in  which  the  exponent 
is  a  positive  integer. 


i. — A  painter  has  x  +  y  colours,  of  which  x 
are  dark  and  y  are  light  colours.  He  has  to  paint  n 
croquet-balls  (all  of  different  sizes),  each  ball  being  one 
colour,  but  as  many  balls  as  he  pleases  the  same  colour. 
In  how  many  ways  can  he  paint  the  balls  ? 

Answer  I. — Since  each  ball  can  be  painted  with  any 
one  of  the  x  +  y  colours,  and  there  are  n  balls,  the 
whole  number  of  different  ways  in  which  the  work  can 
be  done  is  (by  Prop.  II.,  Cor.) 

(x  +  y)\ 

Answer  II. — If  he  paint  all  the  balls  dark,  each  can 
be  painted  in  x  different  ways ;  therefore  the  work  can 
be  done  in  xn  different  ways. 

If  he  paint  one  light  and  the  rest  dark,  the  selection 
of  the  one  to  be  light  can  be  made  in  n  ways;  then  the 


PERMUTATIONS   AND   COMBINATIONS.  157 

n—  1  can  be  painted  dark  in  xn~l  ways,  and  the  one 
light  in  y  ways;  therefore  the  work  can  be  done  in 
n  xn~ly,  or,  as  we  will  write  it  for  the  sake  of 
symmetry, 


different  ways. 

If  he  paint  two  light  and  the  rest  dark,  the  selection 
of  the  two  to  be  light  can  be  made  in 

n(n-~L) 
1.2 

ways  (Prop.  IX.),  then  the  ?i-2  can  be  painted  dark  in 
xn~2  ways,  and  the  two  light  in  y*  ways :  therefore  the 
work  can  be  done  in 


n_2  o 


ways. 


If  he  paint  three  light  and  the  rest  dark,  the  selec 
tion  of  the  three  to  be  light  can  be  made  in 

n(»-J)(n-2) 


1.2.3 

ways  (Prop.  IX.),  then  the  n-3  can  be  painted  dark  in 
xn~*  ways,  and  the  three  light  in  y3  ways  :  therefore  the 
work  can  be  done  in 


n-         ,-.. 
1.2.3 


ways. 


158  APPENDIX. 

And  so  on;  until  finally  we  consider  the  case  in  which 
all  are  light,  in  which  case  the  work  can  be  done  in  yn 
ways. 

Hence  the  whole  number  of  ways  in  which  the  work 
can  be  done  is  the  sum  of  the  series 


which  will  have  n  +  1  terms  altogether. 

The  Binomial  Theorem.  —  The  two  answers  to  the 
question  just  investigated  must  give  the  same  result 
numerically,  or  the  two  algebraical  results  must  be 
equal  :  therefore  we  have 

/  \n  n      ,      n      n-l          ,      n   (n~^-}      n-2     2 

(x  +  y)n  =  xn  +  -  xn  l  y  +      V12      xn  2  if 


We  are  thus  furnished  with  a  formula  by  which  we 
can  write  down  any  power  of  a  binomial  expression, 
as  a  series  of  terms,  consisting  of  powers  of  the  two 
original  terms.  The  statement  of  this  formula  is 
called  the  Binomial  Theorem. 

EXAMPLES.  — 


=  a?  -f  Sofy  +  Sxy'  +  y3. 


PERMUTATIONS   AND    COMBINATIONS.  159 

So,  (a-Zb? 


16  Z>4. 


The  theorem  will  hold  equally  if  we  have  any  two 
fractions,  -  and  T-  suppose,  instead  of  the  numbers  x 
and  11.  For 


r\n       (ps  +  qr\n      (ps  +  qr)n 
9j         \      qs      )  (qs)n       ' 


and  since  ps  and  qr  are  integers,  we  may  apply  the 
theorem,  and  write 

(ps  +  qr)n  =  (ps)n  +  1 


+  &c.  .  .  .  +  (qr)"; 

and  therefore  dividing  by  (qs)n  we  have 
P      TY  _  (P^"  -  nfv\"  ~r      n  (n~] 


_ 

—     1  ~T~  i  \    _.   / 


ql^l\ql      s^      1.2 


which  shews  that  the  expansion  follows  the  same  law 
when  any  fractions  are  substituted   for   the   terms  x 


and  y. 
EXAMPLES. — 


1 \« 

x 


160  APPENDIX. 


_flY_  -,_4M       4.3/aV    4.3.2/W     4.3.2.1/aV 
b)  ~      l\b)  +  1.2\6y      1.2.3W       1A8.4\6/ 


*  4.  ^Y-K+3^y^u8-2r 

^~To/    —  \  ct       ~r-i\n      I  ttl  T  «   ct\  n 


3/      1-22;  1.2.3V3 


It  may  here  be  observed  that  if  x  be  a  small  fraction, 
the  powers  #2,  xz,  &c.,  will  be  smaller  still,  and  will 
rapidly  become  inconsiderable  when  the  index  is 
increased.  Hence,  a  few  terms  of  the  expansion 

-  n  (n-1)  (rc-2)   , 


l  1.2.3 

will  give  an  approximately  true  value  for  (1  +  x)n  when 
x  is  small  compared  with  unity. 

It  is  proved  in  treatises  on  algebra  that  the  formula 
of  expansion 


still  holds  when  n  is  a  fractional  or  negative  index. 
But  in  this  case  the  series  is  interminable,  and  is  only 
of  practical  use  when  x  is  a  proper  fraction,  when  a 
finite  number  of  terms  will  give  an  approximate  value. 


PEEMTJTATIONS  AND  COMBINATIONS.  161 

EXAMPLES.  — 

To  find  the  square  root  of  \-x  in  ascending  powers 
of  x. 
We  have 


&c 


-     __          _  __  -* 

2     1.2  V2y   "    1.2.8  W  "  1.2.8.4         "      c* 


To  find  the  square  root  of  2. 
We  have 

98      100  _98      100/          1  \ 
"49"  49*100      49  V         50/ 
Therefore, 


50 

But,  as  in  the  last  example, 

/1~T~:L_1  _    JL      -1  fJLY-  —    f  — Y_ 
V       50"       100    L2UOOJ      1.2.8\10oJ  " 

-  1  -  -01  -  -00005  -  -0000005  -  -00000000625-  &c. 

=  •9899494936 

and  therefore,  multiplying  by  y 

-v/2  =  1-414213562... 


This  is  the  readiest  method  of  extracting  the  square 
root  of  2,  when  a  very  high  degree  of  accuracy  is 
required.  Very  little  labour  would  extend  the  result  to 
20  or  30  places  of  decimals.  The  binomial  theorem 


162  APPENDIX. 

may  be  similarly  applied  to  find  the  square  root  of  any 
other  number,  or  to  find  cube  roots  or  any  other  roots. 
Indeed  when  the  fifth,  seventh,  or  any  higher  root  of 
a  number  is  required,  this  method  is  the  only  prac 
ticable  one,  unless  tables  of  logarithms  are  employed ; 
and  it  has  the  advantage  over  the  method  by  loga 
rithms  of  bringing  the  result  to  any  degree  of  accuracy 
required. 


APPENDIX  II. 

DISTKIBUTIONS. 

Most  of  the  questions  of  Permutations  and  Combina 
tions  which  we  have  considered  have  involved  the 
division  of  a  given  series  of  things  into  two  parts,  one 
part  to  he  chosen,  and  the  other  rejected.  The  theorem 
expressed  arithmetically  in  Rule  VI.  (page  30),  and 
algebraically  in  Proposition  VII.  (page  149),  is  the 
only  one  in  which  we  have  contemplated  distribution 
into  more  than  two  classes.  But  as  the  number  of 
things  to  be  given  to  each  class  was  in  the  terms  of  that 
theorem  assigned,  the  problem  was  reduced  to  a  case  of 
successive  selection,  and  was  therefore  classed  with 
other  questions  of  combinations.  But  when  the  number 
of  elements  to  be  distributed  to  each  several  class  is 
unassigned,  and  left  to  the  exercise  of  a  further  choice, 
the  character  of  the  problem  is  very  much  altered,  and 
the  problem  ranks  among  a  large  variety  which  we  class 
together  as  problems  of  Distribution. 

Distribution  is  the  separation  of  a  series  of  elements 
into  a  series  of  classes.  The  great  variety  that  exists 
among  problems  of  distribution  may  be  mostly  traced 
to  five  principal  elements  of  distinction,  which  it  will 


164  APPENDIX  II. 

be  well  to  consider  in  detail  before  enunciating  the 
propositions  on  which  the  solution  of  the  problems  will 
depend. 

I. — The  things  to  be  distributed  may  be  different  or 
indifferent.  The  number  of  ways  of  distributing  five 
gifts  among  three  recipients,  will  greatly  depend  upon 
whether  the  gifts  are  all  alike  or  various.  If  they  are 
all  alike  (or,  though  unlike,  yet  indifferent  as  far  as  the 
purposes  of  the  problem  are  concerned),  the  only  ques 
tions  will  be  (i.)  whether  we  shall  divide  them  into  sets 
of  2,  2,  1  or  3,  1,  1,  and  (ii.)  how  we  shall  assign  the 
three  sets  to  the  three  individuals.  If  on  the  contrary 
the  five  gifts  are  essentially  different,  as  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,  then 
they  may  be  divided  into  sets  of  2,  2,  1  in  15  ways,  and 
into  sets  of  3,  1,  1  in  10  ways,  and  then  we  shall  have 
to  assign  the  three  sets  which  are  in  this  case  all 
essentially  different  (because  their  component  elements 
are  so),  to  the  three  individuals.  In  the  first  case,  the 
sets  could  be  formed  in  2  ways,  and  when  formed  in 
either  way  they  could  be  assigned  in  3  ways,  thus 
giving  a  complete  choice  of  6  distributions.  In  the 
second  case,  the  sets  could  be  formed  in  25  ways,  and 
when  formed  in  any  way  they  could  be  assigned  in  6 
ways,  thus  giving  a  complete  choice  of  150  dis 
tributions. 

II. — The  classes  into  which  the  things  are  to  be  dis 
tributed  may  be  themselves  different  or  indifferent.  We 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  165 

here  use  the  adjectives  different  or  indifferent  to  qualify 
the  abstract  classes  regarded  as  ends  or  objects  to  which 
the  articles  are  to  be  devoted,  without  any  reference  to 
a  posteriori  differences  existing  merely  in  differences  of 
distribution  into  the  classes. 

Where  five  gifts  were  to  be  distributed  to  three 
recipients,  the  distinct  personality  of  the  three  recipients 
made  the  classes  characteristically  different,  quite  apart 
from  the  consideration  of  the  differences  of  the  elements 
which  composed  them.  But  if  we  had  only  to  wrap  up 
five  books  in  three  different  parcels,  and  no  difference 
of  destination  were  assigned  to  the  parcels,  we  should 
speak  of  the  parcels  as  indifferent.  The  problem  would 
be  simply  to  divide  the  five  things  into  three  sets,  with 
out  assigning  to  the  sets  any  particular  order.  The 
distribution  could  be  made  in  2  ways  if  the  things 
themselves  were  indifferent,  and  in  25  ways  if  they 
were  different. 

III. — The  order  of  the  things  in  the  classes  may  be 
different  or  indifferent,  that  is,  the  classes  may  contain 
permutations  or  combinations.  Of  course  this  distinc 
tion  can  only  arise  when  the  things  themselves  are 
different,  for  we  cannot  recognise  any  order  among 
indifferent  elements.  We  shall  avoid  confusion  by  dis 
tinguishing  arranged  and  unarranged  classes  respectively 
as  groups  and  parcels.  If  three  men  are  to  divide  a 
set  of  books  amongst  them,  it  is  a  case  of  division  into 
parcels,  for  it  does  not  matter  in  what  order  or  arrange- 


166  APPENDIX   II. 

ment  any  particular  man  gets  his  books.  But 
if  a  series  of  flags  are  to  be  exhibited  as  a  signal 
on  three  masts,  it  is  a  case  of  division  into  groups, 
for  every  different  arrangement  of  the  same  flags 
on  any  particular  mast  would  constitute  a  different 
signal. 

IV. — It  may  or  may  not  be  permissible  to  leave  some 
of  the  possible  classes  empty.  It  will  entirely  depend 
upon  the  circumstances  out  of  which  the  problem  arises, 
whether  it  shall  be  necessary  to  place  at  least  one 
element  in  every  class,  or  whether  some  of  them  may 
be  left  vacant ;  in  fact,  whether  the  number  of  classes 
named  in  the  problem  is  named  as  a  limit  not  to  be 
transgressed,  or  as  a  condition  to  be  exactly  fulfilled. 
If  we  are  to  distribute  five  gifts  to  three  recipients,  it 
will  probably  be  expected,  and  unless  otherwise  ex 
pressly  stated  it  will  be  implied,  that  no  one  goes  away 
empty.  But  if  it  be  asked  how  many  signals  can  be 
displayed  by  the  aid  of  five  flags  on  a  three-masted 
ship,  it  will  be  necessary  to  include  the  signals  which 
could  be  given  by  placing  all  the  flags  on  one  mast,  or 
on  two  masts. 

V. — It  may  or  may  not  be  permissible  to  leave  some 
of  the  distributable  things  undistributed.  This  will  be 
illustrated  by  a  comparison  of  the  Propositions  XXV. 
and  XXVI.  below. 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  167 

Propositions  XIII.,  XIV.,  XV.,  and  XVI.  apply  to 
the  distribution  of  indifferent  things. 

The  XVII.  and  following  propositions  embrace  the 
different  cases  which  arise  in  the  distribution  of 
different  things. 

The  case  in  which  the  parcels  are  indifferent  as  well 
as  the  things  to  be  distributed  into  them,  is  reserved  to 
the  last,  as  presenting  peculiar  difficulty.  It  will  be 
found  treated  of  in  Prop.  XXVIII. 

PROPOSITION    XIII. 

The  number  of  ways  in  ivhich  n  indifferent  things 
can  be  distributed  into  r  different  parcels  (blank  lots 
being  inadmissible)  is  the  number  of  combinations  of 
n  —  1  things  taken  r—1  at  a  time. 

For  we  may  perform  the  operation  by  placing  the  n 
things  in  a  row,  then  placing  r— 1  points  of  partition 
amongst  them,  and  assigning  the  r  parts  thus  created, 
in  order,  to  the  r  parcels  in  order. 

Hence  the  number  of  ways  is  the  number  of  ways 
of  placing  r— 1  points  of  partition  in  a  selection 
out  of  n—~L  intervals.  Therefore  it  is  the  same  as  the 
number  of  combinations  of  n  —  1  things  taken  r— 1  at 
a  time.  Q.  E.  D. 

PROPOSITION    XIV. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  indifferent  things 


168  APPENDIX   II. 

can  be  distributed  into  r  different  parcels  (blank  lots 
being  admissible)  is  the  number  of  combinations  of 
n-\-r—  1  things  taken  r—~L  at  a  time. 

For  the  distribution  of  n  things,  when  blank  lots  are 
admissible,  is  the  same  as  the  distribution  of  n  +  r 
things  when  they  are  not  admissible,  since  in  the 
latter  case  we  have  to  place  one  thing  in  each  of  the  r 
parcels,  and  then  to  distribute  the  remainder  as  if 
blank  lots  were  admissible.  Hence,  writing  n  +  r  for 
n  in  the  result  of  Proposition  XIII. ,  we  obtain  the 
number  required. 

EXAMPLES.  —  Twenty  shots  are  to  be  fired;  the  work 

.  19  .  18.  17 
can  be  distributed  among  four  guns  m-^ — ^ — =-    or 

1    .   -a   .   O 

969  ways,  without  leaving  any  gun  unemployed.  Or, 
neglecting  this  restriction,  the  work  can  be  done  in 
23.22.21 


1.2.3 


or  1771  ways. 


Again,  five  partners  in  a  game  require  to  score  36 
to  win.  The  number  of  ways  in  which  they  may  share 
this  score  (not  all  necessarily  contributing),  is 

40.39.38.37 
1.2.3.4 

or  91390  different  ways. 

Again,    in   how  many   ways  can   five   oranges   be 
distributed   amongst   seven   boys?    Evidently  two   or 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  169 

more  of  them  will  get  none.     The  answer  is  462,  viz., 

11.10.9.8.7.6 
1.2.3.4.5.6' 


PBOPOSITION    XV. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  indifferent  things 
can  be  distributed  into  r  different  parcels,  no  parcel  to 
contain  less  than  q  things,  is  the  number  of  combina 
tions  of  n  —  l  —  r(q  —  l)  things  taken  r  at  a  time. 

For  if  we  first  place  q  things  in  each  of  the  r  parcels 
we  shall  have  n  —  qr  things  left,  and  it  will  only  remain 
to  distribute  them  among  the  same  r  parcels  according 
to  Proposition  XIV.,  which  shows  that  the  number  of 
ways  of  making  the  distribution  is  the  number  of  com 
binations  of  n  —  qr  +  r—  1  things  taken  r  at  a  time. 

Q.  E.  D. 

PKOPOSITION     XVI. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  indifferent  things 
can  be  distributed  into  r  different  parcels,  no  parcel  to 
contain  less    than   q  things,  nor   more   than  q+z  —  1 
things  is  the  coefficient  of  xn~qr  in  the  expansion  of 
'I-  of 


For  if  we  multiply  together  r  factors,  each  repre 
sented  by 


170  APPENDIX   II. 

we  shall  have  in  our  result  a  term  xn  for  every  way  in 
which  we  can  make  up  n  by  the  addition  of  one  index 
q  or  q  +  l  or  g  +  2  or  &c.,  or  q+z  —  1  from  each  of  the 
r  factors.  Hence  we  shall  have  xn  as  many  times  as 
there  are  ways  of  distributing  n  into  r  parts,  no  part 
less  than  q  nor  greater  than  q+z—I.  Therefore  the 
number  of  ways  of  so  distributing  n  is  the  coefficient 
of  xn  in  the  expansion  of 


or  of  xqr(l+x+x*+...xz-1Y 

which  is  the  coefficient  of  xn~qr  in  the  expansion  of 


-xK 

Q-E.D. 


EXAMPLE.  —  The  number  of  ways  in  which  four  persons, 
each  throwing  a  single  die  once,  can  score  17  amongst 
them  is  the  coefficient  of  #17'4  in  the  expansion  of 


\l-x 
Now 

'-&c. 


And  coefficient  of  x13  in  the  product 

=  !J14.15.16-4.8.9.10+6.2.3.4J 
=  104. 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  171 


PROPOSITION    XVII. 


The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  different  things  can 
be  distributed  into  r  different  parcels  is  rn,  when  blank 
lots  are  admissible. 

For  each  of  the  n  different  things  can  be  assigned  to 
any  one  of  the  r  parcels  without  thought  of  how  the 
others  are  disposed  of.  Hence  the  n  things  can  be 
(severally  and)  successively  disposed  of  in  r  ways  each, 
and  therefore  (Choice,  Rule  II.)  all  can  be  disposed  of  in 
r7*  different  ways.  Q.  E.  D. 

PROPOSITION  XVIII. 

When  blank  lots  are  not  admissible)  the  number  of 
ways  in  which  n  different  things  can  be  distributed  into 
r  different  parcels  is  [n_  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the 
expansion  of  (ex-l)r, 

Let  Nr  denote  the  number  of  ways  in  which  n  things 
can  be  distributed  into  r  different  parcels,  blank  lots 
being  inadmissible. 

Then  rNr-i  will  be  the  number  of  ways  in  which 
the  distribution  might  be  made  if  one  parcel  were  left 
blank. 

r  (r  — 1) 
So  -V~?|      -ZVr-a  will  be  the  number  of  ways  in  which 

the  distribution  might  be  made  if  two  parcels  were  left 
blank. 

And  so  on, 


172  APPENDIX   II. 

But  we  know  that  if  any  number  of  blank  lots  were 
admissible,  the  distribution  could  be  made  in  rn  different 
ways.  Therefore 

rn  =  Nr  +  |  AUi  +T-^~-  Nr.,  +  &c.  +  rNlf 

or,  if  we  establish  the  convention  that  Np  is  always  to 
be  replaced  by  Np)  we  may  write 


Similarly,         (r-l)n  = 


and  so  on. 

Now  multiply  these  equations  in  order  by  the  coeffi 
cients  in  the  expansion  of  (1  —  x)r,  and  add  (having 
regard  to  algebraical  sign)  ;  then  the  first  member  of  the 
resulting  equation  will  be 

rn-^(r-l)ra+r(7,'~1)(r-2)n-&c.  (tillit  stops) 

1  I.  la 

and  the  second  member,  since  the  sum  of  the  coefficients 
in  the  expansion  of  (1  -  x)r  is  zero,  will  be  {  (N+  1)  —  l}  r 
or  Nr  or  Nr.  Therefore 

Nr  =  r-_^(r-l)n+r^^(r-2r-&c.  till  it  stops. 

that  is,  (Todhunter's  Algebra,  Art.  549.) 

Nr  =  \n  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the  expansion  of 
(ex-l)r.  Q.  E.  D. 

EXAMPLES.  —  The  number  of  ways  in  which  five 
different  commissions  can  be  executed  by  three  mes 
sengers  is  35  or  243.  But  if  no  one  of  the  messengers 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  173 

is  to  be  unemployed,  the  number  of  ways  will  be  [5 
times  the  coefficient  of  x5  in  the  expansion  of  (ex— I)3. 
But 


=^+F+?+- 

Hence  the  number  of  ways  will  be  _  x  [5  or  150. 


PKOPOSITION    XIX. 

The  number  of  r-partitions  of  n  different  things,  i.  e. 
the  number  of  ways  in  which  n  different  things  can  be 
distributed  into  r  indifferent  parcels,  ivith  no  blank  lots, 
is  \n  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the  expansion  of 


For  every  way  of  distributing  the  things  into  r  indif 
ferent  parcels,  must  give  rise  to  \r  ways  of  distributing 
them  when  the  parcels  are  different.  Hence,  if  $r 
denote  the  number  of  partitions,  we  have,  by  compa 
rison  with  Prop.  XVIII., 


=  \n  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the  expansion  of 

(«•-  iy 

\r_  Q.  E.  D. 


174  APPENDIX   II. 

EXAMPLE. — To  divide  the  letters   a,  b,  c,  d,  e  into 
three  parcels.     The  numher  of  ways  will  be  [5  times 

the  coefficient  of  x*  in  the  expansion  of  (ex  —  I)3  -f-  [3  ; 

£ 
that  is  (as  in  the  last  example),  5.4  x  ^  =  25. 

The  twenty-five  divisions  are  easily  seen  to  be  ten 
such  as  abc,  d,  e,  and  fifteen  such  as  ab,  cd,  e. 


PKOPOSITION     XX. 

The  total  number  of  ways  in  which  n  different  things 
can  be  distributed  into  1,  2,  3  ...  or  n  indifferent  parcels 

/ 
is  \n  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the  expansion  of  — . 

t/ 

For  with  the  notation,  of  preceding  theorems,  we  have 
$1  =  I  w  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  e*  ~~1> 

Li 

f,=  («*-!)' 

12 
»,=  («•-!)'. 

L5 

and  so  on. 

Therefore  by  addition 

&  +  &+$.+  -  (Ml  it  stops,  i.  e.  ...  JJ 
is  equal  to  \n  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the  expan 
sion  of 

e>-l     (<?-!)*    (e'-iy 

'  ~~      ~~ +       ' 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  175 

this  last  series  being  carried  to  infinity  if  we  please, 
since  the  terms  beyond  the  nttl  do  not  involve  xn}  and 
therefore  the  inclusion  of  them  will  not  affect  the 
coefficient  of  xn. 

But  this  series  is  the  expansion  of  ee~—  1,  and  the 
coefficient  of  xn  therein  is  the  same  as  in  the  expansion 
of  eeX  ~*  or  ee*  -f-  e.  Hence 

&+§,+».+ «.+!. 

is  equal  to  \n  times  the  coefficient  of  xn  in  the  expan 
sion  of  J° 


e  Q.  E,  D. 

PROPOSITION     XXI. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  different  things  can 
be  arranged  in  r  different  groups  (with  no  blank  lots) 

is 

n  I  w — 1 


[»— r  [r— 1 

For  they  can  be  arranged  in  one  row  in  \n  ways,  and 
then  the  r  —  l  points  of  partition  can  be  placed  in  a 

\n-  1 
selection  of  the  n  —  1  intervals  in L — =--  ways. 

\n-r\r-\ 

But  the  number  of  ways  in  which  n  things  can  be 
arranged  in  r  different  groups  must  be  the  product  of 
these  two  numbers  (Choice,  Rule  L),  or 

\n  \n—I 
\n-r  [r-1*  Q.  E.  D. 

N 


176  APPENDIX    II. 


PROPOSITION    XXII. 

The  number  of  ways  in  which  n  different  things  can 
be  arranged  in  r  indifferent  groups  with  no  blank  lots 
is 

\n\n-l 
[r  \n—r  [r— 1 

For  it  is  plain  that  for  any  one  arrangement  in  this 
case  we  must  have  [r  arrangements  when  the  groups 

are  not  indifferent.     Hence  the  result  is  p  of  that  in 

\r 

Proposition  XXI.,  or 

lnln-1 


\r  \n  —  r  \r  —  \ 

Q.  E.  D. 

PROPOSITION    XXIII. 

The  total  number  of  ivays  in  ivhich  r  different 
arranged  groups  can  be  made  out  of  m  things  all 
differ  entf  is  the  coefficient  of  xm~T  in  the  expansion  of 

\m  ex 

d-*)'' 

blank  groups  being  inadmissible. 

For  if  we  use  n  of  the  things  at  a  time  the  groups 
can  be  made  (by  Theorem  XI.)  in 

?n  n  —  l 


\m—n  \n—r  \r—\ 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  177 

ways.      And    n    may    have    any   value   from  r  to    7?? 
inclusive.      Hence  the  required  number  is 


to  m  —  r  +  1  terms  k 

which  is   equal  to  the  coefficient  of  xm~r  in    the  pro 
duct   of   the   two  series 
r       r 


|  ?7i  xm^      Imx™-*-1       \m  , 

and  ...+  ~ 1.±= 1 — L_ _|_  &c<j 

\m— r     [m  —  r—l     [m  — r— 2 

which  are  respectively  the  expansions  of  (\—x)~r  and 
;m  ex.  Hence  the  required  number  is  the  coefficient 
of  xm~T  in  the  expansion  of 


(l-x)r  Q.  E.  D. 

PROPOSITION    XXIV. 

The  total  number  of  ways  in  which  r  indiiferent 
arranged  groups  can  be  made  out  of  m  tilings  all 
different  is  the  coefficient  of  xm~r  in  the  expansion  of 

[rn^e* 

[r_(l-xY' 
blank  lots  being  inadmissible. 

This  follows  from  the  previous  theorem,  as  Proposi 
tion  XXII.  from  Proposition  XXI. 


178  APPENDIX   II. 


PKOPOSITION    XXV. 

The  number  of  ivays  in  which  n  different  things  can 
be  arranged  in  r  different  groups  (blank  groups  being 
admissible  )  is 

[n+r-1 
[r^T~ 

For  they  can  be  arranged  in  one  row  in  [n  ways,  and 
then  the  r  —  1  points  of  partition  can  be  placed  in  the 
n+1  intervals  (including  the  ends  of  the  row)  in 


ways  by  Proposition  XIV. 

The  number  of  ways  required  is  the  product  of  these 
two  numbers  (Choice,  Rule  L),  or 

\n+r-l 


Q.  E.  D. 


PROPOSITION    XXVI. 


The  total  number  of  signals  that  can  be  made  by 
displaying  arrangements  out  of  m  flags  on  a  set  of  r 
masts,  where  each  mast  will  hold  any  number  of  flags, 
is  one  less  than  the  coefficient  of  xm  in  the  expansion  of 

[m  ex 

tt-*r' 

If  we  use  all  the  r  masts,  the  number  of  signals  is 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  179 

(by    Prop.    XXIII.)    the    coefficient    of    xm~r    in    the 
expansion  of 

[m  ex 

(!-«)' 

\m  exxr 

K—  the  coefficient  of  xm  in  expansion  of   L?  __ 
a-*) 

So,  if  we  use  r  —  1  given  masts,  the  number  of  signals 

I  jft      X       r—1 

is  the  coefficient  of  xm  in  the  expansion  of  L     = 


and  the  r—1  masts  can  be  selected  in  r  ways,  therefore 
the  number  of  signals 

r   I  m  ex  x*~l 
—  the  coefficient  of  xm  in  expansion  of  ^-.  b=.  _  —r) 

and  so  on  for  (r-2),  (r  —  3),  &c.  masts.  Hence,  the 
total  number  of  signals,  including  the  case  when  no 
flag  is  hoisted  is  the  coefficient  of  xm  in  the  expan 
sion  of 


or 


or 


to  r+1  terms }-, 


Hence,  excluding  the  case  when  no  flag  is  hoisted, 
the  number  of  signals  is  one  less  than  the  coefficient 
of  xm  in  the  expansion  of 

[m  ex 
(l~x)r '  Q.  E.  D. 


180  APPENDIX  II. 


PKOPOSITION  XXVII. 

To  find  the  number  of  ways  in  which  n  indifferent 
things  can  be  distributed  into  r  indifferent  parcels  (no 
blank  lotsj. 

OB 

To  find  the  number  of  different  r-partitions  of  n. 

Let  Pn,r  denote  the  number  of  r-partitions  of  n,  or 
the  number  of  ways  of  distributing  n  indifferent  ele 
ments  into  r  indifferent  parcels. 

Suppose  that  in  any  distribution,  x  is  the  smallest 
number  found  in  any  parcel.  Then  setting  aside  a 
parcel  which  contains  x,  all  the  other  parcels  contain 
not  less  than  x,  and  therefore  more  than  .7;-!.  If  we 
place  x  —  1  in  each  of  these  r—l  parcels,  the  distribution 
can  then  be  completed  by  distributing  the  remaining 
n— x—  (r  —  !)(#— l)or n  —  1  —  r(x—  1)  things  among  the 
same  r  —  l  parcels,  and  this  can  be  done  in  Pn-i-r(X-\\  r-i 
ways.  In  this  way  we  shall  obtain  all  the  distributions, 
by  giving  x  successively  all  its  possible  values.  But 
since  x  is  the  smallest  number  found  in  any  parcel,  x 

cannot   be   greater  than   the    greatest    integer   in    -. 

Denote  this  integer  by  '— ..    Then  x  must  have  all  values 
from  1  to  this  integer,  and  therefore 

Pn,r  =  -P»-l  r-l  +  Pr>-l-r,  r-l  +  P*-i-*rt  r-1  +     •  -  •    to  '-        terms. 


DISTRIBUTIONS.  181 

Now  it  is  plain  that  Pn>l  —  1  for  all  values  of  n. 


n 


Hence  Pn,z=Pn-i,i+Pn-3,i+Pn-5,i+  ...to  ~  terms 


Again  Pn3=Pn_ 

\n-l         lw-4 


...  to  57  terms 

dl 

n  —  7  In  . 

-—  +    .-  to    L  terms. 


2    |  2 

The  summation  will  depend  upon  the  form  of  n;    thus, 

2 

If  n= 6 


12 

n2-4 
12 


Therefore    Pn>8    is  always  the  integer  nearest  to  =-5 

whether  in  excess  or  defect. 

This  integer  is  conveniently  denoted  by  the  symbol 


12 


Again,  Pn)4=Pn-i,3+^-5.3+^-9>3+  ...  to  Lj  terms 

+  ...  to  -r,  terms. 


12 


12 


12 


182  APPENDIX   II. 

The  summation  will  depend  upon  the  form  of  n :  thus, 

n3_|_3^2 

If  n  =  12q         then  Pn>i=  ~^f~ 

w=12^  +  l  PM= jg- 

^  =  12^  +  2  PM~r" 


144 


144 

P   _^3+3rc 
^          144 


144 

P^3-^2-*' 


144 


144 


144 


144 


144 

Therefore  PM  is  always  the  integer  nearest  to 
when  w  is  even,  and  the  integer  nearest  to  - 


when  n  is  odd  :  or,  with  the  notation  introduced  above, 


*«M  = 


DISTRIBUTIONS. 

n*+3n2 


183 


144 


when  w  is  even  : 


144 


when  n  is  odd. 


By  a  like  process  we  may  deduce  successively  Pn)5, 
Pn>6,  &c.,  and  thus  we  may  find  Pn>r  for  any  values  of  n 
and  r,  although  we  cannot  write  down  a  general  expres 
sion  for  Pn>r  in  any  simple  terms. 

EXAMPLES. — There  are  twelve  3-partitions  of  12,  viz. 
11  10          147          237          336 
129          156          246          345 
138          228          255          444 

There  are  fifteen  4-partitions  of  12,  viz. 


1119 

1227 

2226 

1128 

1236 

2235 

1137 

1  2  4  0 

2244 

1146 

1335 

2334 

1155 

1344 

3333 

The  number  of  4-partitions  of  13  is  the  integer 
nearest  to  (rc3+3^2-9w)-^144  when  n=lB.  Therefore 
there  are  18  partitions,  viz. 


1 

1 

1 

10 

1 

2 

3 

7 

2 

2 

2 

7 

1 

1 

2 

9 

1 

2 

4 

6 

2 

2 

3 

6 

1 

1 

3 

8 

1 

2 

5 

5 

2 

2 

4 

5 

1 

1 

4 

7 

1 

3 

3 

6 

2 

3 

3 

5 

1 

1 

5 

6 

1 

3 

4 

5 

2 

3 

4 

4 

1 

2 

2 

8 

1 

4 

4 

4 

3 

3 

3 

4 

184  APPENDIX   II. 

To  find  the  number  of  ^-partitions  of  13. 
We  have  P1W=P1M+PW 
=  15  +  3 

-18. 
These  eighteen  partitions  may  be  exhibited  as  follows 


11119 

11236 

12244 

11128 

11245 

12334 

11137 

11335 

13833 

11146 

11344 

22225 

11155 

12226 

22234 

11227 

12235 

22333 

APPENDIX  m, 


DERANGEMENTS 


WHEN  we  place  a  series  of  elements  in  a  particular 
order  we  are  said  to  arrange  them.  But  if  they  have 
been  already  arranged,  or  if  they  have  a  proper  order 
of  their  own,  and  we  place  them  in  other  order,  we  are 
said  to  derange  them.  Thus  derangement  implies  a 
previous  arrangement  in  which  each  element  had  its 
own  proper  place,  either  naturally  belonging  to  it  or 
arbitrarily  assigned  to  it. 

The  following  Notation  is  useful : — 

It  is  proved,  in  treatises  on  algebra,  that  if  e  be  the 
base  of  Napierian  logarithms  then,  whatever  be  the  value 
of  x  positive  or  negative, 

ex=l  +  x  +  f^-  +  *~+&c. 

Lf      L? 

This  series  is  continued  to  infinity,  but  by  suffixing 
an  integer  to  en  we  obtain  a  symbol  which  conveniently 
expresses  the  sum  of  the  same  series  continued  only  as 
far  as  the  term  in  which  that  integer  is  the  index  of  x. 
Thus— 


186  APPENDIX   III. 


Let  J  denote  the  operation  of  changing  any  factorial 
into  the  next  inferior  factorial,  as  \n  into  \n  —  1,  or 
\n  —  1  into  [w  —  2.  And  let  J  J  or  J2  indicate  that  the 
operation  is  to  be  performed  a  second  time  upon  the 
result  of  the  first,  so  that  J2  operating  on  \n  produces 
\n  —  2,  and  so  on. 

Then     J  [n  =  \n  -  1 

J2  [n  =  [n  -  2 

J3  [n  =  |n-3 

Jr  [n  =  [n  —  r 

Thus  we  may  write  — 
[n.ex=  [n  +      [n-La;  +  n      ~1}  [n 


=  (1+ 

where  it  is  understood  that  (l-\-xJ)n  is  to  be  expanded 
by  the  law  of  the  binomial  theorem,  and  every  term  is 
then  to  operate  upon  \n. 

As  a  particular  case  we  may  write 

1.^  =  (l-J)\[n. 


DERANGEMENTS.  187 

PKOPOSITION   XXVIII. 

The  number  of  derangements  of  a  set  of  elements  is 
one  less  than  the  number  of  permutations  of  the  elements. 

For  of  all  the  permutations,  one  must  give  the  proper 
order  of  the  elements,  and  all  the  rest  must  be  derange 
ments. 

PKOPOSITION    XXIX. 

The  number  of  icays  in  which  a  row.  of  n  elements 
may  be  so  deranged  that  no  element  shall  be  in  its 
proper  place  is  [n.e~l. 

Let  a,  /3,  y,  ....  x  denote  the  n  elements,  and  let  N 
represent  the  number  of  ways  in  which  they  can  be 
permuted  when  unrestricted  by  any  condition. 

Also  let  (A)  express  the  condition  that  a  is  in  its 
proper  place  and  (a)  the  condition  that  a  is  out  of  its 
proper  place.  Let  (B)  and  (b)  denote  the  same  conditions 
with  respect  to  |8  ;  and  so  on. 

[With  this  notation  N  (ACdk)  will  stand  for  the  words, 
"  The  number  of  permutations  of  the  n  things  subject 
to  the  conditions  that  a  and  y  are  in  their  proper  places 
and  8  and  K  not  in  their  proper  places"} 

Then  we  have 

N  =  [n 

and  N(A)  =  \n-l 

But  since  every  permutation  must  satisfy   one  and 


188  APPENDIX    III. 

only  one  of  the  conditions  expressed  by  (^4)  and  (a)  it 
follows  that 

N(A)  +  N(a)  =  N 
therefore  N(a)  =  [n  —  \n  —  1 

Now  if  we  introduce  the  condition  (B)  our  choice 
will  be  the  same  as  if  /3  did  not  exist,  and  therefore  the 
same  as  if  we  had  n  —  1  elements  to  deal  with  instead  of 
n  elements.  Hence  writing  n  —  I  for  n  we  obtain  from 
the  last  equation 

N(aB)  =  [n-l  -  [n-2 

And  by  subtraction  —  remembering  that  the  conditions 
(B)  and  (b)  are  complementary  — 

N(ab)  =  [n  -  2  [n-l  +  [ro-2 

Repeating  our  former  operation,  writing  n  —  1  for  n 
on  the  introduction  of  the  condition  (C)  we  have 

N(abC)  ~  \n-  1  -  2[w-2  +  |w-3 
and  by  subtraction 

A"(a6c).  =  [w  -  8  [ro-1  +  3  [n-2  -  [w-8 
Similarly 

N  (afccd)  =  [w  -  4  |n-l  +  6  [ii-2  -  4  [ro-3  +  \n-4 
and  so  on,  the  coefficients  following  the  same  law  as  in 
the  Binomial  theorem. 

Hence  finally, 


N(abcd...k)  =  [n  -n- 


n(n-l)(n-2)r 

-^  2  3        -  [n  —  6  + 


DERANGEMENTS.  189 

=  M1~i:T+lo~  [Q  +  &C.  to  n  +  1  terms.} 
(      \i     Lg      L£  J 

=  [n.e~1.  Q.  E.  D. 

The  student  who  is  familiar  with  the  use  of  symbols 
of  operation  will  arrange  the  foregoing  proof  briefly  as 

follows  : 

N=[n 

N(A)  =  J[n 
subtracting 

N(a)  =  (l-J)[n 

then  N(aB)=J(l-J)[n 

and  subtracting 

N(ab)  =  (l- 


And  so  every  introduction  of  a  condition  such  as  (A) 
produces  a  factor  of  operation  J,  and  every  introduction 
of  a  condition  such  as  (a)  produces  a  factor  of  operation 
(1-J) 
Hence  N(abc...k)  =  (l-J)n[n  =  [n.e~\ 

ANOTHER  PROOF   OF   PROPOSITION  XXIX. 

Let  /„  denote  the  number  of  ways  of  deranging  a  set 
of  n  elements  so  that  no  element  may  be  in  its  proper 
place. 

Then  the  number  of  derangements  so  that  exactly 
r  elements  may  be  in  their  proper  places  will  be 


190  APPENDIX   III. 

since  such  derangements  are  obtained  by  first  selecting 
r  elements  to  retain  their  proper  places  and  then 
deranging  the  remaining  n  —  r. 

But  all  the  \n  permutations  of  the  n  elements  must 
be  made  up  of  those  in  which  0,  1,  2,  &c.,  have  their 
proper  places. 
Hence 

[» =/.  + "  /„  +  -nlr  /-  +  ••••  +  n/,  + 1 

And,  if  we  establish  the  convention  that/r  is  always  to 
be  replaced  by  fr  we  may  write 

[n=  (/+!)" 

Similarly  \n  -  1  =  (/+  1)"  ' 

|n-a=  (/+!)- 
and  so  on. 

Now  multiply  these  equations  in  order  by  the  coeffi 
cients  in  the  expansion  of  (1  —  x)n  and  add  (having 
regard  to  algebraical  signs)  and  we  obtain  an  equation 
of  which  the  first  member  is 


n  r  n  (n  —  1) 


.       r 
[n  +  j  \n  -  I  + 


1.2 


n  —  2  —  &c. 


or         [n  \l  -  .  j  +  ,x  ~"  IQ  +  &c-  to  w  +  1  terms. I 

or  [w-e^"1 

while  the  second  member  is  ,  (/  +  1)  —  1  [ n  or  fn  which 

by  our  convention  represents  jn 

Therefore  /„  =  [n.e^1  Q.  E.  D. 


DERANGEMENTS.  191 

COROLLARY  I. — The  number  of  ways  in  which  n 
elements  can  be  deranged  so  that  not  any  one  of  r 
assigned  elements  may  be  in  its  proper  place  (the  rest 
being  unrestricted)  is 

\n  —  -  [w  —  1  + •  \n  —  2  —  . . .  ±  [»i  —  r 

+  &c. 


[2 ii (»-•!)      |8»(fi-l)(ft--.2) 

to  w+1  terms,  r 

This  is  established  passim  in  the  first  proof  of  the 
Proposition. 

COROLLARY  II. — The  number  of  derangements  of 
m-\-n  elements  so  that  m  are  displaced  and  n  not 
displaced  is 


COROLLARY  III. — If  an  arrangement  of  n  elements 
be  re-arranged  at  random,  the  chance  that  no  element 
will  be  in  its  original  position  is  e~*. 

COROLLARY  IV. — If  an  arrangement  of  an  infinite 
number  of  elements  be  re-arranged  at  random  the 
chance  that  no  element  will  be  in  its  original  position 

is  e  -1  or  -. 


EXAMPLE.-— Suppose    we    have    the    four    elements 
o 


192  APPENDIX  III. 

abed;    the  number  of  derangements,  so  that  all  may 
be  displaced,  is  by  the  proposition 


1  2      6  '  24, 
These  nine  derangements  are  as  follows  : 

b  d  a  c  c  a  d  b  d  c  a  b 

bade  c  d  b  a  d  c  b  a 

b  c  d  a  c  d  a  b  d  a  b  c 

If  it  be  required  to  derange  the  same  terms  so  that 
two  may  remain  in  situ  and  two  be  displaced,  the 
number  of  derangements  is,  by  Corollary  II. 

12J1  -1+|}=  6. 

These  six  derangements  are  as  follows  : 

a  b  d  c  a  d  c  b  a  c  b  d 

b  a  c  d  c  b  a  d  d  b  c  a 

PKOPOSITION     XXX. 

The  number  of  ways  of  deranging  a  series  of  n  terms 
so  that  no  term  may  be  followed  by  the  term  which 
originally  followed  it  is  [n  en  +  \n  —  1  e~n-i 

Let  a,  |8,  y, . . .x  represent  the  n  terms.  Then  amongst 
the  \n  arrangements  of  which  the  terms  are  capable 
there  will  be  \n  —  1  in  which  any  assigned  sequence 
a/3  occurs  :  (for  the  arrangements  will  be  obtained  by 
regarding  a/3  as  one  term  and  then  arranging  it  with 
the  remaining  w-2  terms.)  Similarly  any  two 


DERANGEMENTS.  193 

sequences  which  can  consistently  occur  (as  a/3,  /3y,  Or 
a/3,  yS)*  will  be  found  in  [rc-2  different  arrangements. 
Any  three  consistent  sequences  will  be  found  in 
\n  —  8  different  arrangements  :  and  so  on. 

Hence  there  are  [n  arrangements  altogether,  among 
which  we  should  find 

a/3  in  \n  —  1  of  them 

/3y  in  \n-~L  —  \n  -  2  more  of  them 

yS  in  [n  —  1  —  2  [n  —  2  +  [w  -  3  more 

3  2 
$e  in  [w  —  1  —  3  [w  —  2  +  -—.  \n  —  3  —  |  w  —  4  more 

-  JL  •  ^  ~~  —  -•'  " 

and  so  on  for  all  the  n  —  1  sequences.  Therefore  the 
number  of  arrangements  free  from  any  of  these 
sequences  is 

.  n(n  —  l)r       ~     w(ft  —  l)(ft  —  2). 

- 


&c. 


=  [n  .  e71-1 
or,  adding  and  subtracting  unity, 

=  \n  .  e~l  +  \n-l  .  e~1^ 

Q.  E.  D. 

The  foregoing  result  may  be  written  in  very  con 
venient  form  by  the  use  of  the  notation  explained  on 
page  186.  Thus 

\n  e~l  +  [n-1  e^  =  (l-J)n\n  +  (l-J^n-l 

*  Of  course  such  sequences  as  a/3  ay  could  not  consistently  occur, 
as  a  could  not  at  the  same  time  be  followed  by  ft  and  y. 


194  APPENDIX   III. 

or,  since   the   operation  (1—  J)n  is   equivalent   to   the 
operations  (l-J)n~l  (1-J) 

-    n-l       -  (l-J)n~l  [n-l 


Or  we  may  establish  the  result    in  this    form    inde 
pendently  as  follows. 

PKOPOSITION    XXXI    (otherwise.) 

The  number  of  ways  of  deranging  a  series  of  n  terms 
so  that  no  term  may  be  followed  by  the  term  which 
originally  followed  it,  is  (1—  J")""1  \n 

For  there  are  \n  arrangements  of  the  n  terms  a,  0,  y  .  .  .  * 
and  we  should  find 
a/3  in  J  [n  of  them 

/3y  in  (J-JZ)  [n  or  (1-J)  J  [n  more  of  them 

y&  in  (J-2J2+J3)  [n  or  (l-J)*J[n  more: 
and  so  on. 

Hence  the  whole  number  of  arrangements  containing 
at  least  one  of  the  n  —  1  sequences  a/3,/3y,y§,  ...  IK  is 


and  therefore  the  number  of  admissible  arrangements  is 
(!-</)"-> 

Q.    E.    D. 


DERANGEMENTS.  195 

COROLLARY.  —  The  number  of  derangements  of  a  series 
of  n  terms,  free  from  any  of  r  assigned  sequences 
(which  might  occur  simultaneously  in  one  arrangement) 
is(l-J)r[n 

EXAMPLE.  —Let  us  derange  the  series  of  four  elements 
abed  so  as  to  exclude  the  sequences  ab  be  cd. 

By  the  proposition  the  number  of  derangements  is 
[4  -  3  [3  +  3  [2  -  [1,  or  11. 
And  they  are  found  on  trial  to  be 

acbd  bdca  cadb  dbac 

adcb  lade  chad  dcba 

Mac  cbda  dacb 

PROPOSITION    XXXII. 

The  number  of  ways  of  deranging  the  series  of  n 
terms  a,  /3,  y,  .  .  .  .  *,  *,  so  that  none  of  the  n  sequences 
«/3,  /3y,  ...  ix,  xa  may  occur  is 

[n  . 


For,  as  before,  there  are  [n  arrangements  of   the   n 

terms,  and 

a/3  occurs  in  [n  -  1  of  them, 

|8y  in  [w  —  1  —  \n—  2  more  of  them, 

y&  in  [n  —  l  -  2[w^2_  +  fo  —  3  more, 

and  so  on  for  all  the  n  sequences,  except  that  in  the 

case  of  the  last  one  the  final  term  [0  must  be  rejected 


196  APPENDIX    III. 

since  there  cannot  be  any  arrangements  containing  all 
the  n  sequences. 

Therefore  the  whole  number  of  admissible  arrange 
ments  is 

[n  —  n  \n-l  -{ -j— o~  [ft -2  -  &c.  to  n  terms. 


a  result  which  may  also  be  written 

n(l-J)*~l\n-l 

EXAMPLE. — Let  us  derange  the  series  of  four  elements 
abed  so  as  to  exclude  the  sequences  ab  be  cd  da. 

By  the  proposition  the  number  of  derangements  is 
f        1       1  _  1) 
L-  j       II     12     [3  I  or  ^  :  an(^  *key  are  f°und  ^0  be 

acbd  bdca  cadb  dbac 

adcb  bade  cbad  dcba 

PROPOSITION    XXXIII. 

If  n  terms  be  arranged  in  circular  procession  the 
number  of  ways  in  which  they  can  be  deranged  so  that 
no  term  may  be  followed  by  the  term  which  originally 
followed  it,  is 

(1          1      ,         1  1  1) 

-\n  ~  n-l  +  [2  (w-2)  ~  [3  (w-3)  "*  t  [»j 

For  the  whole  number  of  arrangements  of  n  things 
in  circular  procession  is  \n  —  1 ;  and  the  sequence 


DERANGEMENTS.  197 

a/3  occurs  in  |w-2  of  them, 
/3y  in  |n  —  2  -  [w—  8  more, 

y  §  in  [w  —  2  —  \n  —  3  +  |n—  4  more 

and  so  on  for  all  the  n  sequences,  provided  *we  replace 
|  -1  in  the  last  term  by  unity.  Hence  the  number  of 
arrangements  free  from  any  of  these  sequences  is 

|n-l  -n  [w-JJ  +^7rV-3  -  &c.  to  (w+1)  terms. 


Q.  E.  D. 

If  we  establish  the  convention  that  Jn  \n-~L  =  [—  1  is 
to  be  replaced  by  unity,  the  above  series  is  seen  to  be 
the  algebraical  expansion  of  (1-  J)n  \n  —  l,  in  which 
form  the  result  is  easily  remembered. 

EXAMPLES.  — 

If  n  =  3,  the  number  of  derangements  may  be  written 

[2  -  8[1  +  3[0-1  =  1 

or  the  only  available  derangement  is  the  one  in  which 
the  order  of  the  terms  is  reversed. 

If  n  —  5  we  have 

|4  -  5  [8  +10  [2  -  10  [1  +  5  [0  -  1  =8 
If  abode  represent  the  original  order  the  eight  derange 
ments  may  be  exhibited  as  follows 

acbed        aebdc        acedb        aecbd        adceb 
adbec         acebd        aedcb 


198  APPENDIX    III. 

If  n  =  6  the  number  of  derangements  is  36  :  if  n  =  7 
it  is  229  :  and  if  n  =  11  it  is  1214673.  And  always  if 
n  be  a  prime  number  the  number  of  derangements,  with 
2  added,  is.  a  multiple  of  n. 

In  the  foregoing  propositions  we  have  investigated 
the  number  of  ways  of  deranging  groups  of  elements 
subject  to  various  laws.  But  as  there  can  scarcely  be  a 
limit  to  the  variety  of  laws  which  might  be  proposed  to 
regulate  the  distribution  in  different  cases,  it  would  be 
an  endless  task  to  undertake  a  strictly  complete  discus 
sion  of  the  subject,  or  to  make  our  treatise  exhaustive. 
The  cases  which  we  have  considered  are  those  which 
most  obviously  arise,  and  the  methods  which  we  have 
applied  to  them  will  be  easily  adapted  to  a  variety  of 
other  cases,  or  will  suggest  other  methods  of  still  wider 
applicability. 


APPENDIX  IV. 


ON  THE  DISADVANTAGE   OF  GAMBLING. 

"If  (says  Professor  Rogers,)  we  are  to  understand 
the  very  elements  of  political  economy,  we  must  get 
rid  of  the  impression,  that  if  the  contract  be  voluntary 
and  the  service  be  mutual,  one  man's  gain  is  another's 

loss The  real  truth  is  exactly  the  reverse ;    for 

one  man's  gain  in  all  acts  of  free  exchange  is  another 
man's  gain.*"  A  fair  bargain  is  a  mutual  benefit  to  the 
persons  between  whom  it  is  made.  If  this  were  not  so 
all  commerce  would  be  immoral,  for  no  man  could  seek 
his  own  commercial  profit  without  compassing  the 
injury  of  his  neighbour  and  so  violating  the  law  of 
civilised  humanity. 

But  as  a  fair  bargain  is  an  advantage  to  both  the 
contracting  parties,  so,  speaking  generally,  a  fair  wager 
is  a  disadvantage  to  each  party  who  enters  into  it.  By 
a  fair  wager,  we  mean  one  in  which  each  party's  stake 
is  equal  to  his  mathematical  expectation,  calculated 
according  to  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  chapter  on 
Chance :  for  instance,  the  wager  is  fair,  if  two  men  stake 

*  Manual  of  Political  Economy,  Oxford,  1868,  p.  4. 


200  APPENDIX    IV. 

equal  sums,  and  either  is  to  take  the  whole  stakes 
according  as  a  coin  falls  "head"  or  "tail."  It  is  a 
common  impression  that  such  a  wager  as  this,  being 
obviously  of  the  same  import  to  each  contracting  party, 
can  be  neither  an  advantage  nor  a  disadvantage  to 
either,  and  that  consequently,  any  the  slightest  odds 
must  make  it  expedient  for  the  party  favoured  by  the 
odds  to  enter  into  the  wager.  For  instance,  according 
to  this  view,  it  must  be  decidedly  expedient  for  any  man 
to  stake  a  pound  against  a  pound  and  a  penny,  (if  he 
can  find  any  one  foolish  enough  to  give  the  odds  of  241 
to  240)  that  a  coin  will  fall  on  an  assigned  side.  Of 
course  a  wager  may  be  made  on  such  unequal  terms 
that  it  may  be  decidedly  expedient  (from  a  selfish  point 
of  view)  for  one  party  to  enter  into  it,  but  it  must  then 
be  still  more  decidedly  inexpedient  for  the  other  party. 
We  do  not  deny  that  a  man  who  does  not  scruple  to 
take  advantage  of  the  ignorance  or  folly  of  another, 
or  to  exert  against  his  neighbour  the  intellectual 
violence  of  superior  knowledge  or  cunning,*  may  profit 
ably  enter  into  gambling  speculations ;  but  we  combat 
the  notion  that  there  is  a  neutral  advantage  or  dis 
advantage  in  a  fair  wager,  and  that  the  contract  to 
play  a  game  of  pure  chance  for  equal  stakes,  though  it 
be  not  expedient,  cannot  be  branded  as  inexpedient, 
and  the  delusion  that,  though  no  good  be  done,  at  least 

*  "  Thou  wouldst  not  take,  by  force  or  stealth, 
What  is  not  lav/fully  thy  right ; 
But  in  the  race  for  power  and  wealth 
No  wrong  is  done  by  mental  might !  " — Monsell. 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING,  201 

no  harm  is  done.  It  is  this  notion  which  palliates 
gambling.  If  it  were  only  recognised  that  a  fair  wager 
were  disadvantageous  to  each  contracting  party,  it  would 
be  regarded  as  disreputable  for  one  man  to  cast  this 
disadvantage  on  another,  even  though  he  were  accepting 
the  like  himself.  But  at  present  the  evil  motives 
which  may  lead  men  to  gamble  are  covered  by  a 
reputable  cloak,  in  the  charitable  hope  that  each 
party  may  be  entering  into  a  contract  not  disadvan 
tageous  to  the  other. 

Every  prospect  of  receiving  anything  of  value,  how 
ever  doubtful  the  prospect  be,  we  must  regard  as  having 
itself  some  value.  If  a  man  have  a  chance,  however 
small,  of  receiving  £100,  he  will  not  relinquish  his 
title  to  it  without  receiving  something  in  return.  He 
may  take  £75,  or  £50,  or  it  may  be  £2  or  £1  for  his 
chance,  according  to  his  estimate  of  the  probability  of 
his  getting  the  prize,  but  if  he  has  any  chance  at  all, 
his  prospect  must  be  worth  something.  When  a  man 
makes  a  wager,  he  is  buying  such  a  prospect  as  this. 
He  pays  down  a  certain  sum  of  money  and  receives  in 
return  a  doubtful  prospect  of  a  larger  sum.  Whether 
his  bargain  be  advantageous  or  disadvantageous  will 
depend  upon  whether  the  sum  that  he  pays  down  is 
worth  to  him  less  or  more  than  the  prospect  which  he 
buys,  and  we  can  only  decide  this  by  considering 
whether  he  would  gain  or  lose  in  the  long  run,  if  he 
repeated  his  operation  on  the  same  terms  for  a  very 
great  number  of  times.  It  is  our  object  to  prove 


202  APPENDIX   IV. 

that  if  the  sum  which  he  pay  be  the  mathematical 
expectation  of  his  prospect  (and  this  is  plainly  the  only 
sum  which  he  can  fairly  pay  in  justice  to  the  other 
contracting  party),  the  bargain  is  disadvantageous  to 
him :  in  the  long  run  he  will  lose  by  the  repetition  of 
it. 

For  instance  :  if  there  be  twenty  tickets  in  a  lottery 
for  a  prize  which  is  worth  £1,  the  value  of  the  expecta 
tion  of  a  man  who  holds  one  ticket  is  one  shilling; 
and  it  is  plain  that  the  organiser  of  the  lottery  cannot 
without  loss  sell  the  tickets  for  less  than  one  shilling 
each :  the  fair  price  of  a  ticket  is  one  shilling.  But 
according  to  our  principle,  it  is  inexpedient  for  a  man 
to  give  so  much  as  one  shilling  for  a  ticket ;  and  though 
the  twenty  tickets  together  are  undoubtedly  worth 
twenty  shillings,  yet  a  single  ticket  is  no  more  worth  a 
shilling  than  a  single  glove  is,  by  itself,  worth  half  the 
price  of  a  pair  of  gloves. 

The  twenty  tickets  in  the  hands  of  the  original 
holder  were  worth  a  pound,  but  when  distributed  to 
twenty  men  (we  say)  they  are  not  worth  twenty  shillings. 
The  establishment  of  the  lottery  to  effect  the  distribu 
tion  was  therefore  inexpedient;  the  distribution  itself 
was  on  the  whole  disadvantageous. 

But  if  the  distribution  of  the  tickets  be  disadvan 
tageous,  their  collection  must  be  in  the  same  degree 
advantageous.  If  therefore  there  exist  in  the  nature  of 
things  such  chances  as  those  represented  by  the  tickets 
of  which  we  have  spoken,  it  will  be  a  beneficial  and 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  203 

profitable  act  to  collect  those  chances  together.  And 
this  is  precisely  what  an  Insurance  Company  does,  when 
it  issues  a  policy  undertaking  to  indemnify  an  owner 
against  accidents  which  may  befal  his  property.  The 
man  who  insures  his  house  against  fire  exchanges  an 
uncertain  position  for  a  certain  one.  The  man  who 
buys  a  lottery  ticket  exchanges  a  certain  position  for  an 
uncertain  one.  Insurance  is  the  reverse  of  gambling, 
and  is  only  wise  in  that  gambling  is  foolish.  The 
consent  of  the  civilised  world  to  the  proposition  that 
insurance  is  expedient  is  a  tacit  acknowledgment  of 
the  truth  of  the  cognate  proposition  that  gambling  is 
inexpedient. 

This  will  be  seen  more  clearly  by  the  consideration 
of  an  example. 

Suppose  that  out  of  every  twenty  ships  which  make  a 
particular  voyage  one  is  lost,  and  the  remaining  nine 
teen  come  safely  to  port.  And  suppose  there  is  one 
ship  making  this  voyage  which  with  its  cargo  is  worth 
£20,000.  The  value  of  the  owner's  expectation,  ac 
cording  to  our  chapter  on  Chance,  is  just  £19, 000. 
But,  according  to  the  hypothesis  which  we  are  illustrat 
ing,  it  would  be  expedient  for  the  owner  to  take  a  less 
sum  than  this  for  his  expectation,  say  £19,000  —  x. 
He  may  in  consequence  prudently  pay  £1,000+2  to  an 
Insurance  Company  in  return  for  a  guarantee  that  his 
£20,000  shall  be  secured  him  in  full.  And  the  Insu 
rance  Company,  collecting  together  a  great  number  of 
such  risks,  may  profitably  accept  the  bargain,  their 


204  APPENDIX   IV. 

profit  being  entirely  dependent  on  the  fact  that  the 
shipowner  is  ready  to  accept  for  his  contingent  pros 
pect  an  uncontingent  sum,  which  is  less  than  his 
mathematical  expectation.  For  if  the  Insurance  Com 
pany  were  to  insure  all  the  ships,  securing  to  each 
owner  his  mathematical  expectation,  their  own  mathe 
matical  expectation  of  profit  would  be  zero.  They  could 
only  hope  that  the  premiums  received  would  in  the 
long  run  balance  the  claims  upon  them,  without 
leaving  any  profit  to  remunerate  them  for  their  trouble. 
Thus,  the  continued  existence  of  Insurance  Companies 
commercially  successful  is  a  standing  witness  to  the 
fact,  that  a  prudent  man  will  commute  a  contingent 
prospect  of  value  for  less  than  the  sum  measured  by 
his  mathematical  expectation. 

But  some  one  will  object  that  mathematics  must  be 
utterly  at  fault,  if  an  expectation  is  always  worth  less 
than  the  value  which  mathematics  would  assign  to  it. 
Not  so.  But  if  the  mathematical  result  seems  to  con 
tradict  the  conclusions  of  experience,  or  to  violate  the 
plain  dicta  of  prudence,  it  is  not  that  the  mathematics 
have  failed,  but  that  two  different  problems  have  been 
confused.  The  mathematician  solves  one  problem  :  the 
speculator  seizes  the  result,  and  expects  it  to  answer  to 
another.  It  is  not  a  true  statement  of  the  principle  we 
have  been  enforcing  to  say  that  an  expectation  is 
always  worth  less  than  the  value  which  mathematics 
would  assign  to  it.  The  price  which  a»  speculator  may 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  205 

prudently  give  for  a  contingent  prospect  of  value 
depends  always  upon  the  amount  of  money  he  has  to 
speculate  with.  But  that  which  is  commonly  called 
the  mathematical  expectation  of  the  contingency  is  the 
price  which  a  man  of  infinite  means  might  prudently 
pay  for  it.  Therefore,  the  true  statement  of  the  case  is 
rather  that  an  expectation  is  worth  less  to  a  man  of 
limited  means,  than  the  value  which  mathematics 
assign  to  the  like  expectation  to  a  man  whose  means 
are  unlimited. 

The  value  of  an  expectation  to  any  particular  man,  is 
the  stake  which  he  may  prudently  lay  down  for  the 
sake  of  the  expectation.  That  this  depends  upon  the 
man's  means  is  evident,  as  soon  as  we  consider  an 
extreme  case.  However  foolish  it  may  be  for  a  man 
who  is  possessed  of  thousands  of  pounds  to  make  a  bet 
of  £100,  we  are  sensible  that  if  the  same  bet  were  made 
by  a  man  who  possessed  nothing  in  the  world  but  the 
£100  which  he  risked  the  folly  would  be  very  much 
greater.  Or,  however  advantageous  it  might  be  for  the 
rich  man  to  stake  £100  in  a  speculative  venture,  it 
would  scarcely  be  prudent  for  the  poor  man  to  do  the 
same,  and  to  run  a  risk  of  absolute  ruin. 

But  the  reader  will  expect  that  we  appeal  not  to  his 
sense  of  what  is  prudent,  but  that  we  rather  shew  him, 
by  close  mathematical  reasoning,  how  the  value  of  an 
expectation  depends  upon  the  means  of  the  speculator. 

The   question    whether   a   particular   speculation   is 


206  APPENDIX    IV. 

advantageous  or  disadvantageous  to  a  particular  man, 
can  only  be  tested  by  considering  whether,  if  he  repeat 
the  operation  continually,  he  will  in  the  end  gain  or 
lose.  But  what  is  to  be  understood  by  repeating  the 
operation?  If  a  boy,  who  has  only  a  shilling,  tosses 
for  sixpence,  he  is  staking  half  his  property.  Sup 
pose  he  wins,  and  so  becomes  the  possessor  of  eighteen- 
pence.  If  we  now  speak  of  his  repeating  the  operation, 
we  may  mean  either  of  two  things  (1),  that  he  is  again 
to  stake  sixpence ;  or  (2),  that  he  is  again  to  stake  half 
his  property,  which  will  now  be  ninepence.  So  also,  if 
he  loses,  there  will  be  the  like  ambiguity  as  to  whether 
he  is  to  repeat  the  operation  by  staking  his  remaining 
sixpence,  or  only  by  staking  threepence. 

And  so  always,  as  soon  as  we  take  into  consideration 
the  funds  at  the  disposal  of  a  speculator,  the  stake 
which  he  lays  down  in  any  venture  may  be  considered 
either  as  an  absolute  amount,  or  as  a  certain  fraction 
of  his  entire  fund.  And  by  the  repetition  of  his  ven 
ture,  we  may  either  understand  that  he  stakes  the  same 
sum  again  and  again,  or  that  he  always  stakes  the  same 
fraction  of  the  fund  which  he  holds  at  the  time  of 
making  the  venture. 

But,  whichever  of  these  views  we  take,  we  are  led 
mathematically  to  the  same  conclusion,  that  a  fair 
wager  is  disadvantageous  to  a  man  whose  means  are 
limited,  because,  if  it  be  repeated  indefinitely,  he  will 
in  the  long  run  be  the  loser. 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF   GAMBLING.  207 

First,  —  Suppose  that  the  same  sum  is  repeatedly 
staked,  and  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  suppose  the  sum 
to  be  gained  the  same  as  the  sum  staked,  as  in  the  case 
of  an  even  bet.     The  speculator  repeatedly  stakes  (say) 
a  pound  against  a  pound,  so  that  every  venture  issues 
in  making  him  either  a  pound  richer  or  a  pound  poorer, 
each  of  these  results  being  equally  likely.     If  he  con 
tinue  his  operation  a  great  number  of  times,  the  balance 
of  profit  and  loss  will  be  continually  varying.     At  one 
time   he   may  have  gained  a  considerable  number  of 
pounds,  at  another  time  he  may  find  himself  much 
poorer  than  when  he  began.      And  if  his  means  were 
unlimited,  he  might  go  on  gambling  for  ever;    and 
there  would  be  no  reason  to  expect  him  to  leave  off 
a  loser  rather  than  a  gainer.     But  his  means  being 
limited,  this  equilibrium  of  chances  is  disturbed.     He 
has  only  (say)  n  pounds  to  begin  with.     The  balance  of 
profit  and  loss  may  oscillate  :    now  he  may  have  gained 
x  pounds,  and  now  he  may  have  lost  y  pounds,  and  the 
balance  may  again  recoil ;    but  as  soon  as  ever  a  loss  of 
n  pounds  is  reached,  there  is  no  more  hope  of  restitu 
tion,  for  he  has  nothing  more  to  venture.     If  his  funds 
had  been  unlimited,  there  would  have  been  an  equal 
prospect  of  his  leaving  off  richer  or  poorer,  but  the 
limitation  of  his  resources,  being  apt  to  put  a  sudden 
termination  on  his  operations  at  a  time  when  the  balance 
is  most  against  him,    interferes  with  the  equality  of 
chances,  and  occasions  a  presumption  that  he  will  leave 
off  the  loser.   If,  indeed,  he  were  gambling  with  another 

p 


208  APPENDIX     IV. 

speculator  whose  means  were  also  limited,  we  should 
have  to  set  against  the  prospect  of  the  game  abruptly 
terminating  against  him  the  counter  prospect  of  its 
abruptly  terminating  in  his  favour  by  the  exhaustion  of 
the  other  man's  funds;  but,  in  fact,  no  one  is  restricted 
to  gambling  with  one  single  opponent ;  the  speculator 
deals  with  the  public  at  large,  with  a  world  whose 
resources  are  practically  unlimited.  There  is  a  prospect 
that  his  operations  may  terminate  to  his  own  disadvan 
tage,  through  his  having  nothing  more  to  stake ;  but 
there  is  no  prospect  that  it  will  terminate  to  his 
advantage  through  the  exhaustion  of  the  resources  of 
the  world.  Every  one  who  gambles  is  carrying  on  an 
unequal  warfare :  he  is  ranged  with  a  restricted  capital 
against  an  adversary  whose  means  are  infinite. 

We  have  said  there  is  a  chance  of  the  man  being 
ruined  who  with  limited  means  continues  to  stake  a 
pound  against  a  pound  in  a  fair  wager.  But  if  he 
prolong  his  play  indefinitely,  the  chance  of  his  being 
ruined  is  not  distinguishable  from  certainty :  it  ap 
proaches  nearer  to  certainty  than  by  any  assignable 
difference ;  and  the  chance  that  he  should  escape  ruin 
is  less  than  any  assignable  chance.  Thus  :  — 

PKOPOSITION    XXXIII. 

If  a  man  with  limited  funds  repeatedly  stake  a  pound 
against  a  pound,  in  a  fair  wager  >  the  chance  of  his 
not  being  ultimately  ruined  is  less  than  any  assignable 
chance. 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  209 

Suppose  liis  original  funds  are  n  pounds:  and  let 
RT  represent  the  chance  of  his  being  ultimately  ruined 
when  he  has  x  pounds  in  hand.  At  the  same  time 
l—Rx  will  be  the  chance  that  he  will  escape  ruin. 

If  at  any  time  he  have  only  one  pound,  the  next 
venture  must  either  ruin  him  or  double  his  fund  :  the 
chance  of  either  of  these  issues  is  one-half,  and  in  the 
former  case  his  chance  of  ruin  is  RQ  or  unity,  in  the 
latter  case  it  is  R2.  Hence, 


or  "  2E,  =  1  +  -Ra 

Similarly  if  at  any  time  he  have  x  pounds  a  single 
venture  must  leave  him  with  either  x—1  or  #4-1  and 
so  we  have 


This  being  true  for  all  values  of  x  it  follows  that 
l,Rl}R2tR3....  are  in  arithmetical  progression,  and 
if  we  write 

B,  =  i-p 

then  Rn  =  1—np 

and  if  we  take  the  case  of  any  one  else  whose  funds  are 
z  pounds  his  chance  of  ruin  is  Rz  —  1—zp,  where  p  is 
a  constant  quantity  whatever  be  the  value  of  z.  But 
however  great  a  man's  funds  may  be,  his  chance  of  ruin 
can  never  be  negative.  Hence,  however  great  a  value 
we  assign  to  zy  Rs  can  never  be  less  than  zero,  and  there 
fore  zp  (which  is  1  —  Rt)  can  never  be  greater  than  unity. 


210  APPENDIX   IV. 

Therefore  p  is  not  greater  than  *  ,  and  np  not  greater 
than  -  however  great  z  may  be.  But  by  choosing  z 
large  enough  while  n  is  finite  we  may  make  £  less  than 
any  assignable  quantity,  and  therefore  np  which  is 
invariable  and  not  greater  than  -  must  be  less  than  any 
assignable  quantity.  Therefore  1  -  Rn  is  less  than  any 
assignable  quantity,  and  therefore  the  chance  that  the 
man  is  ultimately  ruined  differs  from  certainty  by  less 
than  any  assignable  chance,  and  the  chance  that  he 
escapes  ruin  is  less  than  any  assignable  chance. 

Q.  E.  D. 

The  next  proposition  is  not  necessary  to  our  present 
argument,  but  is  added  here  as  illustrating  this  part  of 
the  subject.  It  reduces  to  the  case  of  the  foregoing 
proposition  when  /*  =  1. 

PROPOSITION  XXXIV. 

If  a  man  with  limited  funds  (£n)  repeatedly  stake  a 
pound  against  a  pound  in  a  wager  in  which  the  odds 
on  every  venture  are  p  :  1  in  his  favour,  the  chance  that 

he  is  ultimately  ruined  is  -^. 

Arguing  as  in  the  last  proposition,  and  observing 
that  the  chances  of  his  losing  or  winning  any  venture  are 

1  I* 

respectively  and    -,  we  have 


+ 


1+jM, 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  211 

or  (!+/*)  ^  =  1+1^ 

whence  JR.  -  722  =  -  (1  —  -ft,)        » 

jLfc 

So  £2  -  R3  =  *  (1^-iy 

and  generally  R^-R*  =     (R^-R^ 

Therefore  by  continued  multiplication 

•frc-i  -  Rx  =  -*=i  (1-^) 


Now  give  x  successively  all  the  values  from  1  to  n  and 
add,  and  we  get 


But  Rn  can  be  zero  only  when  n  is  infinite,  therefore 

,.,.3 

and  consequently 

i 

-|  T">      -|  * 

n~  '  ~ '  [S 


or 


Q.  E.  D. 


212  APPENDIX   IV. 

To  resume  our  argument :— Proposition  XXXIII. 
shews  that,  on  the  strictest  mathematical  principles, 
a  man  wfto  continues  to  stake  a  constant  sum  in  a 
fair  wager  must  expect  to  be  ruined  in  the  end. 
Such  a  course  of  gambling — unregulated  by  any  con 
sideration  of  the  gambler's  disposable  fund,  until  the 
absolute  exhaustion  of  the  fund  places  a  peremptory 
limit  on  his  play — is  therefore  manifestly  inexpedient. 
And  if  it  be  inexpedient  in  the  long  run,  it  cannot  be 
expedient  even  when  carried  to  any  limited  extent. 

For  any  limited  extent  of  play  which  may  be  thought 
to  be  expedient,  must  leave  the  gambler  either  poorer 
or  richer  than  he  was  at  first.  If  it  leave  him  poorer, 
it  cannot  be  expedient.  If  it  leave  him  richer,  the 
same  course  of  gambling  which  was  expedient  at  first, 
must  be,  a  fortiori,  expedient  now ;  and,  therefore,  it 
cannot  be  expedient  for  him  to  stop.  Hence,  no  play, 
consisting  of  simple  repetitions  of  the  same  venture, 
which  is  proved  to  be  inexpedient  in  the  long  run,  can 
be  expedient  when  confined  to  any  assignable  extent. 

But  it  may  be  said  that  a  wise  speculator  will  always 
regulate  his  ventures  by  his  means.  If,  when  he 
posesses  a  shilling,  he  stakes  sixpence,  the  repetition 
of  the  act  is  not  to  be  sought  for  in  a  constant 
staking  of  sixpence,  but  in  a  constant  staking  of  half 
his  fund.  And  if  he  always  keeps  as  much  as  he 
stakes,  it  is  plain  that  he  can  never  be  absolutely 
ruined.  The  reasoning  of  Proposition  XXXIII.  will 
not  now  apply.  We  must  seek  some  other  proof,  if 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF   GAMBLING.  213 

we  would  show  that  a  course  of  gambling  thus  regulated 
is  in  the  end  disadvantageous. 

The  proof  is  easily  found.  Let  us  suppose  that  the 
man  having  n  pounds  begins  as  before  by  staking  one 
pound  against  one  pound  in  an  even  wager.  He  stakes 
one  nth  part  of  his  fund,  and  he  continues  the  operation 
by  staking  every  time  not  one  pound  but  always  one 
nth  part  of  the  fund  which  he  then  possesses.  Every 
venture  which  issues  in  his  favour  increases  his  fund 
by  one  nth  part,  or  multiplies  it  by  (l  +  H.  Every 
venture  which  turns  out  against  him  decreases  his  fund 
by  one  nth  part,  or  multiplies  it  by  f  1  -  -J.  A 

favourable   and   an   unfavourable   issue   will   therefore 
together  multiply  his  fund  by 


that  is,   the  two   operations   will  decrease  his  fund  by 

I  —  )th  part:  and  this  will  be  the  case  whether  the 
\n*J  * 

gain  precede  or  follow  the  loss.  Thus  a  gain  and  a  loss 
do  not  balance  one  another,  but  they  leave  a  net  loss. 
And  in  any  number  of  ventures  in  which  there  are  the 
same  number  of  profitable  and  unprofitable  issues, 
there  will  be  a  resultant  loss,  greater  as  the  number 
of  ventures  is  greater.  Now  the  man  cannot  expect 
in  the  long  run  to  win  oftener  than  he  loses,  and 
therefore  if  he  repeat  his  operations  indefinitely  he 
must  expect  to  lose  in  the  end. 


214  APPENDIX   IV. 

For  example,  if  he  begin  with  £100  and  always  stake 
one  tenth  of  his  fund,  a  single  gain  will  raise  his 
fund  to  £110  ;  he  will  then  stake  £11,  and  if  he  lose 
he  will  only  have  £99  left.  Or  if  he  had  lost  the  first 
venture  he  would  have  had  £90  left :  then  he  would 
have  staked  £9,  and  if  he  had  won  he  would  then  have 
had  £99  as  before.  In  either  order  the  gain  and  the 
loss  reduce  £100  to  £99,  and  ten  gains  and  ten  losses 
in  any  order  would  reduce  it  to  £90  8s.  lljd. 

PKOPOSITION    XXXY. 

There  are  m  tickets  in  a  lottery  for  one  prize  of  value 
A.  To  determine  ivhat  price  may  be  paid  for  a  ticket 
by  a  man  ivhose  available  fund  is  nA,  so  that  by 
repeating  his  operation  an  average  number  of  gains  may 
balance  an  average  number  of  losses. 

"  Kepeating  his  operation"  will  here  mean  that  when 
the  first  venture  is  decided  the  man  will  purchase  a 
ticket  in  another  lottery  in  which  the  prize  is  the  nth 
part  of  the  amount  of  the  fund  which  he  then  holds. 

xA 

Suppose  -  -  the  sum  which  he  may  pay  for  a  ticket. 
m 

Then  every  unsuccessful  venture  multiplies  his  fund  by 

IT 

1 •    and  every  successful  venture  multiplies   it   by 

mn 

1       x 

H — .     But  in  the  long  run  he  will  have  m  -  1 

n     mn 

unsuccessful  issues  for  one  successful  one.     Therefore 


THE    DISADVANTAGE   OF    GAMBLING.  215 

the  average  multiplier  for  m  ventures  will  be 


1+---—     1-  — 
n    mn }  \       mn 


This  must  be  unity  since  the  gains,  on  the  average, 
balance  the  losses.     Therefore 

1  T  I  X    \-(m~^ 

1+--—  =(!---) 
n     mn      \        mnj 

an  equation  to  determine  x. 

If  n  be  a  large  number  (as  is  usually  the  case)  we  may 
obtain  an  approximate  solution.     Thus 


n    mn  mn 

f\  m-l 

or  0  =  - 1  +  #  +  ~— - 

Zmn 

~v,  1 

whence  x  —  1  — 


Consequently  it  is  inexpedient  for  one  to  give  more  than 
/    _m—\\A 

for  the  chance  (  —  ]  of  the  prize  (A). 
\mj 


COROLLABY. — If  he   buy  two   tickets    in   the   same 
lottery  his  chance  of  a  prize  is  — .      Hence  writing  ~ 

for  m  in  the  result  of  the  proposition  we  obtain  the 
price  he  may  pay  for  two  tickets,  viz. 

/      m-2\2.4 

\        Zmn  )  m 


216  APPENDIX   IV. 

or  he  may  pay  for  each  of  them 

^m-avi 

2mn  Jm 
So  if  he  purchase  r  tickets,  he  may  pay  for  each  of  them 


'm 

or  if  he  purchase  all  the  m  tickets,  he  may  pay  for  each 
its  full  representative  value  — . 

PKOPOSITION  XXXVI. 

There  are  a  +  b  +  c+  ...=m  tickets  in  a  lottery,  and 
there  are  a  blanks,  b  prizes  each  worth  /3,  c  prizes  each 
worth  y,  and  so  on.  To  determine  ivhat  price  a  man 
whose  available  fund  is  n  may  prudently  pay  for  a 
ticket. 

Let  a)  =  b  (B  +  cy  +  ...  =  the  sum  of  the  prizes, 
and  let  £l  =  bfi*+  cy*+  ... 

Then  the  absolute  value  of  a  ticket  is  — . 

m 

Let be  the  price  which  the  man  in  question  ought 

to  pay  for  the  ticket, 

Then  if  we  proceed  as  in  the  last  question  we  find 
the  average  multiplier  for  m  ventures,  viz. 


mn  n    mn    \      n    mn 

This  must  be  equal  to  unity.     Therefore 


THE   DISADVANTAGE   OF   GAMBLING.  217 


mn  n    mn 

+  ...  -0. 

from  which  equation  x  is  to  be  found.  If,  as  is  usually 
the  case,  the  amount  at  stake  is  small  compared  with 
the  speculator's  whole  funds,  n  must  be  a  very  large 
number  ;  therefore  we  shall  obtain  an  approximate 
value  of  x,  by  neglecting  the  terms  involving  high 
negative  powers  of  n,  in  our  equation. 
Thus,  expanding  the  logarithms,  we  have 

2x-x2    «>2 

&c. 


2  — 

*         m       %n* 

whence  x==1 


Consequently,  the  price  which  the  man  may  prudently 
pay  for  a  ticket  is 


( 


—  co.  co 


COROLLARY.  —  The  price  which  a  man  whose  available 
fund  is  n  pounds  may  prudently  pay  for  a  share  in  a 
speculation  in  which  p^  will  be  his  chance  of  winning 
PI,  pz  his  chance  of  winning  P2,  and  so  on  (where 
be 


This  is  derived  immediately  from   the  result  of  the 
proposition,  by  writing 


and   -  =  S 


m  m 


218  APPENDIX   IV. 

EXAMPLES. — Having  n  shillings,  what  may  one  pru 
dently  pay  to  be  entitled  to  a  number  of  shillings  equal 
to  the  number  turned  up  at  a  single  throw  of  a  die  ? 

Here 


=4(1+4  +  9  +  16+25+36)  =  ^ 

D  D 

And  the  required  number  of  shillings  is  approximately 

7, 


Again.     If  the  throw  be  made  with  two  dice,  we 
shall  have  (see  page  91) 

2(pP)  =  7        2  (pP*)  =  2023-^-36 

And  the  required  number  of  shillings  will  be  approxi 
mately 


72 n  ' 


It  must  be  remembered  that  the  results  of  the  two 
foregoing  propositions  and  the  corollary  are  only  obtained 
on  the  hypothesis  that  n  is  very  large  compared  with 
2(pP)  and  with  S^P2)  -5-2(pP).  This  requires  that 
the  man's  original  fund  should  be  very  large  compared 
not  only  with  the  amount  which  he  stakes,  but  also 
with  the  amount  which  he  has  a  chance  (though  it  may 
be  a  very  small  chance)  of  winning. 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  219 

In  all  practical  cases  the  former  conditions  will  be 
fulfilled,  as  no  one  would  think  of  staking,  in  any  single 
venture,  his  whole  property,  or  a  sum  bearing  any 
considerable  ratio  to  his  whole  property.  But  cases  will 
be  likely  to  arise  in  which  the  latter  condition  is  not 
satisfied,  as  when  a  man  may  purchase,  for  a  sum  com 
paratively  small  compared  with  his  means,  a  ticket  in 
a  lottery  in  which  there  is  a  prize  very  many  times 
larger  than  his  whole  property.  In  this  case,  the 
approximate  results  obtained  above  cannot  be  applied, 
and  we  must  have  recourse  to  the  original  equation  in 
the  form  in  which  it  was  presented  before  we  introduced 
the  approximations  which  are  now  inadmissible.  We 
may,  however,  still  approximate,  in  virtue  of  the  con 
dition  that  the  stake  must  be  small  compared  with  the 
speculator's  whole  funds.  Thus  : — 

PEOPOSITION  XXXVII. 

To  find  an  approximate  formula  for  the  sum  which 
a  speculator  may  pay  for  any  defined  expectation, 
without  assuming  that  his  funds  are  necessarily  large 
compared  ivith  the  value  of  the  prizes. 

Let  X  (small  compared  with  n,  though  not  necessa 
rily  small  compared  with  P)  be  the  sum  which  a  man 
whose  available  fund  is  n  may  prudently  pay  for  the 
chances  pv  pz,  p3...  of  receiving  prizes  worth  Plf  P^ 
P8,  ...  respectively,  as  in  the  last  corollary. 


220  APPENDIX  IV. 

Then  the  rigorous  equation  to  determine  X  is 


n       n  j     \       n      n        \       n       n 
which  may  be  written 
p 

1+ 

n        \        n  n 


w>  /. 

J  t 

V1  (-I--*— Yp°  fi     x  VP8 
ij     \    w+pj     v    n+pj  ••• 


or,  since  X  is  small  compared  with  n, 

jTp~+  n+P  +  "j 
P\P*  f       PVS 

+  =-*}          1+^-5  1...-1 

w  /  v    » / 


whence     X  =-— 


This  formula  is  equally  applicable  when  there  is  a 
possibility  of  not  receiving  any  prize,  as  the  failure  to 
receive  a  prize  may  be  treated  as  the  receiving  of  a  prize 
of  zero  value  :  i.  e.  one  of  the  quantities  P19  P2,  P3  ... 
will  be  in  this  case  zero. 

COROLLARY.  —  In  the  case  when  there  is  a  single 
prize  P,  and  the  chance  of  gaining  it  is  p,  the  formula 
becomes 


X 


p    +1-P 

n  +  P       n 

n(B*P)     I/,  ,  -PV 
n  +  (l-p)P\\        n  I 


THE   DISADVANTAGE    OF   GAMBLING.  221 

EXAMPLES. — A  man  possessing  a  pound  is  offered  a 
ticket  in  a  lottery,  in  which  there  are  99  blanks,  and 
one  prize  worth  100  pounds.  What  may  he  prudently 
pay  for  the  ticket  ? 

Here         n=l         P=100 


x  *0472  ='0519 


Hence  he  can  only  afford  to  pay  about  a  shilling  for 
the  ticket. 

Again.     How  much  may  a  man  with  10  pounds  pay 

for  the  same  ticket  ? 

i 

Here    n  =  10     P  =  100    p  =  - 

1100 /100  /IT 

x    "  109  (    V  J 
1100 


Hence  he  can  afford  to  pay  about  4s.  lOJd.  for  the 
ticket. 

Again.     How  much  may  a  man  with  100  pounds  pay 
for  the  same  ticket  ? 

Here    rc=100        P=100 

_  20000 /100     /y 

A       "  199    (    V  * 

=  20020    x  -0069  =  -693. 
199 

Hence  he  may  pay  nearly  14  shillings  for  the  ticket. 


222  APPENDIX  IV. 

Again.  Suppose  the  man  has  1000  pounds.  This 
sum  is  large  compared  with  the  value  of  the  prize. 
Hence  we  may  apply  the  simpler  formula  given  in 
Proposition  XXXVI.  (Cor.),  which  leads  to  the  result 


Hence  he  may  pay  19  shillings  for  the  ticket. 

If  we  had  applied  to  this  last  case  the  formula 
of  the  present  corollary  we  should  have  obtained  the 
slightly  more  correct  result  '9507,  the  difference  between 
the  two  results  being  nearly  one-fifth  of  a  farthing. 

The  formula  of  Proposition  XXXVII.  is  applicable 
in  the  case  of  the  Petersburg  problem,  a  problem  of 
some  intrinsic  interest,  but  chiefly  of  importance  on 
account  of  its  having  been  repeatedly  made  the  ground 
of  objections  to  the  mathematical  theory  of  probability. 
This  celebrated  problem  may  be  stated  as  follows  : 

THE    PETERSBURG    PROBLEM. 

A  coin  is  tossed  again  and  again  until  a  tail  is 
turned  up.  If  the  first  throw  give  a  head  one  is  to 
receive  a  florin,  if  the  second  also  give  a  head  one  is  to 
receive  two  florins  more,  if  in  addition  the  third  throw 
give  a  head  one  is  to  receive  four  florins  more,  and  so 
on,  doubling  the  sum  received  every  time  ;  but  as  soon 
as  a  tail  is  turned  up  the  play  stops  and  one  receives 
nothing  further.  The  question  is,  what  ought  one  to 
give  for  the  expectation  ? 


THE   DISADVANTAGE   OF   GAMBLING.  223 

The  absolute  value  of  the  expectation  is  easily  seen 
to  be  infinite.  Thus — 

The  chance  of  winning  the  florin  at  the  first  throw 
is  j  :  the  value  of  the  expectation  is  therefore  one 
shilling. 

The  chance  of  winning  the  two  florins  at  the  second 
throw  is  J :  the  value  of  the  expectation  is  therefore 
J  of  two  florins,  or  one  shilling. 

The  chance  of  winning  the  four  florins  at  the  third 
throw  is  £  :  the  value  of  the  expectation  is  therefore 
J  of  four  florins,  or  one  shilling,  and  so  on. 

Hence  the  value  of  the  expectation  attaching  to  each 
throw  to  which  there  is  a  possibility  of  the  play 
extending,  is  one  shilling.  But  the  play  may  possibly 
extend  to  a  number  of  throws  larger  than  any  assignable 
number.  Therefore  the  whole  expectation  is  worth 
a  number  of  shillings  larger  than  any  assignable 
number  :  that  is,  it  is  infinitely  great. 

Or  we  may  analyse  the  expectation  by  considering 
the  various  total  sums  which  it  is  possible  to  receive, 
and  the  chance  of  each  being  received.  Thus— 

If  a  tail  turn  up  the  first  time,  nothing  is  received : 
and  the  chance  of  this  is  j-. 

If  a  tail  turn  up  the  second  time  and  not  before,  one 
florin  is  received  :  and  the  chance  of  this  is  5. 

If  a  tail  turn  up  the  third  time  and  not  before,  1  +  2 
florins  are  received  :  and  the  chance  of  this  is  £. 

And  so  on.     Hence 

Q 


224  APPENDIX  IV. 

J  =  chance  of  receiving    0 
jp-=  1     =     2  -  1  florins. 

|r  = 1  4- 2     =     22-l  florins. 

gr*  14-2  +  4     =     23-l  florins. 

and  so  on,  ad  infinitum. 

Therefore  the  value  of  the  whole  expectation  is  (in 
florins) 

!_      J^ 

2  ~"  W 

Now    the    sum    of     this    series    to    r    terms*    is 
r-l      fl\r+1 
~o — ^  1  o )      '   a       ^°   an  infinite  number  of  terms 

it  is  infinity. 

Hence  the  value  of  the  mathematical  expectation  is 
infinite,  as  we  showed  before. 

But  here  a  difficulty  is  raised.  The  mathematical 
expectation  has  been  found  to  be  of  infinite  value,  and 
yet  (it  is  objected)  no  one  in  his  senses  would  give  even 
such  a  moderate  sum  as  ^£50  for  the  prospect  defined  in 
the  problem. 

The  fallacy  of  this  objection  has  been  pointed  out 
already.  We  have  shown  that  the  absolute  value  of .  a 

*  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  sum  of  this  series  to  r  terms  does 
not  exactly  correspond  with  the  expectation  when  the  play  is  limited 
to  r  throws,  because  when  the  play  is  thus  limited  the  chance  of 

winning  the  whole  number  (2r  - 1)  is  not  aF+T»  ^ut  is  ~fp  »  tne  same 
as  the  chance  of  winning  2r~ l  -  1  florins. 


THE   DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  225 

mathematical  expectation  is  not  the  price  which  a  man 
of  limited  means  ought  to  pay  for  the  prospect.  It 
expresses  the  value  of  the  expectation  to  a  man  who  is 
able  to  repeat  the  venture  indefinitely  without  the  risk 
of  his  operations  being  ever  terminated  by  lack  of 
means.  The  speculator's  fund,  to  begin  with,  must  be 
infinite  in  comparison  with  the  stakes  involved,  before 
he  may  venture  to  give  the  absolute  value  of  the 
mathematical  expectation  for  any  contingent  prospect 
which  he  may  desire  to  purchase.  In  the  Petersburg 
problem  the  mathematical  expectation  is  infinite :  but 
if  one  is  to  give  an  infinite  sum  for  the  venture  one 
must  take  care  to  hold  funds  infinite  in  comparison  with 
this  infinity.  In  other  words,  the  speculation  on  these 
terms  is  only  proper  for  one  with  respect  to  whose 
funds  the  infinite  stake  is  inconsiderable.  The  stake 
which  he  lays  down  may  be  00 ,  provided  that  his  funds 
are  00  x  QO  . 

But  to  find  the  sum  which  a  man  of  limited  means 
may  pay  for  the  expectation  defined  in  our  statement 
of  the  problem  we  may  apply  the  result  of  Proposition 
XXXVII.  Thus  if  m  +  1  be  the  number  of  florins 
which  the  man  possesses,  the  formula  to  determine 
the  sum  which  he  may  pay  may  be  written  as 
follows : 


2(m  +  l) 


226  APPENDIX    IV. 

For  example.  If  the  speculator  possess  nine  florins 
we  have  ??i=8.  The  numerator  is  "2137  ...  and  the 
denominator  '0966  ....  Hence  X  =  2'212. 

If  he  possess  33  florins  we  have  ?7i=32.  The  nume 
rator  is  now  '0807...  and  the  denominator  '0278...  . 
Hence  he  may  pay  nearly  three  florins. 

If  he  possess  1025  florins  we  have  m=1024.  The 
numerator  is  now  '00488  ...  and  the  denominator 
•00097...  .  Hence  he  may  pay  ahout  five  florins  for 
the  venture. 

The  result  at  which  we  have  arrived  is  not  to  be 
classed  with  the  arbitrary  methods  which  have  been 
again  and  again  propounded  to  evade  the  difficulty  of 
the  Petersburg  problem  and  other  problems  of  a  similar 
character.  Formulae  have  often  been  proposed,  which 
have  possessed  the  one  virtue  of  presenting  a  finite 
result  in  the  case  of  this  famous  problem,  but  they  have 
often  had  no  intelligible  basis  to  rest  upon,  or,  if  they 
have  been  established  on  sound  principles,  sufficient 
care  has  not  been  taken  to  draw  a  distinguishing  line 
between  the  significance  of  the  result  obtained,  and  the 
different  result  arrived  at  when  the  mathematical  expec 
tation  is  calculated. 

We  have  not  assigned  any  new  value  to  the  mathe 
matical  expectation ;  we  have  not  substituted  a  new 
expression  for  the  old ;  but  we  have  deduced  a  separate 
result,  which  without  disturbing  the  mathematical  ex 
pectation  h^s  a  definite  meaning  of  its  own.  We 


THE    DISADVANTAGE    OF    GAMBLING.  227 

have  found  not  the  fair  price  at  which  a  contingent 
prospect  may  be  transferred  from  one  man  to  another, 
but  the  value  which  such  a  prospect  has  to  a  man  in 
given  circumstances.  We  have  simply  determined  the 
terms  at  which  a  man  may  purchase  a  contingent  pros 
pect  of  advantage,  so  that  by  repeating  the  operation — 
each  time  on  a  scale  proportionate  to  his  funds  at  that 
time — he  may  be  left  neither  richer  nor  poorer  when 
each  issue  of  the  venture  shall  have  occurred  its  own 
average  number  of  times.  By  continuing  the  operation 
indefinitely,  the  recurrences  of  each  issue  will  tend  to  be 
proportional  to  their  respective  probabilities,  and,  there 
fore,  the  condition  we  have  taken  is  equivalent  to  the 
condition  that  in  the  long  run  the  man  may  expect  to 
be  neither  richer  nor  poorer. 

It  would  be  a  great  mistake  to  suppose  that  the 
price  which  one  man  may  prudently  give  for  a  venture 
is  the  price  which  the  man  with  whom  he  is  dealing 
may  prudently  take  for  it,  or  that  it  is  a  fair  price  at 
which  to  make  the  compact.  The  price  which  the  man 
may  prudently  give,  is  not  even  the  price  which  the 
same  man  may  prudently  take  if  he  change  sides  with 
his  fellow  gambler.  The  sum  in  consideration  of  which 
a  man  possessed  of  n  pounds  may  accept  a  position  in 
which  p±  is  the  chance  of  his  having  to  pay  Pv  pz  the 
chance  of  his  having  to  pay  p.2,  and  so  on  f  where 
2p  =  lJ  must  be  obtained  by  changing  the  algebraical 
signs  of  X,  jP1?  P2 . . .  in  the  formulae  of  Propositions 
XXXVI.  and  XXXVII. 


228  APPENDIX  IV. 

Thus   on    the   hypothesis   of    Proposition    XXXVI. 
(Cor.),  we  shall  have 


and  in  the  more  general  case  dealt  with  in  Proposition 
XXXVII.  we  shall  have 

/       PVi/       P\P>/      P\P* 
1-fl--1       I--2       I--3)    ... 
X=       ^       n  J    \       nj\      n  ) 

^^l+n-P,+n^Ps+''' 

The  historical  notes  which  follow  are  mainly  derived 
from  Mr.  Todhunter's  History  of  the  Mathematical 
Theory  of  Probability. 

The  volume  of  the  Commentarii  of  the  Petersburg 
Academy  for  the  years  1730  and  1731,  was  published  in 
1738.  It  contained  a  memoir  by  Daniel  Bernoulli, 
entitled,  Specimen  Theoriae  novae  de  mensura  sortis, 
expounding  a  theory  of  moral  expectation  as  distin 
guished  from  mathematical  expectation.  The  author 
estimates  that  if  a  man's  fund  is  increased  by  a  small 
increment,  the  value  of  the  increment  to  that  man 
varies  directly  as  the  increment,  and  inversely  as  his 
original  fund.  But  while  he  assumes  this  as  a  mathe 
matical  measure  of  what  he  regards  as  a  moral  value, 
Bernoulli  does  not  attempt  to  give  any  proof  of  his 
assumption :  and  rightly,  for  it  is  beyond  the  province 
of  mathematics  to  deal  with  such  a  subjective  value  as 
he  speaks  of.  Mathematics  can  only  be  applied  to  the 
measure  of  such  a  quantity  by  some  such  arbitrary  con- 


THE   DISADVANTAGE    OF   GAMBLING.  229 

nection  as  that  which  he  assumes.  But  that  which  he 
takes  to  represent  his  moral  expectation  is  substantially 
identical  with  the  quantity  which  we  have  heen  inves 
tigating,  viz.,  the  price  to  be  paid  for  a  venture,  in 
order  that  repetitions  indefinitely  multiplied  may  tend 
to  neutralise  one  another.  Bernoulli  draws  from  his 
theory  the  inference  which  we  have  established  at  the 
beginning  of  this  Appendix,  that  even  a  fair  chance  is 
disadvantageous.  The  Petersburg  problem,  as  he  deals 
with  it,  is  somewhat  simpler  than  the  modern  variety 
of  it,  which  we  have  enunciated  above.  A  is  to  receive 
a  florin  if  head  falls  the  first  time ;  two  florins  if  it  falls 
the  second  time,  and  not  before ;  four  florins  if  it  falls 
the  third  time,  and  not  before,  and  so  on.  The  mathe 
matical  expectation  is  infinite.  For  the  moral  expecta 
tion,  Bernoulli  gives  an  equation  equivalent  to  that 
which  we  should  write  down  in  accordance  with  Pro 
position  XXXVII. 

Daniel  Bernoulli's  memoir  contains  a  letter  addressed 
to  Nicolas  Bernoulli,  by  Cramer,  in  which  two  methods 
are  suggested  of  explaining  the  paradox  of  the  Peters 
burg  problem.  One  suggestion  is,  that  all  sums  greater 
than  224  are  practically  equal;  the  other  (which  is 
equally  arbitrary),  that  the  pleasure  derivable  from  a 
sum  of  money  varies  as  the  square  root  of  the  sum. 
On  one  of  these  suppositions  the  expectation  in  the 
Petersburg  problem,  as  enunciated  by  Bernoulli,  would 
be  13  ;  according  to  the  other,  it  would  be  about  2'9. 

D'Alembert  (in  the  year  1754)  maintained  that  a 
very  small  chance  was  to  be  regarded  as  absolutely 


230  APPENDIX   IV. 

zero.  He  does  not  suggest  a  limit  to  the  smallness, 
but  he  gives  an  example  in  which  the  chance  is  (J-)100. 
In  another  place  he  suggests  that,  in  the  Petersburg 
problem,  we  should  take  (/3  being  a  constant) 

-.  instead  of  — , 


as  the  chance  that  the  head  will  not  appear  before  the 
nth  throw.  From  time  to  time  he  seems  to  have  pro 
posed  a  variety  of  arbitrary  assumptions,  for  none  of 
which  any  better  reason  can  be  assigned  than  that  they 
lead  to  finite  results. 

Beguelin,  in  1767,  gave  six  different  solutions  of  the 
Petersburg  problem,  with  different  results. 

In  1777,  Buffon,  the  Naturalist,  published  his 
Essai  d'Arithmetique  Morale,  in  which  he  speaks  against 
gambling  in  language  singularly  resembling  that  which 
we  have  employed  in  the  earlier  pages  of  this  Appendix. 
"  Je  dis  qu'en  general  le  jeu  est  un  pacte  mal-entendu, 
un  contrat  desavantageux  aux  deux  parties,  dont  1'effet 
est  de  rendre  la  perte  toujours  plus  grande  que  le  gain ; 
et  d'oter  au  bien  pour  ajouter  au  mal."  But,  among 
other  arbitrary  assumptions,  this  writer  maintains  that 

any  chance  less  than    10000  is  to  be  considered  abso 
lutely  zero. 

Laplace,  whose  great  work,  the  Theorie  Analytique 
des  Probabilites,  was  published  in  1812,  has  developed 
many  of  Daniel  Bernoulli's  ideas  on  this  subject. 


MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES. 


1. — There  are  five  routes  to  the  top  of  a  mountain,  in  how 
many  ways  can  a  person  go  up  and  down  ? 

2. — Out  .of  20  knives  and  24  forks,  in  how  many  ways 
can  a  man  choose  a  knife  and  fork  ?  And  then,  in  how  many 
ways  can  another  man  take  another  knife  and  fork  ? 

3. — In  how  many  ways  can  the  letters  a  b  c  d  be  arranged 
without  letting  b  and  c  come  together  ? 

4. — A  has  7  different  books,  B  has  9  different  books,  in 
how  many  ways  can  one  of  A's  books  be  exchanged  for  one 
of  B  s  ? 

5. — In  the  case  of  the  last  question,  in  how  many  ways 
can  two  books  be  exchanged  for  two  ? 

6. — Five  men,  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  are  going  to  speak  at  a 
meeting,  in  how  many  ways  can  they  take  their  turns  without 
B  speaking  before  A  ? 

7. — In  how  many  ways,  so  that  A  speaks  immediately 
before  B  ? 


232  CHOICE    AND    CHANCE. 

8. — Five  ladies  and  three  gentlemen  are  going  to  play  at 
croquet,  in  how  many  ways  can  they  divide  themselves  into 
sides  of  four  each,  so  that  the  gentlemen  may  not  be  all  on 
one  side  ? 

9. — The  number  of  ways  of  selecting  n  things  out  of  2?i  +  2 
is  to  the  number  of  ways  of  selecting  n  things  out  of  2n  —  2 
as  99  to  7.  Find  n. 

10. — One  man  has  4  books,  another  man  has  6.  In  how 
many  ways  can  they  exchange  books,  each  keeping  the 
number  he  had  at  first  ? 

11. — One  man  has  4  books,  another  has  6,  and  a  third 
has  3.  In  how  many  ways  can  they  exchange  books,  each 
keeping  the  number  he  had  at  first,  but  every  one's  set  being 
altered  ? 

12. — Four  digits  are  arranged  at  random  so  as  to  form  a 
number  in  the  ordinary  scale  of  notation.  Two  cyphers  are 
then  associated  with  them,  and  they  are  re-arranged  at  random 
so  as  again  to  form  a  number.  Prove  that  the  average  value 
of  the  first  number  is  to  the  average  value  of  the  second  as 
101  to  6734. 

13. — A  ferry-boat  which  can  carry  n  people  has  to  convey 
m  people  across  a  river.  It  takes  a  full  load  every  time 
except  the  last :  find  the  number  of  ways  in  which  the  work 
can  be  done. 

14. — There  are  2n  guests  at  a  dinner  party ;  supposing 
that  the  host  and  hostess  have  fixed  seats  opposite  to  one 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  233 

another,  and  that  there  are  two  specified  guests  who  must  not 
be  placed  next  to  one  another,  find  the  number  of  ways  in 
which  the  company  can  be  placed. 

15. — Out  of  three  consonants  and  two  vowels,  how  many 
words  can  be  formed  containing  2,  3,  4,  or  5  letters,  words 
being  excluded  in  which  two  consonants  or  two  vowels  come 
together. 

16. — How  many  five-lettered  words  can  be  made  out  of  26 
letters,  repetitions  being  allowed,  but  no  consecutive  repeti 
tions  (i.  <?.,  no  letter  must  follow  itself  in  the  same  word). 

17. — A  boat's  crew  consists  of  eight  men,  of  whom  two  can 
only  row  on  the  stroke  side  of  the  boat,  and  three  only  on  the 
bow  side.  In  how  many  ways  can  the  crew  be  arranged  ? 

18. — There  are  m  parcels,  of  which  the  first  contains  n 
things ;  the  second  2n  things  ;  the  third  3n  things  ;  and  so 
on.  Shew  that  the  number  of  ways  of  taking  n  things  out 
of  each  parcel  ia  \jnn  -f-  S\n  \ m 

19. — How  many  different  rectangular  parallelepipeds  can 
be  constructed,  the  length  of  each  edge  being  an  integral 
number  of  inches  not  exceeding  10? 

20. — The  number  of  ways  of  dividing  2»  different  things 
into  two  equal  parts,  is  to  the  number  of  ways  of  similarly 
dividing  4n  different  things,  as  the  continued  product  of  the 
first  n  odd  numbers  to  the  continued  product  of  the  n  odd 
numbers  succeeding. 


234  CHOICE   AND    CHANCE. 

21. — In  how  many  ways  can  the  letters  of  the  word 
facetious  be  deranged  without  deranging  the  order  of 
the  vowels  ? 

22. — In  how  many  ways  can  the  letters  of  the  word 
abstemiously  be  deranged  without  deranging  the 
order  of  the  vowels  ? 

23. — In  how  many  ways  can  the  letters  of  the  word 
parallelism  be  deranged  without  deranging  the  order 
of  the  vowels  ? 

24. — How  many  solutions  can  be  given  to  the  following 
problem  ?  "  Find  two  numbers  whose  greatest  common 
measure  shall  be  G  and  their  least  common  multiple  M 
—  GraabPcyd8 ;  a,  6,  c,  d  being  prime  numbers." 

25. — How  many  solutions  can  be  given  to  the  following 
problem?  "Find  two  numbers  of  which  G  shall  be  a  common 
measure,  and  M  (as  in  the  last  question)  a  common 
multiple." 

26. — Prove  that  the  number  of  ways  in  which  p  positive 
signs  and  n  negative  signs  may  be  placed  in  a  row,  so  that  no 
two  negative  signs  shall  be  together,  is  equal  to  the  number 
of  combinations  of  p  + 1  things  taken  n  together. 

27.— In  the  expansion  of  (^  +  az  +  ...  +  ap)n  where  n  is 
an  integer  not  greater  than  p,  there  are 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  235 

terms,  in  none  of  which  any  one  of  the  quantities  %  az...ap 
occurs  more  than  once  as  a  factor;  and  the  coefficient  of 
each  of  these  terms  is  [n. 

28. —  Out  of  20  consecutive  numbers,  in  how  many  ways 
can  two  be  selected  whose  sum  shall  be  odd  ? 

29. — Out  of  30  consecutive  integers,  in  how  many  ways  can 
three  be  selected  whose  sum  shall  be  even  ? 

30. — Out  of  3n  consecutive  integers,  in  how  many  ways 
can  three  be  selected  whose  sum  shall  be  divisible  by  3  ? 

81. — If  four  straight  lines  be  drawn  in  a  plane  and  pro 
duced  indefinitely,  how  many  points  of  intersection  will  there 
generally  be  ? 

82. — If  n  straight  lines  be  drawn  in  a  plane,  no  two  being 
parallel  and  no  three  concurrent,  how  many  points  of  inter 
section  will  there  be  ? 

33. — If  n  straight  lines  be  drawn  in  a  plane,  no  two  being 
parallel,  and  no  three  concurrent  except  p  which  meet  in  one 
point,  and  q  which  meet  in  another  point,  how  many  other 
points  of  intersection  will  there  be  ? 

34. — A  square  is  divided  into  16  equal  squares  by  vertical 
and  horizontal  lines.  In  how  many  ways  can  4  of  these  be 
painted  white,  4  black,  4  red,  and  4  blue,  without  repeating 
the  same  colour  in  the  same  vertical  or  horizontal  row  ? 

35. — Find  the  number  of  combinations  that  can  be  formed 


236  CHOICE    AND   CHANCE. 

out  of  the  letters  of  the  following  line  (Soph.  Philoct.  746) : 

a7ra7T7ra7ra»      -TraTraTTTraTraTrTraTraTTTraTrai, 
taking  them  (1)  5  together,  and  (2)  25  together. 

86. — In  the  case  of  the  preceding  question,  if  the  number 
of  combinations  r  together  is  to  the  number  r  —  1  together 
as  9  :  10,  find  ?*,  it  being  known  that  it  lies  between  17 
and  ^4. 

37. — The  number  of  ways  of  selecting  4  things  out  of  n 
different  things  is  one-sixth  of  the  number  of  ways  of  select 
ing  4  things  out  of  2n  things  which  are  two  and  two  alike  of 
n  sorts  :  find  n. 

38. — If  pq-\-r  different  things  are  to  be  divided  as  equally 
as  possible  among  p  persons,  in  how  many  ways  can  it  be 
done  ?  ( r  <  p ) 

39. — In  how  many  ways  can  a  pack  of  cards  be  dealt  to 
four  players,  subject  to  the  condition  that  each  player  shall 
have  three  cards  of  each  of  three  suits  and  four  cards  of  the 
remaining  suit  ? 

40. — Into  how  many  parts  is  an  infinite  plane  divided  by 
n  straight  lines,  of  which  no  three  are  concurrent  ? 

41. — Into  how  many  parts  is  infinite  space  divided  by  n 
planes,  of  which  no  four  meet  in  a  point  ? 

42. — In  how  many  ways  can  three  numbers  in  arithmetical 
progression  be  selected  from  the  series  1,  2,  3  ...  2«,  and  in 
how  many  ways  from  the  series  1,  2,  3  ...  ( 2?i-f  1 )  ? 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  237 

43. — If  there  be  n  straight  lines  in  one  plane,  no  three  of 
which  meet  in  a  point,  the  number  of  groups  of  n  of  their 
points  of  intersection,  in  each  of  which  no  three  points  lie  in 
one  of  the  straight  lines,  is  %  In — 1. 

44. — 120  men  are  to  be  formed  at  random  into  a  solid 
rectangle  of  12  men  by  10;  all  sides  are  equally  likely  to  be 
in  front.  What  is  the  chance  that  an  assigned  man  is  in 
the  front  ? 

45. — If  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  written  down  in  a 
ring  so  that  no  two  vowels  come  together,  what  is  the  chance 
that  a  is  next  to  b  ? 

46. — If  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  written  down  in  a 
row  so  that  no  two  vowels  come  together,  what  is  the  chance 
that  a  is  next  to  b  ? 

47. — A,  B,  C  have  equal  claims  for  a  prize.  A  says  to  B, 
let  us  two  draw  lots,  let  the  loser  withdraw  and  the  winner 
draw  lots  with  C  for  the  prize.  Is  this  fair  ? 

48. — Five  men,  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  speak  at  a  meeting,  and  it 
is  known  that  A  speaks  before  B,  what  is  the  chance  that  A 
speaks  immediately  before  B  ? 

49. — if  n  things  (a,  /3,  y,  &c.)  be  arranged  in  a  row,  subject 
to  the  condition  that  a  comes  before  /3,  what  is  the  chance 
that  a  comes  next  before  /3  ? 


238  CHOICE    AND    CHANCE. 

50. — Two  numbers  are  chosen  at  random,  find  the  chance 
that  their  sum  is  even. 

51. — There  are  n  counters  marked  with  odd  numbers,  and 
n  more  marked  with  even  numbers ;  if  two  are  drawn  at 
random  shew  that  the  odds  are  n  to  n  —  1  against  the  sum  of 
the  numbers  drawn  being  even. 

52. — The  figures  142857  are  arranged  at  random  as  the 
period  of  a  circulating  decimal,  which  is  then  reduced  to  a 
vulgar  fraction  in  lowest  terms.  Shew  that  the  odds  are 
119  :  1  against  the  denominator  being  7. 

53. — There  are  ten  counters  in  a  bag  marked  with  num 
bers.  A  person  is  allowed  to  draw  two  of  them.  If  the 
sum  of  the  numbers  drawn  is  an  odd  number,  he  receives  that 
number  of  shillings  ;  if  it  is  an  even  number,  he  pays  that 
number  of  shillings.  Is  the  value  of  his  expectation  greater 
when  the  counters  are  numbered  from  0  to  9  or  from  1  to  10  ? 

54. — If  a  head  counts  for  one  and  a  tail  for  two,  shew  that 
Sn  is  the  most  likely  number  to  throw  when  2/?  coins  are 
tossed.  Also  shew  that  the  chance  of  throwing  3(n  +  l) 
with  2(?i  + 1)  coins  is  less  than  the  chance  of  throwing  3n 
with  2rc  coins  in  the  ratio  2w  +  1  :  2n  +  2. 

55. — A  bag  contains  2»  counters,  of  which  half  are  marked 
with  odd  numbers  and  half  with  even  numbers,  the  sum 
of  all  the  numbers  being  S.  A  man  is  to  draw  two  counters. 
If  the  sum  of  the  numbers  drawn  be  an  odd  number,  he  is  to 
receive  that  number  of  shillings ;  if  an  even  number,  he  is  to 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXAMPLES.  239 

pay  that  number  of  shillings.     Shew  that  his  expectation  is 

worth  (in  shillings) 

S 


56. — If  in  the  case  of  the  last  question  there  be  ra+n 
counters,  of  which  m  are  marked  with  odd  numbers,  amount 
ing  to  M,  and  n  with  even  numbers  amounting  to  N,  the 
man's  expectation  is  worth 

M+N-(m-n)(M-N) 
|-  (m+n)  (ra-fn  — 1) 

57. — What  are  the  odds  against  throwing  7  twice  at  least 
in  three  throws  with  two  dice  ? 

58. — Two  persons  play  for  a  stake,  each  throwing  two 
dice.  They  throw  in  turn,  A  commencing.  A  wins  if  he 
throws  6,  B  if  he  throws  7  :  the  game  ceasing  as  soon  as 
either  event  happens.  Shew  that  A's  chance  is  to  J5's  as 
80  to  31. 

59. — Four  persons  draw  each  a  card  from  an  ordinary  pack. 
Find  the  chance  (i)  that  one  card  is  of  each  suit :  (ii)  that 
no  two  cards  are  of  equal  value  :  (iii)  that  one  card  is  of  each 
suit  and  no  two  of  equal  value. 

60. — Each  of  four  persons  draws  a  card  from  an  ordinary 
pack.  Find  the  chance  that  one  card  is  of  each  suit,  and 
that  in  addition,  on  a  second  drawing,  each  person  shall  draw 
a  card  of  the  same  suit  as  before. 

61. — A  bag  contains  %n(n+l)  counters,  one  marked  1, 

R 


240  CHOICE    AND    CHANCE. 

two  marked  4,  three  marked  9,  &c.  A  person  draws  out  a 
counter  at  random,  and  is  to  receive  as  many  shillings  as  the 
number  marked  on  it.  Prove  that  the  value  of  his  expecta 
tion  varies  as  the  square  of  the  number  of  counters  in  the  bag. 

62. — A  and  B  throw  for  a  certain  stake,  A  having  a  die 
whose  faces  are  numbered  10,  13,  16,  20,  21,  25  ;  and  B  a 
die  whose  faces  are  numbered  5,  10,  15,  20,  25,  30.  The 
highest  throw  to  win,  and  equal  throws  to  go  for  nothing. 
Prove  that  the  odds  are  17  to  16  in  favour  of  A. 

63. — A  pack  of  cards  consists  of  p  suits  of  q  cards  each, 
numbered  from  1  up  to  q.  A  card  is  drawn  and  turned  up  : 
and  r  other  cards  are  drawn  at  random.  Find  the  chance 
that  the  card  first  drawn  is  the  highest  of  its  suit  among  all 
the  cards  drawn. 

64. — A  and  B  play  for  a  stake  which  is  to  be  won  by 
him  who  makes  the  highest  score  in  4  throws  of  a  die. 
After  two  throws,  A  has  scored  12,  and  B  9.  What  is  A's 
chance  of  winning  ? 

65. — A  bag  contains  6  shillings  and  2  sovereigns.  What 
is  the  value  of  one's  expectation  if  one  is  allowed  to  draw 
till  one  draws  a  sovereign  ? 

66. — There  are  m  white  balls  and  m  black  ones  :  in  balls 
are  placed  in  one  bag,  and  the  remaining  m  in  a  second  bag, 
the  number  of  white  and  black  in  each  being  unknown.  If 
one  ball  be  drawn  from  each  bag,  find  the  chance  that  they 
are  of  the  same  colour. 


I  MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  241 

67. — In  the  last  question,  if  m==  4,  and  a  ball  of  the 
same  colour  has  been  drawn  from  each,  find  the  chance  that 
a  second  drawing  will  give  balls  of  the  same  colour :  ( i )  if 
the  balls  drawn  at  first  have  been  replaced,  and  (ii)  if  they 
have  not  been  replaced. 

68. — A  player  has  reckoned  his  chance  of  success  in  a 
game  to  be  e,  but  he  considers  that  there  is  an  even  chance 
that  he  has  made  an  error  in  his  calculation  affecting  the 
result  by  e'  (either  in  excess  or  defect).  Shew  that  this 
consideration  does  not  affect  his  chance  of  success  in  a  single 
game,  but  increases  his  chance  of  winning  a  series  of  games. 

69. — Shew  that  in  taking  a  handful  of  shot  from  a  bag  it 
is  more  probable  that  an  odd  number  will  be  drawn  than  an 
p  even  number. 

70. — A  bag  contains  m  white  and  n  black  balls,  and  from 
it  balls  are  drawn  one  by  one  till  a  white  ball  is  drawn. 
A  bets  B  at  each  drawing,  x  to  y,  that  a  black  ball  is  drawn. 
Prove  that  the  value  of  A's  expectation  at  the  beginning  of 

the  drawing  is       *_..    -  x 

71. — Counters  (n)  marked  with  consecutive  numbers  are 
placed  in  a  bag,  from  which  a  number  of  counters  (m)  are  to 
be  drawn  at  random.  Shew  that  the  expectation  of  the  sum 
of  the  numbers  drawn  is  the  arithmetic  mean  between  the 
greatest  and  least  sums  which  can  be  indicated  by  the  number 
of  counters  (m)  to  be  drawn. 

72. — A  and  B  play  a  set  of  games,  in  which  A* a  chance 


242  CHOICE   AND   CHANCE. 

of  winning  a  single  game  is  p,  and  B's  chance  q.  Find 
(i),  the  chance  that  A  wins  m  out  of  the  first  w-j-w. 
(ii),  the  chance  that  when  A  has  won  m  games,  m-\-n 

have  been  played. 

(iii),  the  chance  that  A  wins  m  games  before  B  wins 

n  games. 

73.— The  face  of  a  die,  which  should  have  been  marked 
ace,  has  been  accidentally  marked  with  one  of  the  other  five 
numbers.  A  six  is  thrown  twice  in  two  throws.  What  is 
the  chance  that  the  third  throw  will  give  a  six  ? 

74. — One  of  two  bags  contains  10  sovereigns,  and  the 
other  10  shillings.  One  coin  is  taken  out  of  each  and  placed 
in  the  other.  This  is  repeated  10  times.  What  is  now  the 
expectation  of  each  bag  ? 

75. — A,  B,  C  are  candidates  for  an  office,  the  election  to 
which  is  in  the  hands  of  8m-\-^~L  electors.  3m  votes,  together 
with  the  casting  vote  if  necessary,  are  promised  to  A,  and  %m 
votes  to  B.  In  how  many  ways  can  the  remaining  votes  be 
given  so  that  A  may  be  successful  ? 

76. — A  writes  to  B  requiring  an  answer  within  n  days.  It 
is  known  that  B  will  be  at  the  address  on  some  one  of  these 
days,  any  one  equally  likely.  It  is  a  ^-days'  post  between 
A  and  B.  If  one  in  every  q  letters  is  lost  in  transit,  find 
the  chance  that  A  receives  an  answer  in  time.  (n>2p.) 

77. — What  is  the  probability  that  a  number,  consisting  of 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  243 

•7  digits,  the  sum  of  which  is  59,  will  be  exactly  divisible 
by  11? 

78. — There  are  n  vessels  containing  wine,  and  ?r  vessels 
containing  water.  Each  vessel  is  known  to  hold  a,  a+1, 
#+2,  ..o  or  a-\-m  —  1  gallons.  Find  the  chance  that  the 
mixture  formed  from  them  all  will  contain  just  as  much  wine 
as  water. 

79. — A  man  has  left  his  umbrella  in  one  of  three  shops 
which  he  visited  in  succession.  He  is  in  the  habit  of  leaving 
it,  on  an  average,  once  in  every  four  times  that  he  goes  to  a 
shop.  Find  the  chance  of  his  having  left  it  in  the  first, 
second,  and  third  shops  respectively. 

80. — If  mn  balls  have  been  distributed  into  m  bags,  n  into 
each,  what  is  the  chance  that  two  specified  balls  will  be  found 
in  the  same  bag  ?  And  what  does  the  chance  become  when 
r  bags  have  been  examined  and  found  not  to  contain  either 
ball? 

81. — One  card  out  of  a  pack  has  been  lost.  From  the 
remainder  of  the  pack,  thirteen  cards  are  drawn  at  random, 
and  are  found  to  consist  of  two  spades,  three  clubs,  four 
hearts,  and  four  diamonds.  What  are  the  respective  chances 
that  the  missing  card  is  a  spade,  a  club,  a  heart,  or  a 
diamond  ? 

82. — A  number  of  persons  A,  B,  C,  D  ...  play  at  a  game, 
their  chances  of  winning  any  particular  game  being  a,  /3,  y,  5 . .  . 
respectively.  The  match  is  won  by  A  if  he  gains  a  games  in 


244  CHOICE    AND    CHANCE. 

succession  ;  by  B  if  he  gains  b  games  in  succession  ;  and  so 
on.  The  play  continues  till  one  of  these  events  happens. 
Shew  that  their  chances  of  winning  the  match  are  propor 
tional  to 

(1-«K  ,  (l-0)ff,  &c 
l-a«     '       1-/35 

83. — A  goes  to  hall  p  times  in  q  consecutive  days  and  sees 
B  there  r  times.  What  is  the  most  probable  number  of  times 
that1  B  was  in  hall  in  the  q  days  ? 

Ex. — Suppose  p  =  4       g  =  l      r=8. 

84. — If  Mr  be  the  number  of  permutations  of  m  things 
taken  r  together,  and  Nr  the  number  of  permutations  of  n 
things  taken  r  together,  prove  that  the  number  of  permuta 
tions  of  m-\-n  things  r  together  will  be  obtained  by  expand 
ing  (M-\-N)r,  and  in  the  result  replacing  the  indices  by 
suffixes. 

85. — Find  the  number  of  positive  integral  solutions  of  the 
equation  #+2/+z+  ...  (p  variables)  =  m,  the  variables 
being  restricted  to  lie  between  I  and  n,  both  inclusive. 

86. — In  how  many  ways  can  26  different  letters  be  made 
into  six  words,  each  letter  being  used  once  and  only  once  ? 

87. — A  body  of  n  members  has  to  elect  one  member  as  a 
representative  of  the  body.  If  every  member  gives  a  vote, 
in  how  many  ways  can  the  votes  be  given  ? 

88. — In  the  case  of  the  last  question,  how  many  different 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  245 

forms  may  the  result  of  the  poll  assume,  regarding  only  the 
number  of  votes  given  to  each  member  and  not  the  names  of 
his  supporters  ? 

89. — In  a  company  of  sixty  members,  each  member  votes 
for  one  of  the  members  to  fill  an  office.  If  the  votes  be 
regarded  as  given  at  random,  what  is  the  chance  that  some 
member  shall  get  a  majority  of  the  whole  number  of  votes  ? 
Also  determine  the  chance  of  the  same  event  on  the  hypo 
thesis  that  every  different  result  of  the  poll  (considered  as  in 
the  last  question)  is  equally  likely  to  occur. 

90. — In  how  many  ways  can  3  sovereigns  and  10  shillings 
be  put  into  4  pockets  ?  (One  or  more  may  be  left  empty.) 

91. — In  how  many  ways  can  12  sovereigns  be  distributed 
into  five  pockets,  none  being  left  empty  ? 

92. — In  how  many  ways  can  20  books  be  arranged  in  a 
bookcase  containing  five  shelves,  each  shelf  long  enough  to 
contain  all  the  books  ? 

93. — In  how  many  ways  can  a  person  wear  five  rings  on 
the  fingers  (not  the  thumb)  of  one  hand  ? 

94. — A  debating  society  has  to  select  one  out  of  five  sub 
jects  proposed.  If  thirty  members  vote,  each  for  one  subject, 
in  how  many  ways  can  the  votes  fall  ? 

95. — In  the  last  question,  what  is  the  chance  that  upwards 
of  twenty  votes  fall  to  some  one  subject  ? 


246  CHOICE   AND   CHANCE. 

96.  —  A  bag  contains  m  counters  marked  with  odd  numbers, 
and  n  counters  marked  with  even  numbers.  If  r  counters  be 
drawn  at  random  the  chance  that  the  sum  of  the  numbers 
drawn  be  odd  is  £(1  +  p),  and  that  it  be  even  i(l—  ju,),  where 
/x,  is  the  coefficient  of  xr  in  the  expansion  of 


m+n 

97.  —  The  number  of  ways  in  which  r  things  may  be  distri 
buted  among  n-\-p  persons  so  that  certain  n  of  those  persons 
may  have  one  at  least  is 


98.  —  Show  that  for  n  different  things  1  —  (number  of  par 
titions  into  2  parts)   +  [2  (number  of  partitions  into  8  parts) 
—  .  .  .  .±  [n  —  1  (number  of  partitions  into  n  parts)  =  0. 

99.  —  Find  the  number  of  5-partitions  of  21. 

100.  —  Two  examiners  working  simultaneously  examine  a 
class  of  12  boys,  the  one  in  classics  the  other  in  mathema 
tics.     The  boys  are  examined  individually  for  five  minutes 
each  in  each  subject.     In  how  many  ways  can  a  suitable 
arrangement  be  made  so  that  no  boy  may  be  wanted  by  both 
examiners  at  once  ? 

101.  —  If/n  denote  the  number  of  derangements  of  n  terms 
in  circular  procession  so  that  no  term  may  follow  the  term 
which  it  followed  originally, 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  247 

102. — A  pack  of  n  different  cards  is  laid  face  downwards 
on  a  table.  A  person  names  a  certain  card.  That  and  all 
the  cards  above  it  are  shewn  to  him,  and  removed.  He 
names  another ;  and  the  process  is  repeated  until  there  are 
no  cards  left.  Find  the  chance  that,  in  the  course  of  the 
operation,  a  card  was  named  which  was  (at  the  time)  at  the 
top  of  the  pack. 

103. — Three  different  persons  have  each  to  name  an 
integer  not  greater  than  n.  Find  the  chance  that  the 
integers  named  will  be  such  that  every  two  are  together 
greater  than  the  third. 

104.— A  person  names  a  group  of  three  integers  (not 
necessarily  different,  but  each  one  not  greater  than  n). 
Find  the  chance  that  the  integers  named  will  be  such  that 
every  two  are  together  greater  than  the  third. 

105. — If  three  numbers  be  named  at  random,  they  are 
just  as  likely  as  not  to  be  proportional  to  the  sides  of  a 
possible  triangle. 

106. — A  list  is  to  be  published  in  three  classes.  The  odds 
are  m  to  1  that  the  examiners  will  decide  to  arrange  each 
class  in  order  of  merit,  but  if  they  are  not  so  arranged,  the 
names  in  each  will  be  arranged  in  alphabetical  order.  The 
list  appears,  and  the  names  in  each  class  are  observed  to  be 
in  alphabetical  order,  the  numbers  in  the  several  classes 
being  a,  b,  and  c.  What  is  the  chance  that  the  order  in  each 
class  is  also  the  order  of  merit  ? 

107. — How  many  different  throws  can  be  made  with  n 


248  CHOICE    AND    CHANCE. 

dice,  those  throws  being  considered  the  same  in  which  the 
same  set  of  numbers  is  turned  up  ? 

108.  —  Prove   that  the    most    likely  throw    in    the    last 
question  is  one  in  which  the  numbers  turned  up  are    all 
different,  if  n  is  not  greater  than  6.      And  find  the  most 
likely  throw  when  n  is  greater  than  6. 

109.  —  There   are    2>i   letters,    two    and   two    alike   of   n 
different  sorts.      Shew  that  the  number  of  orders  in  which 
they  may  be   arranged,   so  that  no   two  letters   which   are 
alike  may  come  together,  is 


110.  —  From  a  bag  containing  m  gold  and  n  silver  coins,  a 
coin  is  drawn  at  random,  and  then  replaced  ;    and  this  ope 
ration  is  performed  p  times.     Find  the  chance  that  all  the 
gold  coins  will  be  included  in  the  coins  thus  drawn. 

111.  —  A  train,  consisting  of  p  carriages,  each  of  which  will 
hold  q  men,  contains  pq  —  m  men.     What  is  the  chance  that 
another  man  getting  in,  and  being  equally  likely  to  take  any 
vacant  place,  will  travel  in  the  same  carriage  with  a  given 
passenger. 

112.  —  If  the  chance  of  a  trial  succeeding  is  to  its  chance 
of  failing  as  m  :  n,  the  most  likely  e"vent  in  (m-\-n)r  trials 
is  mr  successes  and  nr  failures. 

113.  —  If  n  witnesses  concur  in  reporting  an  event  of  which 
they  received  information  from  another  person,  the  chance 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXAMPLES.  249 

that  the  report  is  true  will  be  (pn+l  +  gn+l)  -f-  (pn+(f) 
where  p~\ — q  is  the  chance  of  the  correctness  of  a  report 
made  by  any  single  person. 

114. — The  reserved  seats  in  a  concert  room  are  numbered 
consecutively  from  1  to  m  +  n  -\-  r.  I  send  for  m  consecutive 
tickets  for  one  concert  and  n  consecutive  tickets  for  another 
concert.  What  is  the  chance  that  I  shall  find  no  number 
common  to  the  two  sets  of  tickets  ? 

115. — Two  persons  are  known  to  have  passed  over  the 
same  route  in  opposite  directions  within  a  period  of  time 
m-\-n-\-r,  the  one  occupying  time  m,  and  the  other  time  n ; 
find  the  chance  that  they  will  have  met. 

116. — If  p  =  l  —  q  be  the  change  of  success  at  any  trial, 
what  is  the  chance  that  in  r-\-n  trials  there  should  be  at 
least  r  consecutive  successes,  (i)  when  n<r  and  (ii)  when 
m  is  the  greatest  integer  in  n~-r. 

117. — If  n  numbers  be  selected  at  random,  what  are 
the  respective  chances  that  their  continued  product  in  the 
common  scale  of  notation  will  end  with  the  digits  0,  1,  2,  3, 
4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9  ? 

118. — There  are  n  tickets  in  a  bag  numbered  1,  2,  3,  ...n. 
A  man  draws  two  tickets  at  once,  and  is  to  receive  a  number 
of  sovereigns  equal  to  the  product  of  the  numbers  drawn. 
What  is  his  expectation  ? 

119. — What  would  be  the  expectation  in  the  last  question 
if  three  tickets  were  drawn  and  their  continued  product 
taken  ? 


250  CHOICE   AND    CHANCE. 

120.  —  If  a  set  of  dominoes  be  made  from  double  blank  up 
to  double  n,  prove  that  the  number  of  them  whose  pips  are 
n  —  r  is  the  same  as  the  number  whose  pips  are  ™+r, 
and  the  number  is  the  coefficient  of  xn~r  in  the  expansion  of 
(1  —  x  —  #2+#3)~~1  ;  and  the  total  number  of  dominoes  is 


121.  —  If  from  the  dominoes  in  the  last  question  a  man 
is  to  draw  one  at  random,  and  to  receive  as  many  pounds 
as  there  are  pips  on  the  domino  drawn,  what  is  his  expec 
tation  worth  ? 

122.  —  If  p  be  a  prime  number  whose  reciprocal  in  the 
decimal  scale  of  notation  is  expressed  by  a  recurring  period 
of  p  —  1  digits,  and  if  the  digits  of  this  period  be  rearranged 
at   random,    the    chance  that   the  new  period  thus  formed 
will  belong  to   a  fraction  whose  denominator  is  p,  will  be 
(?  +  l)r~1([^)10  -T-  [p  —  2,  where    q    is    the   quotient  and  r 
the  remainder  when  p  is  divided  by  10. 

123.  —  A  vessel  is  filled  with  three  liquids  whose  specific 
gravities  in  descending  order  of  magnitude  are  8lt  S2,  S3. 
All    volumes   of   the   several   liquids    being    equally    likely, 
prove  that  the  chance  of  the  specific  gravity  of  the  mixture 
being  greater  than  8  is 


- 

'          - 


according  as  8  lies  between  Sl  and  £2,  or  between  S2  and  SB. 


ANSWEES  TO  THE  EXAMPLES. 


EXAMPLES  ON  CHOICE  (pages  62-64). 

1.   20.       2.   840  ways ;  or,  considering  the  arrangement, 
20160  ways.      3.   40320,  5040.      4.    1320. 

[32  ^  [64 

5*     [12  [12  [8  6t     [32  ([8)2  ([2)6 

7.   166320.       8.   [15  -  192.       9.   120.       10.   480,  22. 

18.[60  8.|60 

1L     [20  [40'      [20  [40 

12.  3.  13.  360,120,24.  14.  675675.  15.  1436400. 
16.  9849600.  17. — If  there  be  m  of  one  sort,  and  n  of 
the  other,  the  number  of  ways  is  \m  In.  18.  66— 64. 
19.  20.  20.  3439,1271.  21.  [90 -T- [24 [22 [30 [4 [10 
22.  167.  23.  20591.  24.  5040,  75600. 

EXAMPLES  ON  CHANCE  (pages  138-141). 

2  1 

1.    q.       2.     ~.     3. — The  alphabet  containing  20  con- 

o 

sonants  and  6  vowels,  ^.  4. — The  chances  are  propor 
tional  to  14256  :  12060  :  10175.  5.  JL  6.  — 


252  CHOICE   AND   CHANCE. 

83  1 

7.    3  shillings.        8.  .       9.        .      10.    10  shillings. 


11?        ^   245753125  625  16 

243'       729'  387419489'  2187'  '  27 

iyi   7  17   11    lr.  0-7,  9nft  .-  130  16025 

14'  12  '54  '108'   15'  257to208'  16'  837'  17577 


17'        19'  5'   20.  31  to  15. 


MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES  (pages  231-250). 

1.  25.  2.  480,  437.  3.  12.  4.  63.  5.  756. 
6.  60.  7.  24.  8.  30.  9.  5.  10.  209.  11.  59733. 
13.  Ifw=:gn+r,  m-^n3r.  14. 


15.  66.    16.  10156250.    17.  1728.    19.  220. 

21.  3023.   22.  332629.   23.  277199.   24.  16. 

25.  in  (w-1)  where  n  =  (a-f-  1)  (/3  +  1)  (y  +1)  (8  +1). 

28.  100.   29.  2030.   30,  £H  (3?i2-3?i+2).   31.  6. 

32.  *n(n-l).  33.  in(«-l)-^(p-l)-H(g--l). 

34.  576.  35.  15,  12.   36.  19.   37.  6. 

3a  39>  -  4a 


41.    +l)(^-H+6).   42.  »i(w-l),wa.   44.    . 


1  2 

45^     _  .          46.     —  .         47.  —  Their  respective  chances 
10  21 

•*  I'  I'  I-    48-  !•     49-  *     50'  1- 

53.—  The  latter  is  better  as   11  to  9.          57.     25  :  2. 


ANSWERS  TO  THE  EXAMPLES.  253 


59 
63 

74 

2197 

704 

264 

60          52728 

'     20825  ' 

P    fi    I: 

4165' 

4165' 

112559125* 
65.     22  shillings. 

i-      73-S- 

oo                       54 

2j9\/           1\8                      4 

H7\   ~^/  '         '21* 

h^+^+.-.+^^v" 

r  +  l(        \pq    \pq-q 

-r-lj 

.  21±19(-8)10 
78.     Middle 

*7Q 

6' 

crowns.    ' 
coefficient 

7>~98' 
r6/l- 

of    (1H 

( 
80. 

m                 J 

™*     37'  37' 

37* 

mn  —  1*   mn  —  ?-?z  —  1  ' 

81-   WWWW      83. 

this  and  the  next  lower  integer  are  equally  likely.     If  this  be 

not  an  integer,  the  next  lower  integer.     (Example  :  5  or  6.) 

1771 
86.     ^~-  x  [26.       87.   nn.        88.    |2re-l  -^  \n  \n-l. 

89.  —  In  the  first  case,  the  odds  against  the  event  are  as  the 
sum  of  the  first  thirty  terms  to  the  sum  of  the  remaining 
thirty  terms,  in  the  expansion  of  the  binomial  (59  +  1)59.  In 
the  second  case,  the  chance  is  60  [60  [88  -=-  [29  [119. 
90.—  5720.  91.  330.  92.  [24  +  [4.  93,  6720. 
94.  46376.  99.  105.  100.  IS!9^1.  102.  I-*,1 


.03.  ,+.  ,04. 

m-4-1 

106' 


254  CHOICE   AND    CHANCE. 

108. — If  n  lie  between  6r  and  6(r+l),  the  most  likely  throw 
will  be  one  in  which  each  number  appears  either  r  or  r-\-l 

times. 

(r+l)(r+2)  mn+mr+nr 


117.— Chance  of  the  final  digit  being  0  is  (10n-8M-5n+4n) 
-i-10n.  Chance  of  5  is  (5n-4n)-j-10n.  Chancesof  1,  8,  7,  9, 
are  equal,  each  being  4n~*  —  10n.  Chances  of  2, 4, 6, 8,  are  equal, 
each  being  4n~1(2n-l)-r-10n.  118.  (n  +  1)  (3n  +  2)  ~  12. 
119.  t?rc(?i  +  l)2.  121.  n  pounds. 


D.   MAEPLES,   PRINTER,   LORD    STREET,   LIVERPOOL. 

HI 


7  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO 

ASTRONOMY,  MATHEMATICS- 
_       L    STATISTICS  LIBRARY 

This  publication  is  due  on  the  LAST  DATE 
and  HOUR  stamped  below. 


Tel.  No.  642-3381 


RBl7-40m-2,'71 
(P2002slO)4188-A-32 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


MATH.-STAT. 
LIBRARY 


CD37SMSfiED